I
The .A:nclent of PRANIC HEALING 0
I
Cop yright C 19 87 by Choa Ko k Sui
,--...__
All rights re served . No part of thill book may be reproduced in any form whatsoever wit ho ut perm ission in writing from the a utho r, ex cep t fo r brief qu ota tion s o r pa ssages wit h proper ack nowledgements.
Printed in the Philippines by : Q uality Boo kb ind ing & Print ing 4 6 Hyacinth St reet. Roxas District Quezon City. Metro Mani la , Philippines Color separatio n by: Reprocolor Center , Inc.
ISBN: 97 1·9 1106-0-0
,
PRACTICAL MANUAL ON PARANORMAL HEALING
First prin ting, 1987 Seco nd printi ng, 19 89
INSTITUTE FOR INNER STUD IES, INC. 2nd Floor, EVE KAL BUILDING ass Pasay Road , Corner Amo rsolo Sf. Makati, Me tro Manlb. Tell. 8 10-2808 ; 818·1568; 818·14 65
vm I
'J, /. ~
Acknowledgemen ts
Dedicated to my parents.
To my Respected Teacher Mei Ling and others for their instructions, and blessings.
I j
to my Respected Teachers. especially
To Mike Nator and others for spending their time. with the author in esoteric experiments and .in clairvoyantly monitoring them.
Teacher Mei Ling.
To my wife for assisting me in my other works; thereby, . making the writing of this book possible.
and to my countries.
To Dr. Rolando CarbonelJ, Marilou GuilJen, and Lynn Payno for making valuable advice and for editing the work. To Benny Gantioqui, the artist, for the book cover design, air brush paintings and illustrations. ' And to others not mentioned for their help and support.
the Philippines and China.
A Preview
Haunted is man, who feels he has gods at his beck and daemons on his back. Clairvoyants say this is not just a feeling but a fact . Every person is haunted by two "phantoms" - an inner and an outer aura that follow the contours of his physical body and compose the luminous energy field in which he lives and moves and has his being. When he sickens it's because of an energy "leak" in either his inner aura or his outer one. Choa Kok Sui, who has been into paranorma healing for twenty years, does not believe that any "special inborn healing power" is needed to perform paranormal cures. " All that one needs is the willingness to heal." In fact , his policy is to have every patient learn how to cure himself. His purpose is to make "what's considered paranormal healing today quite common and normal a few decades from now." The "unearthly" must be removed from fear and superstition and be made at home in our daily world as a science and art. Himself from very young immersed in psychic studies, Choa Kok Sui would now pass to others what he has learned of "pranic" healing. "I am not a clairvoyant nor was I born with any healing ability. If I could learn how to heal effectively, then you can also!" And the cases of his that he cites fascinate by sounding so commonplace.
I"
I (I.
A musician named Romualdo, 49, of Cubao WllB diagnosed as suffering from cardiac injury and cholesterol deposits in the heart. While undergoing medical treatment, he was urged by his son to try pranic healing at the same time, which he did, under Choa Kok Sui. After several sessions, Choa Kok Sui told him: "You are already cured!" When the musician was inspected by his cardiologist, the latter was astonished to find that the patient
XII
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF I'RANIC m;ALlNG
A PREVIEW
had recovered so instantaneously, and without hospitalization. An X.ray disclosed no heart damage: he was fit to work. Rornualdo is convinced it was the pranic treatment that hastened his cure.
Moreover, says Choa Kok Sui, trees and plants absorb prana from sun, air and ground and exude a lot of excess prana: "Tired or sick people benefit much by lying down under trees. Better results can be obtained by verbally requesting the being of the tree to help the sick person get well. Prana can be projected to another person for healing: persons who are depleted tend to absorb prana from those with an excess of it. This is why you may have encountered persons who tend to make you feel tired or drained for no apparent reason."
A housewife, Mrs. Luz, 24, of Quezon City was two months pregnant with her first child when she suffered bleeding and stomach pains. Her doctor opined she might miscarry; the medicine he gave her stopped the bleeding but not the stomach pains. Finally she went to Choa Kok Sui, who treated her only once and for only five minutes. But the pain disappeared at once, her pregnancy was not aborted.
(Said Jesus: "Someone has touched me, power has gone from me.") . The pranic healer must sensitize his fingertips and eyes so he can "feel" and "scan" the aura (or ethereal body) of the patient and thus verify where the sickness, or energy "leak," is. But this requires no clairvoyance nor psychic power, according to Choa Kok Sui.
A lawyer, Mr. Teofilo, 68, had shaking hands, weak knees and chest pains. Medical treatment lasting ten years failed to stop the spasms and the pains. "Then Choa Kok Sui treated me, praying over me several times. I felt my body becoming lighter, and my muscle being activated. Also, something was being cleansed from my body by some mysterious force. Now I can eat without assistance because my hands no longer shake; I can now walk 'faster ; and I experience chest pains only when I am very tired or emotionally upset. "
"You do not even have to tense your muscles or exert extraordinary effort when you will or intend. You don't have to visualize or close your eyes . When you perform with understanding, expectation and concentration , you are already willing! The degree of concentration required is not extraordinary. The degree of concentration used in reading a book is sufficient to perform pranic healing."
Do these cases prove that pranic healing is "true"? Choa Kok Sui says that prana, or ki, is the vital energy or life force called pneuma by the Greeks, mana by the Polynesians, and ruah (breath of life) by the Jews. "The healer projects prana into the patient, thereby healing him." There are three major sources of prana, From the sun comes the solar prana that invigorates and that can be absorbed by sunbathing and drinking sun-exposed water, but too much solar prana can harm because it is so potent. From the air comes the ozone prana most effeclive when acquired through deep slow rhythmic breathing and through the energy centers (called "chakras") of our inner .and outer aura,/which is our ethereal body or envelop, From the earth comes the ground prana that enters us through the soles of our feet.
XIn
Among the religious, regular meditation is advisable and the treatment should begin with a prayer and invocation.
• ~
"Pray for a few minutes any religious prayer you are used to . Theil mentally recite the healing invocation: Lord, make me thy healing instrument. Let my entire being be filled with compassion for others who are suffering. Lord, let your healing and regenerating power flow through this body. With thanks and in full faith! The invocation should be repeated two times, with humility, sincerity, reverence, and intense concentration. Then place your hand on the affected area and mentally recite: In His name, you are clean, whole and perfect! You are healed! So be it! Continue the invocation until you feel that the patient will be all right."
XIV
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC IIEALING
Foreword
Once, suffering from a severe headache, Choa Kok Sui, instead of seeking treatment, experimented by listening to soothing music, and found theheadache reduced. "So, relaxing the mind helpsthe body heal itself. The author has observed that focu sing on th e pain and trying to remove it makes healing difficult. But ignoring the pain and diverting attention to something pleasant sped up the rate of healing." From ·t his he ha s . moved on to the practice of training patients to heal themselves. "The patients should be instructed to drink energized water and to recuperate under a big tree. Some patients even go to the extent of embracing t he tree. Those who are religious should pra y regularly requesting the Lord to make them whole and perfect again. Others who are not t he praying type can be taught how to contact spiritu al guid es t hrough visualizing. For example, they can visualiz e t hey're in a beautiful garden among beings of light . T he visualizat ion does not have to be clear, just enough to divert their attention from t heir ailments and di scomforts. Their cond it ion will improve, th eir pain will be alleviated ." Choa Kok Sui has organized all this inform at ion into a book that's lucid and readable, "The Ancient Science and Art of Pranic Healing" he calls it; and even those who t end to shy away from things mystical and un earthly may gain a number of tips and pointer s from his " practical manual on paranorm al healing." As he says in amen aft er every session : " With thanks! So be it!" NICK JOAQU/N*
.. Philippille Daily tnculrer , July 24, 198 7
THERE IS a depth and breadth in Pranic Healing whic h is not yet understood by the casual observer. It is a distinct system of healing' based on its ow n philosophy of life and the supreme realization that there is a basic vita l energy in t he hu man body which is responsible for the maintenance of health. Presented here for the first time is a comprehensive study and practical manual by a competent Oriental healer which will throw a new light on the healing process itself. It is, in fact, a pioneering work of historical magnitude - and based on the author's almost two decades of research and study in esoteric sciences. While this healing approach may astound some orthodox views, its final merit is proven through the efficacy of resu lts in healing. Fortunately enough, with the on-going research efforts and amazing discoveries in the realm of psychic phenomena and paranormal healing, modern instruments are now able to measure and photograph this energy-field which exists around the physical organism. Even long before the advent of modern science, th e ancient sages and healers have already affirmed the presence of the hum an aura.
• In the Holy Bible, reference is made in Genesis of the "breath of life" which holds the very key to human existence, a seemingly mysterious force which animates and sustains life. It has also been further affirmed that the movement and quality of circulation, rhythm, and purity of Prana is what determines the quality of our health, even Our emotional states, and modes of thinking. Thus, we can no longer ignore that there certainly exists nonphysical components and processes within the physical or material dimension .
XVI
THE ANCIENT SCIE NCE AND AltT O F PItAN IC HEALING
In fact, the more a man k nows about his own body, nore he is mystified at its wonderful working precision. nachine, for instance, can repair its own broken parts, but )ody does this through t he vital energy or Prana it breathes, water it drinks and the food that it consumes.
the No t he t he
At the present stage o f evolution, man is littl e aware of ,he pranic forces, and consequently heavily identifies himself with matter, deluding himself into thinking that he is t he body. Nell-known authority on Yoga and Medicine, Dr. Steven Brena, wrote in his book that :
Man also fo rgets that matter is nothing else but condensed energy in continuous transformation. He wastes uital energy to feed his senses with a uariety of stimulations, born out of an unending chain of material desires. The more he dwells on matter, the more he needs 'fleshly ' nutrition to keep himself aliue, and the more he burns out oxygen, the less he feels the pranic forces within himse lf. This situation makes him sink into matter, and with less pralUl, he becomes depleted.
We certainly owe much to the author for his many years of laborious and patient research in the study of pranic healing. He is showing us the Way to live according to the laws of Nature. This is evident in his discussions on karma and the principle of love. It is also ' in the spirit of reverence. and humility that the author infuses a breath of spiritual significance to his work, especially in his chapter on meditation on the two hearts {Illum ination Technique},
Written in a simple, direct and straightforward ma nner and without any elaborate or obstruse language characteristic of scien.ifie and technical or scholarly studies, the author goes directly ;0 the very core of the principle he is espousing - and proceeds
FOREWORD
XVII
t o explain in easy step-by-step manner the process of pranic healing which he asserts most people can immediately learn and experience . You will shortly di scover, in this remarkable book, the amazing yet easy-to-follo w techniques on healing. The Ancient Science and Art of Pranic Healing offers us a practical and comprehensive guid e to cure a variety of ailments: fever and COlds, ulcers and sto mach d isord ers, migrain e and tension heada ches, to othach e, lung and breathing problems, arthritis, glau co ma, back pains, heart troubles, d isord ers of internal organs, mu scle pain, high blood pr essur e, insomnia, and many others. It is not only an effective, simple, and inexpensive form o f healing therapy but is also the safest and the mo st pract ical. What makes it even more appealing are the instantaneous results one som etimes experiences even aft er only go ing through a single session. If he speaks with authority, it is because he has d evoted two decades of his life in the study and practice o f esoteric sciences, Yoga system s, and par anormal subjects. Cho a Kok Sui is, however, far from being a reclusive my sti c or an ivory tower scientist. He is a rare combination of the practi cal and t he sp irit ual man.
I personally know him not only as an authe nt ic hea ler of the first caliber, but also as a guru (a reluctant o ne), and ab ove all, as a humanitarian. It is perh ap s this d eep loving kindness for his fellowmen that imp elled him to publish this book, which may become on e of th e mo st important h ealth care revolutions of this century.
-
Quantum cha nges are occu ring in all -field s of human endeavor. On e of the most ph enomenal o f these changes is happening in the field of healing and spir itual enlightenm ent. As an observer o f the New Age phenomenon, I believe th at the t ime has come for sharing with our fellowmen the world over the effi cac y of pranic healing. David Spangler, another spokesma n of the New Age, summarizes the curre nt situation in a quotat ion from his lecture ent it led Revelation: The Birth of a New Age:
XVIII
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND AliT OF PR ANIC II EALING
A new world is taking birth. This wor ld already ex ists and in a sense, its energies are precipitating out into form . People throughout the world are beginning to attune to this energy, because in th eir higher consciousness they are already part o f that wor ld. They are citizen s of it, though they may not know it consciously . Through the po wer of their lives, in th eir individual and collective demonstration, they provide precipitation points.
I have strong reasons to be lieve th at this book is one of those sign ifica nt precipitation points. It will provide a landmark in th e field of hea lt h and healing which is d estined to effect changes in our lifestyle and way s of thinking. I have personally benefited from t he tremendous effect s of pmnic healing from th e author himself. And I fully endo rse this techniqu e which I co nside r a boon and a gift to human ity . As on e who has engaged in personal research on the healing arts and human scie nce since 1963, not only in the 'Philippines but all over the wo rld - I must say that pranic healing is th e most unique, though less dramatic, of t hem all. The dram a lies in its effec t iveness. T here is no question of trying to impose or enforce belief. What we are simply suggesting is that we must learn to reserve or ~u spen d judgment and keep an open mind to novel possibilities, h owever, surprising and perhaps even unlikely they may appear 'ht first sight . From here, we mu st move on . .. take another step ! i nto the Unknown . May this book be both a grace and a blessing to you, as it as been to me. And may you experien ce, too, not on ly the joy o f being healed - but importantl y , the gift o f healing itself -
FOIIEWOIm
XIX
which is extending the frontiers o f loving service to our fellowmen.
ROLANDO A . CARBONELL, Ph. D. World Fellow, Int ernational Insti tute of Int egral Human Science Montreal, Canada
Prefa ce
THERE ARE many points of view co ncern ing diseases. According to Christ ian belief, di sease has be en the scourge of mankind ever since Adam and Eve wer e driven out of Paradise after th ey had di sob eyed God. Ori ginally, man was disease-free by nature. Disease, therefore, is seen as a punishment Cor man's sin. This is one theory or point of view. Western allopathic medicine on the other hand, holds to the view that disease is caused by such mal evolent mjcroscopic creatures as bacteria, germ s or virus which me ss up our natural physiological functioning or d efense mechanisms. Disease can also be caused, acc ording to this view, by emot iona l stress or psychological problems. And because disease is believed to be caused eitber by an infection, an allergen, a breakdown in man's physiological fun ctioning, all one has to do is to remove or neutralize th e invading mechanism or stress-inducing sit uat ion or agent and presto! The patient will be cured. Unfortunately, not all dis eases respond to such method of treatment, despite the impressive advances of modern medical science. As a matter o f fact, some med ication prescribed by doctors have serious side-effects.
~
But there appears to be a third alternative view, one that has been neglected by modern medical scien ce. I refer here to the energy body of man and its crucial rol e in th e causation and treatment of dis eases. Th e ex istence of the energy bod y (sometimes] called the etheric double, or vital body) and its intimat e inter action with the physical body, are what gives meaning to a nd effectiveness of pranic healing as describ ed in this book .
XXII
rue ANCIENT SCIENCE
AND ART OF PRANI C IIEALlN(;
" T he recognition of the existence of the vital body, " as the hook 'Un recognized Factors in Medicin e,' published by the Theo sophical Research Centre in London, pointed out, " provid es an explanat io n for the success of such gen eral treatments (as pranic healing), since they tend to restore a ready flow o f pran a, and the flow of .prana, or vital energy, is the ch ief determining factor for the bio -electric conditions within a living form." Modem Kirlian photography has shown that disease appears fir st in the energy or vital body of man before it manifests it self in the physical body. Th ere is an intimate connection between the two . Therefore, by treating the vital body, we can often effect a cure in the physical body. And this' is what this book on Th e Ancient Science and A rt of Pranic Healing by Choa Kok Sui is all about, it is ind eed a significant contribution to alternative healing pra ctices,
Contents l Preview by Nick Joaquin Foreword by Roland o Carbonell Prerace by Jaime Lica uco Pra ctical Quick G uide Introduction
xv .
xxi xxv
xxxi
C HA PT ER I - TH E NATUR E O F PRANIC H EALING I'rana or Ki (vital energy). Biopiasrnic Bod y (energy body). What Can Pranic Healing Do'! Pranic Healing is Easy to Learn.
•
What mak es the book more valu abl e is the fact that it has a minimum of theory and a maximum of practical and spec ific advi ce on how to per form the type o f healin g advocated by the author. It do es not co nt ain any "murnbo-jumbo," nor any elabo rate ritual which may offend certain religious groups. It is as straightforward as a ny scientific pr ocess sho uld be. If do es not intend to sup plant o rt hodox medi cal treatmen t , hu t merely to co mpleme nt it. This is principally a han db ook which ca n be used pr ofitably by anyone interested in d evelo pin g his natural healing abiliti es, Because of these, I am co nvinced that th is bo ok will be accepted by a wid e segme nt of our societ y.
JAIME U CA UCO ( Presid ent, Philipp ine Parano rmal R esearch Society, TrIC. Manila, July 198 7
XIll
C II A PTE R 2 - INN ER. H EALTH , AND O UTE R AURAS OF Til E BIOPLASMIC BODY 9 Cha kras or Ene rgy Ce nters. The Mechanism Behind I)sychosomatic Diseases. The External and Internal Factors of Diseases. Modern Findings.
C II A PTE R 3 - ELE MENT A RY I'RANIC H EALING Two Basic Principles in Pranic Healing: Cleans ing and Energizing. Five Basic Techniques in Elementary Prani c Healing: Sensitizing the Hands. Scanning the Inner Aura. S weeping, Enerj!izillg with Prana, Stabilizing tlu: Projected Prana. Suggested Practice Schedule. Steps in Ilealing. Seven Major Chakras (energy centers). Trea tments for Simple Cases.
27
C H A PT ER 4 - I NT ERM ED I ATE PRANI C H EAUNG Drawing in Prana Through Pranic Breathing. How to Draw in Ground Prana. Air Pr an a , and Tree Prana . Energizing with l'ranic Breathing. Suggested Practice Schedule. Eleven Major Chakras. Treatment for Simple and Serious Cases. How lorig
79
Docs It Ta ke to Co mpletely C ure a Patient?
, u
C HA PTE R 5 - SELF PRA NI C H EALI NG Taoist Six Healing Sounds. Chakra l Breathing Technique. Meditation on the White Light. Karma and the Golden Rule. Suggested Ethical Guidelines. Invocative Prani c Healing. Assigning Healing Angels. Principle of Diversion or Releasing. C HA PTE R 6 - D ISTA NT PRANI C H EALIN G (ABS ENT H EALIN G) Distant Scanning. Distant Cleansing and Energizing.
133
157
XXIV
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
C HAPTE R 7 - ADVAN C ED PRANIC II EA LING
Practica l Qu ick Guide
163
Co lor Pumas. Eleven Maj or C ha kras . fl ow to Ac tiva te a Cha kra. Muster Healing Techniq ue. Instant an eou s Hea ling of a
Fresh Wound. Broken Bones. Rapid Healing of Old Wounds and Burns. Regeneration .
C HAPT ER X - T ESTIMONIALS
247
G laucoma a nd C hest Pains. Rapid Healin g of a Onc-day-uld Wound. Ca rd iac Injury. Prevented Possible Misca rriage. Heart Ailment , Shak ing or the Hand s. and Hard ening of th e Leg Muscles. Urinary Ailment. Pneum on itis. Pancreat itis. Students of Pran ic Heal ing.
C HAPTE R 9 - M EDITATION ON TH E TWO H EARTS (II.L UMINATION T ECHNIQ UE)
(For those who are interested in learning how to heal immediate. ly yo u can just read and follow t he instructions in the given guideline. After t hat you may read t hro ugh the entire book .) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
275
Ilow to Activate the Heart Cha kra and the Crown Cha kra . How to Achie ve Illuminatio n or Expa nsion of Co nsciousnes s. Blessing the Ea rth with Loving-K indness as a Form of World Serv ice.
' HAPTE R 10 - S EED ID EAS
295
Nutrition a nd Pralla. Ginseng. Classifying Drugs by Using th e Pr operties of Co lor P rana, Mo re Research Needed in the Field of Pranic Ilea ling. Rotati on of the Cha kras, Geo metric
9.
l'ran ic Generator. Pranic Laser Therapy.
CO M MENT AR IES BY CE LSO AI.. CA RUN UNG AN AND DR . MANU El. M. F ERNANDO. JR .. M.D . . A PP EN DIX A Master Guide to Co ntents APPENDIX II Esoteric Or ganizations APP ENDIX C Recommended Boo ks on Esoteric Teachings APP ENDIX D Recommended Books on Esoteric Practices
317 324 334 336 3:jX
MEl LING HEALIN G CE NTE RS
321
10 . 11. 12 . 1 3.
14 . 15. 16 .
17. 18 . 19.
,
20. 2 1. 22 .
2 What is pranic healin g? 2 What is prana or ki (vital energy)? 4,9,12 ,19 What is bioplasmic body or energy body? 6 What can pranic healing do? .14 What are chakras or energy centers? External and internal fact ors of diseases. 17 23 Mode rn findi ngs T wo basic pr incip les in prank healing; 28 cleansing and en ergizing 32 Five basic techniques in pranic healing : a) Sensitizing t he hands b) Scanni ng t he inner aura c) Sweepin g: lo calized and general d) Energizing with prana: hand chakra t echnique e ) Sta bilizing th e proj ected prana Can you energize an affected part or organ directly'! 62 Bioplasmic waste disposal unit 52 53 Suggested prac tice schedu le 54 Three thi ngs to avoid in pranic healing 55 Steps in healing. 56 Can you hea l without scan ning? 57 Washing the hands after sweeping and en ergizing 57 Cr itical facto rs in healing Major chakras (energy centers) 58 and their corresponding organs 75 How frequent should healing he done? 76 Who listi e or integrated approach in heal ing 77 How do you will or int ent? 80,82 Dra wing in prana through pranic breathing
XXVI
23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 3l. 32. 33. :14.
TIm ANCIENT SCIENCE AND AltT OF 1'llAN IC HEALING
Energizing with pranic breathing 89 Receptive pose 93 Prin ciple of lag time 125 How long docs it take to completely cu re a patient? 125 126 Immediate recurren ce of pain or symptoms 127 Reasons why so me patients are not healed Personal health problems that a healer may encounter 128 147 Invocative pr anic healing 151 Assigning healing angels 152 Principle of diversion or releasing 142,209 Karma Treatment for the following ailments: l. allergy - acute 198 2. appendicitis 225 - acute (for ad van ced pranic healers only) chronic 124 3. arteriosclerosis (for advanced pranic healers only) 229 4. arthritis 230 5. asthma 116 - basic technique 219 advanced technique 6. astigmatism 109,222 7. backache 70,218 8. bladder infections 120 9. bl eeding - to stop the 21 3 10. boils 73 11. broken bones 122,208 - fingers 122 12. bug bites 73 ,13. burns, 70 14. can cer (for advanced pranic healers only) 216 15. cat ara ct (for advanced pranic healers only) 222 16. chi ck en pox 106 17. chro n ic red eyes 224 18. cold with co ugh and stuffy nose 64
('RACTICAL QUICK GUIDE
19.
concussions basi c technique advanced technique constipation - basic te chnique - advanced technique cough cross-eyes - basic technique advanced technique cuts cyst deafness decongesting and loosening diabetes diarrhea - basic technique - advanced technique difficulty in raising the arm disintegrating deposits (for advanced pranic h ealers o nly ) drowning dysmenorrhea basic technique - advanced t echnique end ocrine glands - ailm ents epilep sy ey e infection eyestrain fainting - ba sic technique - advanced t echnique farsight ed ness - basic technique - advanced t echnique fever - basi c technique advanced t echnique floater
-
-
•
20. I
I
,
-
21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. :12.
-
33. 34. 35.
_.
36. 37. I
38. :19 .
•
-
-
-
40.
xxvn
70 242 67 241 222 110 222 70 217 239 194 219 66 241 70 198 242 68 218 122 243 224 63 108 242 109 222 64 233 224
XXVIII
41 . 42 . 43. 4 4. 45 . 46 .
47.
48.
49. 50. 51. 52. 5 3. 54. 55. 56 .
57. 58. 59 .
60. 61.
62. 63 . 64 . 65. 66. 67.
rue ANCIENT SCIENC~; AND ART OF I'RANIC HEALING food poisoning, 242 gallstone (for advanced pranic healers only) 235 gas pain 66 general weakness 71 german measles 106 glaucoma basic technique 110 advanced technique 22 3 headache basic technique, 62 , advanced technique 241 heart-ailments - basi c technique III - advanced t echnique 226 hemorrhoid 123 hepatitis 234 hernia 237 hiccup 74 high blood pressure (for advanced pranic healer s only) , 228 how to strengthen the arms 232 how to strengthen the legs 232 increasing the body 's defense syst em by increasing the vital energy level (for advanced pran ic healers only) 106,213' infection 196' inflammation 196 inhibiting a chakra 198 insect bites 73 insomnia - basic te chnique, 71 - advanced techniqu e 241 instantaneous healing of fresh wound (for advanced pranic heal ers only) 205 kidney infections 120 leukemia, (for ad van ced prani c healers only) 215 liver ailments 118 loss hf sm ell 124 lung ailments ba sic t echnique 114 - advanced t echnique 220
PRACTICAL QUICK
G8.
fi9.
70 . 71.
72 . 7 3. 74. 75 . 76 . 77. 78 . 79 . 80. 8 1.
82 . 83. 8 4. 85 . 86.
87. 88. 89.
cu ms
XXIX
malignan t t umo ur (f or ad vanced pranie heal ers onlY)'215 master heali ng t echniqu e : strengt he n ing the body a nd increas ing the resistance again st mfection ( fo r ad vanced pranie healers only) 199 mea sles 106' • menstru ation - dysm en o rrhea 68 - basic t echniqu e - ad vanced t echnique 218 irr egul ar 69 - basic t echnique 218 - ad vanced t echn iqu e no menstruati on 69 107 mum ps 74 muscle cramps 69 muscl e pain, n earsightedness 109 - basic tec h niq ue 222 - ad vanced techn ique 74 nosebleed 2 33 pa nc reat itis 73 pimples 211 pranic healin g a pplied in surgery ra pid growth (for advanced pran ie heal ers only) 212 rapid healing 208 - hums, - wo unds 20 8 regen eration (for ad vanc ed prani c healers only) 209 sexual ailment s 121 sexual impotence 218 sickl e ce ll ane mia (f or ad vanced pranie heal er s o nly ) 215 sinusitis 124 .- basic t echnique, 221 - ad van ced t echnique 243 sk in bl emish es, 12 3 small bust s sprain ba sic t echn ique, 69 231 - advanced t echnique
XXX
Til E ANCIENT SCIENCE AND AliT OF PIIANIC ilEA LING
90 . 91. 92. 93. 94. 95 . 96 . 97. 98 .
99 .
100. 101. 102.
n ew sprain 231 o ld sprai n 231 stiff nec k 74 sto mach pain 66 strengthening 197, 232 stuffy nose 64,221 thinning hair 123 toothache, 63,241 t reat ing infants and old people 196 tuberculosis ( for advanced pranie healers only) 220 ulcer duodenal 120 - basic technique - advanced technique 236 120 gastric mild gastric 236 peptic 236 severe cases (for advanced pranic healers only) 236 urinary system inflammat io n of the 239 - stones in the (f or advanced pranic healers only) 238 venereal diseases (f or advanced pranic healers only) 217 walleyes - basic technique 110 - advanced technique 222 wounds insta ntaneous healing of fres h wounds 205 - ra pid healing of old wounds 208
AII'l'l 1011'S NOTE: If symptom is persistent or ailment is severe, plM o" l'IIn.nlt n medical doctor with wholistic medical aDorn.~h ,"l Ill... l'IIn.nlt II n-putnhlo pranic healer.
In trod uction
The most beauti ful expe rience we can have is the .mysteriou s. It is th e fundam ent al emotio n which stands at th e cradle o f lrue art and science. Whoever do es not kn ow it and can no longer marvel, is as good as dead, and his eyes are dim med. - A Ibert Einstein
THI S BOOK bas ically deals with paranormal healing, not so :nuch on its speculative aspect, but rather more on how and why. The approach in this book is simplified and is mechanist ic. It is at the same t ime spirit ual. Mechanistic in th e sense t hat all t hat one has to do is to fo llow the instru cti ons step by step, and t he pred et ermined result s will fo llow. Spirit ual in the sense t hat , by praying or by invoking, one becomes a divine healing channel. This book teaches, within a week or two , how to heal simple ailme nts; and within a month or two how t o heal difficult cases. One does not have t o spe nd te n to twenty years ju st to learn how to perform paranorma l healing. Nor does one n eed any "special inborn healing power," nor be a clairvoya nt to hea l. All th at one needs is the willingness to heal and to follow t he instru ctions given in th is book. T he au th or at a very young age, was already very interested in yoga, psyc hic pheno me na, mysticism, Chi nese ki ku ng (the art of genera ti ng interna l power) and other esotenc sciences. Because
XXXII
TIlE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
of his strong interest, he has spent more than eighteen years research ing and studying books and literatures on esoteric sciences. He has also made close association with yogis , healers, clairvoyants, prac tit ioners of Chinese ki kung and a few extraordinary persons who are in telepathic contact with their Spiritual Gurus. The aut hor and his clairvoyant friends have spent several years experimenting to determine the effectivity and the mechanisms of the healing te chniques commonly known and used by healers and stude nts of esote ric sciences. This book is the distillation and synthesis of more than eighteen y ears of the activities mentioned. Many of the techniques have been revealed in books by other write rs for qu ite sometime , whil e some were "rediscovered" by the author. Ad vanced techniques that were privately taught to him are now revealed in this book to help uplift the suffering of humanity due to diseases. Many of the advanced healing techniques an d con cepts were taught to him by his Respected Teacher Mei Ling . The author is not a clairvoya nt nor was he born with any heal ing ab ility. If t he aut hor can learn how to heal effectively, then you can also!
INTRODUCT ION
XXXIII
Th e seco nd time I visited. . . , he was in th e thro es of an ex trem ely severe asthmatic attack : The dyspnea was considerably labored , the wh eezes were pronounced, and his complexion was ashen . I again treated him, and within two and a half minutes his atta ck subsided. The act of healing, then would entail th e channeling of this energy flow by the healer for th e uiell-b eing of the sick individual. Th e Therap eutic Touch, Dolores Krieger, Ph.D., R.N.
The instructions in this book have been arranged in such a way that an ordi nary person can easily and gradually lear n how to perform paranormal healin g. Instructions on how to paranormally diagnose a pat ient without using clairvoya nce is also given. T he term para norma l healing may not be the proper descriptio n. What is conside red paranormal healing today may become quite common and normal a few decades from now. This is exactly t he purp ose o f this book: To make paranormal healing quite co mmo l! in the near future . Th e appropriate t erm should be pranic or hi healing since vital energy or ki is used to heal, and to give pro per recogn ition to its ancient origin and to all esoteric students who have greatly contributed to its development . It is very ad vantageous for everyone to learn pranic healing, especially for pare nts , since it is very fast and effec tive in healing simple and severe ailments like headache, toothache, fever, sore throat, bumps, mu mps , gas pain, arthritis, lung infection, heart problem, hearin g problem and others. - C.K. S .
AUTHOR'S NOTE: For easier and faster understanding, please fir st scan t hrough the ent ire book and read the illustrations thoroughly .
An intelligen t .person is not closed -minded . He does not beh ave like an os trich burying his head in the gro und trying to avoid new ideas and developments. An intelligent person is not gullible. He does not accept ideas blindly. He studies and digests them thoroughly then evaluates them against his reason ; he tests·these new ideas and developmen ts through experiments and his expene nce . An intelligent person studies these ideas with a clear objective mind.
xxxv
CHAPTER ONE
-,
The Nature of Pranic Healing Then the Lord God form ed man ou t of th e d ust of the ground and breathed into his nostrils th e breath of life, and man became a living being. - Genesis 2: 7
,
We get most of our ki or vital energy from the air we breathe. Every living th ing dep ends upon breathing and cessation of breathing is cessation of life itself, From the first cry of an infant to th e last gasp of a dying man, th ere is nothing but a series of breaths . We constantly droin our life force or ki by our every thought, every act of will or motion o f muscles. In consequence, constant replenishm ent is necessary , which is possible through breathing and other healthful practices.
PRANIC HEALING is based on t he overall structure of the human body. Man's whole physical body is actually composed of two parts: the visible ph ysical body , and the unseen or invisible en ergy body called the bioplasmic body. The visible physical body is that part of t he human body t hat we see, touch , and are most acquainted with. The bioplasmic body Is that invisible luminous energy body which interpenet rates t h e visible physical body a nd extends beyond it by four or five inches.
2
T ilE ANcmNT scmNcl': AND AIlT OF 1'ltANIC HEALING.
3
TIm NATURE OF PRANIC HEALING
I',
Trad itio nally , clairvoya nts call this energy body th e etheric bod y or ethe ric dou ble.
"u ~I
t,
",
~.,
WHAT,IS PRA NIC HEALIN G Pranic healing is an ancie nt science and art o f healin g whi ch utilizes prana o r hi or vital energy to heal th e wh ole phy sical body. It a lso involves the manipulation o f ki an d bioplasmic matter of t he pati ent's bod y. It has also been invariably ca lled psychi c healin g, magnetic healin g, fa it h healin g, ki healing, vitalic healing; and laying o n of th e hand .
....
,
~
~
, '" .... . . .""......"..
PR ANA OR KI Prana or ki is t ha t vital energy o r life force whi ch keeps the body alive and health y . In Greek it is called pneuma , in Po lynesia n - mana, and in Hebrew - ruah, which mean s " brea t h of life." Th e healer projects prana o r vital energy or 'The Breath of Life " to th e patient; th ereby , healing the patient . It is through this process th at th is so ca lled " miracu lous healin g" is aCCOm.
~
plishe d ,
, Basically, th ere are three major sources of prana : solar prana, air prana, and ground prana. So lar pran a is pran a from sunlight . It invigorates the whole body and pro motes good health. Solar prana can be 10 btained by exposure to sunlight or sunbathing and by drinking water that ha s bee n ex posed to sunlight . Pro longed expos ure or too much solar prana woul d harm the who le physica l body since it is quite potent . Prana co ntained in the air is called air prana or air vitality globule. Air prana is absorbed by the lun gs t hrough br eathing and is also ab sorb ed directly by th e energy centers of th e bioplasm ic body. These energy centers are called chakras. More air prana can be absorbe d by reep slow rhythm ic breathing th an by short shallow breathing. It can also be absorbed through t he pores o f the skin by persons who have u ndergone certain training :
Fig. 1·1
Pranic healing involves th e transference o f vital energy (IIi or prana) to th e patient.
Prana contained in' the ground is called ground prana or ground vitality globule. This is ab sorbed through the soles of the feet. This is done automatically and unconsciously. Walking barefooted increases th e am ount of ground prana absorbed by th e body. One can learn to consciously draw in more ground prana to increa se one's vitality , capacity t o do more work, and ability to think mo re clearly . I
Water absorbs prana from su nlight , air, and ground that it co mes in co ntact with . Plants and trees ab sorb prana from sunlight, air , water, and ground . M ~n and animals obtain pra na from
4
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
sunlight, air, ground, water, and food (fresh food cont ains more prana than preserved food ). . Prana can also be projected to another person for healing. Persons with a lot of excess prana tend to make people around them feel better and livelier. However, persons who are depleted tend to unconsciously absorb prana from another person or persons. This is why you may have encountered persons who tend to make you feel tired or drained for no apparent reason. /
certain trees (such as pine trees or old and gigantic healthy trees) exude a ' lot of excess prana. Tired or sick people benefit much by lying do wn or resting underneath these trees. Better results can be obtained by verbally requesting the being of the tree to help the sick person get well. Anyone can also learn to consciously absorb prana from ..these trees through the palms, such that the body would tingle and become numb due to the tremendous amount of prana absorbed . This skill can be acquired after only a few session of practice.
' .
I
certain areas or places tend to have more prana than others. Some of these highly energized areas tend to become healing centers. During bad weather conditions, many people get sick, not only, because of the changes in temperature, but also because of the decrease in solar and air prana (vital energy). Thus , a lot of 'peo ple feel mentally and physically sluggish or become susc eptible to infectious diseases. This can be counteracted by consciously absorbing prana or ki from the air and the ground. It is clairvoyantly observed that there is more prana during daytime than at night. Prana drops at a very low level at about three or four in the morning. BIOPLASMIC BODY Clairvoyants, with the use of their psychic faculties, have , observed that every person is surrounded and .interpenetrated by a luminous energy body called the bioplasmic body. Just like the
5
TIlE NATURE OF PRANIC HEALING
visible physical body, it has a head , two eyes, two arms, et c. . . In other words, the b ioplasmic body looks like the visible physical body. This is why clairvoyants call it the et heric double or etheric body.
•
The word bioplasmic co mes from b io which means life and plasma which is the fourth state of matter, the first three being: solid , liquid, and gas . Plasma is ionized gas or gas with positive and negative charged particles. This is no t the same as blood pla sma. Bioplasmic body means a living energy body made up of invisible subtle matter or et heric matter. Science, with the use of Kirlian Photography, has rediscovered the bioplasmic body. With the aid o f Kir lian photography , scientists have been able to st udy , observe , and take pi ctures of small bioplasmic articles like bioplasmic fingers , leaves , etc. . . It is through the bioplasmic body that prana or vital energy is ab sorb ed and distributed throughout the whole physical body.
MERIDIANS OR BIOPL ASMIC CHANNELS I
Just as the visible physical body has blood vessels through whi ch the blood flows, the bioplasmic body has fine invisible bioplasmic channels or meridians through which ki and bioplasmic matter n ow and are distributed all over the body. There are severa l major bioplasmic channels and thousands of minor ones. In yoga, they call these the major and minor nadis. 'Through these cha nnels now prana or ki that nourishes and invigorates the whole body. PRANA OR KI USED IN ACUP UNCTURE , ACUPRESSURE, AND REFLEXOLOGY Acupuncture is an ancient Chinese form of medicine which uses needles to manipulate the vital energy within the patient's body; thereby, curing the patient's ailment . This is accomplished hy using needles to redistribute excess prima or ki in the patient's hody to the afflicted part. Congested prana in the diseased part is red istribut ed to other parts of the body . Blocked meridians or
6
Til E ANCIENT SCIENC.: ANO AIlT OF PRANIC IIEALING
bioplasmic channels ar e cleansed or opened by directing ki to the blo cked meridian. In acupressure or in refl exology, the principle is the sam e as acu pu ncture except that the healer intentionally or unintentional. Iy uses his own excess prana, This excess prana is directed towards th e acupressure point which th en goes to the meridian or bioplasmic channel then to the afflicted part. Some acupuncturists use and direct their own ki or vital energy to the needle in order to rea ch the diseased part. This is done especially with patients who are very weak or d epleted. The author has met a practicing acupuncturist and a practicing acupressurist who is also a master of Tai Ch i. Both of th em ar e proficient in transferring ki to their patients.
WHAT CAN PRAN IC HEALING DO?
1. It can help parents bring down the t emperature of their children suffering from high fever in ju st a few hours and heal it in a day or two in mo st cases. 2. It can relieve headaches, gas pains, toothaches, and muscle pains almost immediately in most cases. 3. Cough and cold ca n usually be cured in a day or two . Loose bowel movem ent can be healed in a few hours in most cases. 4. Major illnesses such as eye , liver, kidney, and heart problems can be relieved in a few sessions and healed in a few months in many cases. 5 . It increases the rat e of healing by three times or more tharl th e normal rate of healing. All of these assume that th e healer ha s attained a certain degree of proficiency. Th ese are some of th e few things that pmnic healing can d o .
TilE NATURE OF PRANIC IIEALlNG
7
I'ltANIC HEALING IS EASY TO LEARN Any healthy person with an avera ge intelligence, an average ability to conce ntrate, an open but di scriminating mind , and a certa in degree of persisten ce can learn pranic healing in a relatively short period . Pranic healin g is easier than learning piano or painting. It is as easy as learning to drive. It s basic prin ciples and techniques can be learn ed in few sessio ns. Like driving , t o ac hieve a certain degree of pro ficiency requires mu ch practi ce a nd time .
A tim e will co me wh en scienc e will m ah e trem endous advanc es, not because o f better instruments for discovering and measuring things, but because a few _peo ple unll haue at th eir com mand great spiritual po wers, wlticlt at the present are seldom used. Witltin a few centuries, th e art of sp irit u al healing uiill be increasingly d eveloped and universally used ,
- Man, Mind , and th e Universe by Gusto] Stro m berg fam ed Mount Wilson Astrono me r
CHAPTER TWO
•
Inner, Health, and Outer Auras of the,Bioplasmic Body
"The idea of a human aura, a radiating luminous cloud surrounding the body, is an ancient one. Sacred , images from the early Egypt, India, Greece, and Rome used this convention before it becam e so popular in Christian art, and before the aura was considered an attribute of ordinary everyday mortals. . . . For centuries it has been believed that clairvoyant people could actually see an aura surrounding ordinary individuals, and this aura differed from person to person in color and character, expressing the health, emotional and spiritual attributes of the subject. The visionary Suiedenborg wrote in his Spiritual Diary: There is a spiritual sphere surrounding everyone as well as a natural and corporeal one . "
- The Human Aura, W. J. Kilner
/
THE
BIOPLASMIC BODY 'i nt erpenetrntes the visible physical body and extends beyond it by four to rive inches. This invisible luminous energy field which follows the contour of the visible physical body is called the inner aura.
to
TIlE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANI C HEALING
When the bioplasmic body be comes sick, it may be caused partially by general or localized depletion of prana in the bioplasmic body , This is called pranic depletion. The inner aura of the affected part is reduced to about two inches or less. For example, persons with nearsightedness usually have pranic depletion around the eye areas. Th e inn er aura around the ey e area may be smaller than two inches. However, there are cases in which an ey e may suffer pranic depletion and congestion simultaneously. The more severe the sickness, th e smaller is the affected inn er aura. There are cases in which the affected inner au ra had been reduced to half an inch or less, You can learn to feel the inner auras with your palms in two to four sessions by following the instructions in this book. Feeling the auras is called scanning. Sickness may also be caused by prolonged excess prana in localized area or areas. This is called pranic co ngestio n. The affect ed areas may protrude to about seven inches or more. In more severe cases, th e affected inner au ra may protrude to two and a half feet or more. For instance, a p erson suffering from heart e nlargement wh o has pranic con gestion around the heart, left should er, and upper left a rm . The affected areas may protrude to about one foot in thickness. In pranic d epletion and congest io n , the surrounding fine ple rid iuns or bioplasmic channe ls a re partially or severcly blocked, It menn s prana cannot flow freely in and out around the affected '''1''' , Clairvoyantly, these affected are as ar e seen as light gray 'to dnrk wruy in color. If the affect ed areas are inflamed, then they '1'1'"nr ,u muddy red; with some cancer cases, they appear as nlllllll y y..llnw ; with appendicitis, as muddy green; and with some ('II"" . II r C'UJ ptohlmns, as muddy orange. 11, ,, " , Ii", lur r",,1' of the physical body are bioplasmic rays pcq",ndl, 'III.r1 y 1" "j<'l'lIng from it. These rays are called health. rays whll'l, 11I1 " 'I'"n nlfb t" the inn er aura, The sum o f these health my I II ,. 11",1 lIw IIa" III , aura. The health aura follows the contour of 1I'" v\oll,h, l,h y.I, 'n' hody and fun ctions as a protectiv e forc e field which oille. loIl Iii. wh" lc hody from germ s and diseased bioplasmic mattcr III Ii ", oll r ,, " on(IIJ\ ~s , Toxins, wastes, germs, and di seased bi oplasmic mnll ", ,,,••_ptllcd by the health rays pre-
INN lm, m ;A LTII, AND OUTER AURAS OF Til E BIOP LASMIC BODY
11
/------...';..,. I
\
\I~~' ~
'\ \ j
I
\IJ ',\
I
)
,
I
I
'.).'
I
\
/
\ (~ '
""
Fig, 2-1
~
.......,,,
The Outer and Inner A uras
Fig. 2-2
The Health A ura and Its Health R ays
dom inantly t hro ugh the pores, If a pe rso n is wea kened, t he health ray s droop and are partially entangled, T hen the whole hod y becomes susceptible to infection. The capacity of the health rays to ex pe l toxins, waste s, germ s, and diseased bioplasmic matter I. also great ly diminished . Healing is fac ilitated by strengt he ning and di sentangling th e h ealth rays, Beyond th e health aura is an other luminous energy field l'Il lIl'
12
INNEIl .HEALTH AND OUTER AURAS OF T HE BIOPLASMIC BODY
THE ANCIf;NT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANI C HEALING
13
For instance, if t he b ioplasmic throat is weakened then it IIIl1y ma nifest on the visible physical body as cough, cold, sore throat , tonsilit is or other throat related problems. Should a per"on accidentally slash his skin, there is a corresponding pranic lr-ak in the area where there is bleeding. Initially, the affected 1"1''' where there is a cut or sprain would become temporarily b righter due to pra nic leak but would inevitably become greyish due to pra nic deplet ion. If any part of the bioplasmic body is weakened due to either pranic congestion or depletion, the visible physical counterpart wou ld either malfunction or become susceptIl, le to infection. For example, a depleted solar plexus and liver may ma nifest as jau nd ice or hepatitis. "' -r/la .
\,
~~f Fig. 2-3
Drooping and Entang led Health Rays o f a Sick Person
egg. Its colors are influenced by the phy sical, emotional, and mental states of the person . Clairvoyantly, it is obs erved that some sick persons have holes in their outer auras through which prana leaks out. Therefore, the outer aura can be co nside red as a for ce field which contains or prevents the leakin g out of pranic energy. In a sense , it acts as a container or bottle for the subtle ener gies. THE INTfMATE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN TH E BIOPLASMIC BODY AND THE PHYSICAL BODY Both the bioplasmic body and the visible physical body are sa closely related that what affects one affects th e other and vice
From the given examples, it becomes quite clear that the bioplasmic body and the visible physical body affect each other. By healing t he bioplasmic body, the visible physical body 'get s healed in the process. By regularly cleansing and energizing with prnna, the nearsighted eyes would gradually improve and heal, A person wit h heart enlargement can be relieved in one or two ""RRions by simply decongesting the affected heart, shoulder, uul upper left ann areas. Complete cure would take at least several months. By decongesting and energizing the head area, headehes can be removed in a few minutes. DIS EASES FIRST APPEAR ON THE BIOPLASMIC BODY AND CAN BE PREVENTED FROM MANIFESTING Through clairvoyant observation, d isease can be seen in t he bio plasmic body even before it manifests itself on the visible physical body. Non-clairvoyants may scan or feel that the inner uura of t he affected part is either smalIer or bigger than usual. For instance, before a person suffers from colds and cough, the bio plasmic th roat and lu ngs are pranically depleted and can be clairvoyantly observed as grey ish. These areas when scanned can he felt as holl ows in the inner aura. Another example, a person who is about to suffer from jaundice can be clairvoyantly observed havin g greyish ness over the solar plexus and the liver areas. "hysical te sts or diagnosis will show the patient as normal or healthy . Unless th e patient is treated, the disease will inevitably man ifest o n t he visible physical body.
II.
\ol
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANI C IIEALING
The author had a patient who was a habitual drinker. Based on scanning, his solar plexus chakr a (energy ce nter ) was depl eted, II part of the liver was depleted and a part of the liver was congested. He told his patient that he ha s liver problem and that it should he tr eated as soon as possible. The patient had a blood test and t he medical finding showed that his liver was alr ight. As a result, he was hesitant to be treated. After several months, the patient Buffered severe pain in the liver area and th e medi cal finding showed th at he has hepatitis. Th e disease must be treat ed before it man ifests o n th e visible physical body . The emphasis ison prevention. It is a lot easier and fast er to heal th e disease when it is still in th e bio plasmic body and has not yet manifested on the visible physical body . Manifestation of the disease can also be pr evented by taking proper medication. In cases where the disease has man ifested, healing should be applied as ear ly as possible. Th e earlier pranic healing is appli ed , th e faster is the rate of healing. Healing becomes more difficult if th e d isease has fully developed since it takes more time and mo re prani c energy. It is imp ortant that th e disease must be treated as ear ly as possible to ensure speedy recovery.
INNr. ll, IIEALTH, AND OUTER AURAS OFTHE BIOPLASMI C BODY
15
T hey have several import ant functions as follows : ~ lIt
1. They absorb, dig est, and distribute prana to the differparts of the body.
2 . The chakras control, energize, and are responsible for t ho proper functioning of t he whole physical body and its differlint pnrts and organs. The end ocrine glands ar e cont rolled and lI.. r~ized by some of the major chakras. The end ocrine glands "U II be stimu lat ed or inhibited by controlling or manipulating the II I1'Jor chakras, A lot of ailments are caused partially by malfuncIio lling o f the chakras. :I. Some chakras are sites or centers of the psychic faculII"•. Activation of certain chakras (energy centers) may result in Ih" d evelopment of certain psychic faculties. For example, one of t h" oasiest and safest chakra to acti vat e are the hand chakr as. '1'1",... ar e located at the cente r of the palms. By activating the hlllld chakras, one develops th e ability to feel subtle energies and II", ub lllty t o feel the outer, health, and inner auras. This can . I", ply be accomplished by regularly conce ntrat ing on them . In hi. book , it is called sensitizing the hands.
CHAKRAS OR ENERGY CENTERS TilE MECHANISM BEHIN D PSYCHOSOMATIC DISEASES
Chakras or whirling energy centers ar e very important parts o f th e bioplasmic body . Just as t he visible physical bod y has vital and minor organs; the bioplasmic body has major, minor, lind mini chakras. Major chakras are whirling energy centers whi ch are about three to four -inches in diameter. They control and energize the major and vital orga ns o f the visible physical body . Major chakras are just like power stations that supply vital energy to major and vital organs. When th e power statio ns malfunction, th e vital o rgans become sick o r diseased because they do not have eno ugh vital energy to operate properly ! Minor chakras are about one to two inch es in diameter. Mini chah ras ar e smaller than on e inch in diameter. Minor and mini cha kras contro l and energize t he less imp ortant parts o f the visible ph ysical body. The chakras inte rpe netra te and exte nd beyond the visible physical body .
Unc ontro lled emot io ns, inhibiti ons, and suppressed fee lings ,u-h as : anger, inten se worry, prolonged irritation, inhibitions
"" suppressed emo tio ns, and frustrations have undesirabl e potent rr" d s on th e bioplasmic body. For instance, anger and fru stra1111 11 would result in pranic d ep letion arou nd t he solar plexu s and nlulo rn inal areas or may manifest as pranic co ngest ion around the 0111 . plexu s and heart areas . In the first case , it manifest s itself n. Ind igestion or loo se bowel movement . In the long run, it may nuurlf'est itself as ulcers or as gall bladder problem . In the second "11'", it may manifest itself as heart enlargeme nt or ot her heart ,<'IlIt,'(\ problems . It seems that a certain type of negative emotion muy manifest as a certain t ype of disease in on e patient but may uuurlfest as another type of d isease in another patient.
16
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC ilEA LING
Anger and intense worry devitalize the whole bioplasmic body so that th e body becomes susceptible to all kinds of d iseases, Negative emotions cause disturbances in the bioplasmic bod y so that th e whole physical body becomes sick. You may have experienced that after an intense anger or an intense altercat ion, you felt physically exhausted or became sick. This is because both the bioplasmic and visible physical bodies are drained of prana and became susceptible to infection. If the ailment is of emotional origin, the healer must not only give pranie healing but also psychological counselling. The patient should be asked to undergo a course in character building and to meditate regularly to help him overcome his negative emot ional t endencies. Through daily inner reflection and meditation , th e patient would develop greater self-awareness and emotional matu rity. Th ese would greatly improve his ability to contr o l and channel his emot io ns, thus, vastly improving his health , It should be noted that in this case, pranic bealing will not produce a permanent cure unl ess there is a corresponding emotional change. It is like extinguishing a fire caused by an arsonist without bothering to cat ch the culprit. What is to pre vent the arsonist from burning the house again once it has been rebuilt? Th e root cause of the disease must ' be removed so t hat permanent healing can take place. THE MIND CAN INFLUENCE TO A CERTAIN DEGREE TH E PATT ERN OF THE BIOPLASMIC BODY Clairvo yants have observed that the visible physical body is patterned or molded after th e bioplasmic body. The mind can inte nt ionally or unin tentionally influence the pattern of the bioplasmic body. Men well-versed in esoteric studies encourage th eir pregnant wives to look at beautiful things, to listen to harmonious mu sic, to feel and think positively, to engage in serious studies, and to avoid th e opposites. These activities affect not o nly the feat ures of th e unborn baby but also his emotional and mental pot entialit ies and tendencies. If the influences are positive, th en the effects are positive. If the influences are negative, then t he effects are negative. Pregnant wom en should take note of this so that. t hey would be ab le to bear better children.
INNICIl,IIEALTII AND OUTER AURAS OF TilE BIOPLASMIC BODY
17
This idea that the mind can influence and actually mould th e hh.plllRmic body t o a certain degree is not new. There is a Biblical . Iory In Genesis t hat illustrates this point. This concerns the manm-r In which Ja cob was able to successfully build up his own nllek. Jacob had been working for his father-in.law, Laban, for pl'roximate ly twenty years and yearned to establish himself flllllncially. An agreement was made between Laban and Jacob I hil L nil goats born speckled , spotted, and striped and all lambs horn buick would belon g to Jacob. Laban, being a shrewd businessman , th at same day rem oved all the male goats that were streaked or spotted, and all the speckled or spotted female goats (all that hnd white on th em), including all the dark-colored lambs. Gene1.1"lI l1y, it would be un likely if not very difficult to breed the Iyp.'s of goat s and lambs promised to him. Jacob, through th e guidance of the Lord, "took fresh-cut hr unches from poplar, almond and plane trees and made white I I ripeRo n them by peeling the bark and exposing the white inn er wood of the branches. Then he placed the peeled branches in all Ih., wat ering troughs, so that they would be d irectly in front of tho noeks wh en they came to drink. When the flocks wer e in h/M.t and came to drin k, they mated in front of th e branches. Ao,l th ey bore young that were streaked or speckled or spotted" l (Olmesls 30:37 -39). In this way, Jacob became very prosperous. AI to th e outcome concerning the black lambs, the Holy Bible Will not clear about it . Fro m this story, it becomes clear that what we see, feel, lind think can influence the bioplasmic body, especially that of the unborn baby. Tll g ~;XTERNAL AND INTERNAL FACTORS OF DISE ASES In the understanding of diseases, one should take into eonsiderut ion the ex ternal and in ternal factors or the seen and unseen .lUReR, External factors mean those phy sical factors which cont ributc to disease like germs, malnutrition, t oxins, pollutants, lack ., f exercise, poor breathing habit, insufficient water int ake, etc . .. [nternal facto rs mean the emotional and bioplasmic factors which
18
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND AUT OF PUANIC HEALING
co nt ribute to diseases like negative emotions, blocked meridians, pranic depletion and co ngest io n , chakral malfunctioning, etc . . . For instance, an emotional factor may lead to the weakening of the solar plexus chakra (a major en ergy center located at the solar plexus) and of the liver plus the attack by hepatitis virus or by toxins such as carb o n tetrachloride or phosphorus will lead to a severe inflammation of the liver . The extern al factor is the virus or the toxin. The internal factors are t he negative emotion and weakening of the solar plexus chakra and the liver which make the liver vulnerable to viral infection.
If the person's solar plexus chakra and liver are in good co ndit io n, and if h e is a person of high er vitality, then the probability of his co nt racti ng the disease would be lesser . His body's defe nse mechanism or detoxifying and eliminat ing system would likely overcome the virus or the toxin. The applicat io n of pranic healing would cleanse, strengthen , and gradually restore the solar plexus chak ra and the liver to their normal condit io ns. This can be -done with or without the aid of d ru gs. Diseases may manifest under the following conditions:
1.
Due to the presen ce of extern al and internal factors.
2 . Du e to the presen ce of overwhelming internal factor only . For example, a person harboring intense anger and frustrat ion may cause sever e pranic congestio n around the solar plexus cha kra, and heart chakra in the long run. Even if he were to watch his diet, he would still end up with a heart problem like heart enlarge me nt. Ano t he r ex am ple, habitual ten sion or st ress may result in pranic co ngest ion around the eye area and, in the long run , may result in glauc o ma . (Note: Not all glaucomae are of emo tio na l o rigin). 3. Due t o t he presence of an o verwhelming ext ern al factor only . For instance , taking a large dose of poison would cert ainly be fatal even if y our bi oplasmi c bod y is in perfect con-
I N N ~Il , IIEAL'I'Il, AND OUTEU AURAS OF THE BIOPLASMIC BODY
19
,11111111 . Ano ther example, poor reading habits would event ually roo,"lt In eye d efects. WIINI' ARE THE FUNCTIONS OF THE BiOPLASMIC BODY? 1. It absorbs, distributes, and energizes the whole physical 1" "I y wit h prana or ki, Prana or ki is that uital energy or /ife force whio' h nourishes the whole body so that it could, together with II. ,lItr"rent organs, function properly and normally . Without I', nnc , t he body would die. 2 . It acts as a mold or pattern for the visible physical hllel y . This allows the visibl e physical body to maintain its shape, lI11 n lind feature despite years of continuous metabolism . To be """" exact, the visible physical body is molded after the bioI'ln" nlc body. If the bioplasmic body is defective, then the visible I'h y. klll body is defective. They are so closely related that what t""t., o ne affects the other. If one gets sick, the other also gets lok, It one gets healed , the other also gets healed . This may mani, l Krnd ually or almost instantaneously . Assuming that there are n" ' " t (~rfering factors. :I . The bioplasmic body , through the chahras or whirling 'I" 'HY centers, controls and is responsible fo r the proper funcll"nlnK of the whole physical body and it s different parts and T his includes the endocrine glands. The endocrine glands ""' nxternal manifestations of some of the major chakras. A lot " r . i4:knesses are caused partially by the malfunctioning of one or
"Ill'"I'.
mo rn chnkrns.
'I.
The bioplasmic body, through its health rays and
"/'f./II, auras, serves as a protective shield against germs and diseased
"''' ,, /''Hmic matter. Toxins, wastes, and germs are expelled by the h•• ,lIh ray s predominantly via the pores; thereby, purifying the whllin physical body.
~7~ 20
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF rRANlC HEALING
INN":Il , m ;A I,T11 AND oU'm ll AlJllAS ol"l'Im 1I100' I,ASMIC DOll Y
Level One: Elementary Pranic Healing
BASIC PROBLEMS AND TREATMENTS IN PRANIC HEALING Pranic or bioplasmic healing involves the use of prana and the manipulation of bioplasmic matter of the patient's body. The following are the basic problems and treatments encountered in pranic healing:
1. In areas where there is pranic depletion, cleansing and pranic energizing are applied to the affected areas. The emphasis is on energizing. 2. In areas where there is pranic congestion, diseased congested bioplasmic matter is removed or extracted from the affected areas. This is followed by projecting prana to the treated area. The emphasis is on cleansing or decongesting. 3. A malfunctioning chakra is restored by simply cleansing and energizing it with prana.
.
4. Drooping and entangled health rays are disentangled and strengthened. 5. Blocked meridians or bioplasmic channels are cleansed and energized.
At th is level, the concept's and techniques are easy to learn. l'setile conce ntratio n IS required . It takes about three to five ....Ions to learn th e basic principles and techniques and to be nhll' to do simple pranic healing. About one to two months of ''Kular practice and application are necessary to become profi('''·nt. Level Two: Intermediate Pranic Healing This level is still easy . Pranic breathing is used at this level. '1'1", major chakras are explained fully. Visual concentration is . tl il not required. Just as in level one, it takes about three to five .....Ions to learn the basic principles and techniques to be able to . I nrt healing more d ifficult cases. To become proficient, it takes ubout two months of regular practice and application. Level Three: Distant Pranic Healing This level involves a gradual development of one's psychic tuculty. It may take at least several months to several years of regular practice and application to become very accurate in (1I11~nosis and to produce specific accurate predetermined results. Level Four: Advanced Pranic Healing
6. . Prana leaking out through holes in the outer aura are sealed. 7 . Specific types of prana are applied to produce specific results. Certain illnesses need specific type or types of prana to produce faster results.
21
Visualization is definitely required. A more thorough know1on the nature of the diseases and the properties of the different types of prana are required. ,'
IlEFERENCES AND RECOMMENDED READINGS COURSE OUTLINE , Pranic healing has four levels gradating from simple to more complicated concepts, and from easy to difficult techniques.
Tile Etheric Double by A. E. Powell. 1969. The Theosophical Publishing House, Quest Book s. Wheaton, Illinois.
Essentially, this book is a treatise on the etheric body and otheric phenomena. Its contents are largely based on the writings of Madame Blavatsky, C. W. Leadbeater, and Annie Besant. These
22
INNI-:It. IIEALTII, AND OUTER AUnAS OFTIIE BIOPLASMI C BODY
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCI·: ANn AnT OF PRANIC ilEA LING
23
, highly developed clairvoyants conducted clairvoyant researches and experiments. They recorded t heir observations and conclusio ns in their writings during the years 1897·1923. The fo llowing is a summation of main points relevant to the st ud y of pranic healing:
1. The whole physical body is actually composed of two bodies: the visible physical body and the invisible etheric body which is made up of finer substances called etheric matter (Chap. I, p. 3) . This etheric body corresponds to what is now called the bioplasmic body. 2. p.4) .
T he etheric body is the vehicle of prana or ki (Chap. 1,
3 . The etheric body has many nadis or etheric channel. through which prana or ki flows (Chap. 3, p. 22). These etheric channels are the equivale nt of the mer idians or bioplasmic channels . . 4. The etheric body is the mold or pattern of the visible physical body (Chap . 2, p . 13). 5. The et he ric body has several chakras or et he ric whirling centers which absorb, dig est, and distribute prana and is responsible for the proper functioning of the whole body (Chap. 3, p, 22; Chap . 4, p . 32). 6 . Some chakras are psychic faculty centers or the sites of our psychic faculties (Chaps. 3-13, p. 22·62). 7. Prana can be obtained from sunlight, air, and trees (Chap, 2, p, 8; p . 16·21). 8 . The visible physical body and its et he ric body are so closely interrelated that what affects one also affects the other (Chap. I , p. 6). Healing is brought about by removing the diseased etheric matter from the patient's et her ic body and by transfer-
r1 11~ o r projecting prana fro m the healer's et he ric body to that of th o patient's etheric body (Chap. 17, p. 7 4·83) .
9 . A strong health aura acts as a protective shield against "nns and infection (Chap. 4 , p. 33) . 10 . Persons whose limbs have been amputated sometimes "lImpla in t hat they still feel the limb in place . The reason for this I. that the etheric counterpart o r the etheric mold is still intact (Chap . I, p . 6). It shou ld be noted that the existence of the eth eric body "",I other important points mentioned in th e preceding items I/"'re later verified or rediscov ered by Russian scientists.
l'sy chlc Discoveries Behind th e Iron Curtain by Sheila Ostrander nnd Lynn Schroeder . Engl ewood Cliffs: Prentice Ha ll, 1970. Hnntam edition 1971.
This book describes the extensive scientific invest igations on psychi c phenomena bein g co nd uct ed in the Soviet Union. Many of 1.11(' findings merely reconfirm wh at has bee n known by esoteric stude nts since the ancient times. All referen ces are mad e to the ltuntnm edition .
MODERN FINDINGS
1. In 1939 , Semyon David ovich Kirlian an d his wife ll"vc loped Kirlian ph otography based on high frequen cy electric n"'d which is used to take pictures of a portion of the invisible OI11'rI(Y body or the bioplasmic b ody (Chap. 16, p. 202-20 6) . 2. Based on the stud ies of the Kirlians, it has been observed thHt disease fir st manifests on the bioplasmic body before it uppears on the visibl e physical body (Chap . 16, p, 207-210). 3 . At the highly respected Kirov State University in AlmaAlH , H group of biologists, bio ch em ists and biophysicists d eclared thHt the bioplasmic body is not merely so me sort of plasma-like
~..l "
21
THE ANCIENT
SCIENC~;
AND AliT OF PRANIC HEALING
INN~:R,IlEALTH,
AND OUTER AURAS OF THE BIOPLASMIC BODY
25
constellation of ionized, excited electrons, protons and possibly some other particle but is a whole unified organism in its elf which acts as a unit that gives off its own electro magne t ic fields (Chap. 17, p . 217).
10. Researches done on Russian psychic healers indicate that psychic healing involves a transfer of energy from the bioplasmic body of the healer to the bioplasmic body of his patient (Chap. 18, p. 224).
4 . Emotions, states o f mind , an d thoughts affect the bioplasmic body (Chap. 16, p. 209).
'I'lle Chakras by C. W. Leadbeater. 1927. The Theosophical Publishing House. Adyar, Madras.
5. Based on the findings of the Stat e University of Kazakhstan , the energy body ha s a specific organizing pattern that determines the form of the organism. For instance , Dr. Alexander Studitsky at the lnstitute of Animal Morphology in Moscow minced up muscle tissue and pa cked it into a wound in a rat's body. An ent irely new mu scle wa s grown. From t his they concluded that there is so me so rt of organiz ing pattern (Chap . 17, p, 218).
This book deals with the different types of prana once nlr prana has been digested by the chakras, It also discusses the negative effects of alcohol, drugs, and tobacco on the etheric hody . It contains ten colored illustrations of the chakras based UII the clairvoyant observations of Mr. Leadbeater.
6. If a man loses a finger or an arm, he st ill retains the bioplasmic finger or arm so t ha t so metimes he still feels that it is st ill there (Chap. 17, p , 21 6) ." • 7. Dr . Mikhail Kuzmich Gaikin , a Leningrad scientist, co nfirmed the existence of bioplasmic channels and centers that co rrespo nd to the meridians and the ac upu nct ure points described in the ancient Chinese medicine (Cha p . 18, p. 226·229). With the aid of the tobiscope, he accurately pinpoint ed the location of the acupuncture points. Later, a young physicist, Victor Adam enko, invented an improved version of the t obiscope and called it the CCAP-<::o nd uctivit y of the Cha nnels of Acupunc t ure Points which not only locate s acupuncture points but also numerically graph s reactions and changes in the bioplasm ic body (Chap. I 18, p, 232). 8. Th e acupuncture points co rrespo nd to the bright spots in tile bioplasmic body (Chap. 18, p . 226). 9 . The Russians also seriously co nside red the po ssibility of stimulating certain points in the b ioplasmic bo d y to activate latent psychic abilities (Chap. 18, p. 231-2 33).
Th eories of th e Chahras: Bridge to Higher Consciousness by Illroshi Motoyama. 1981. The Theosophical Publishing House. Wheaton, Illinois, U.S.A. This book deals with the scientific experiments and personal xpc rience of Dr. Hiroshi Motoyama on the chakras. It. also gives lnstructions on how to activate the chakras. The Chinese acupuncture meridians are compared with the lndian nadis. This book is lulte interesting and very informative.
li.ntcric Healing by Alic e Bailey, 1953. Lucis Publishing ComPIIIlY . New York. '1'1 ... Aura by W. J. Kilner. 1911. Samuel Weiser , In c. York Beach,
Mnino .
CHAPTER THREE
Elementary' Pranic Healing When the body is wornout and th e blood is ex haust ed (of its vital energy) is it still possib le to achieve good resu Its? No, because there is no mo re energy left . vitality and energy are co nsidered th e foundation of life. . . . and how th en can a disease be cured when there is no vital energy left within th e body ? The Yellow Emperor 's Classic o f Int ernal Medicine (Huang Ti Nei Ching Su Wen)
A nd Jesus said, . . . som eon e has touched me, {or I know that pow er (vital energy ) has gon e out of Ill". . . . she (th e woman) said in th e presenc e of all rhe people for what purpose she had t ouc hed him (J~sus), and how she was h ealed immediately . Luhe 8 :45-47
2M
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC ilEA LING
\l,1. 1~ M I':N T A R Y
PRANIC IIEA LING
29
TWO BASIC PRINCIPLES IN PRANIC HEALING
IN
PRANIC HEALING, there are two basic principles : cleansing and energizing with prana or vital energy th e patient's bioplasmic body.}t is by cleansing or removing th e diseased bioplasmic matter from th e affected chakra and the diseased organ ; and . by energizing th em (th e affected chakra and o rgan) with sufficient prana or vital energy that healing is accomplished ! These two basic principles ar e th e very foundation of pra nic healin g. Cleansing is necessary to remov e the devit alized diseased . bio plasmic matter in the whole bod y or in the affected part or parts, and t o clear up blo cked bioplasmic cha nne ls. The health rays are cleansed , co mbed, and st rengt hened . It mu st be noted t hat the affect ed part should be thoroughly cleansed before and/or after energizing is done . For more severe cases, the entire bioplasmic body has t o be clean sed . Very often, after init ial cleansing, th e patient sho uld be partially energized to facilitate furth er clean sing. This is like sweeping first a very dirty floo r and then add ing soap and wat er or cleansing chemical to clea n an d remove the stubbo rn dirt. The whole process may be repeated o ver and over again until th e bioplasmic body is normalized. With out cleansing, th e patient may suffer a radical reaction . Rad ical reaction means the drastic steps the bo d y ta kes in ord er to co rrec t and normalize it s cond iti on. This is usually painful and un comfortable, and may appear as an initial worsening ca nditi on , However, the body gradually improves after this radical reaction.. Th is radical reacti on is qui te unnecessary and can be avoided. .One suc h case is that of a pat ient who su ffere d from chronic abdomina l pain, loose bowel movement and vomiting, due to emot ional factor. Th ere was pranie congestion around her abdominal area. En ergizing with prana was ap plied without cleansing the affected part. Alt ho ugh she was relieved , within twenty to t hirty minutes, th e pain, loose bow el movem ent and vomiting
." ~ 1
Pranic healing is accom plished. by removing the di seased
ene rgy and by energizing with prana o r vital energy the affec ted parts. ,,,',,m 'd and int ensified. Th ese were radi cal reactions or ste ps (uk" 11 by th e whole physical body to clean se and remove the
,1I.""o"J congested bioplasmic matter fro m it self and to normal,. . ito condit ion. Three hours later, cleansing and energizing willi prana was applied on her abdo minal area and she was com1.1 "1... ly relieved a nd cured,
In several inst ances, the same patient was treat ed for the co mplaint . In t his case, the patient was cu red within a few 11I11I1It.". just by clean sing or removing th e diseased bioplasmic mall .'r in th e af fected part. Since the patient was relieved im melI"t...ly , energizing wa s no t applied . There wa s no radical r eaction. lIll"
:10
THE ANCIENT
SCIENC~:
AND ART OF PRAN IC HEALING
' '.I . E M ~: NTA R Y
Cleansing is necessary to facilitate the absorption of prana or ki by the affected part. This is similar to pouring fresh coffee to a cup that is already filled with stale coffee or trying to rep lace the dirty water inside a sponge by pouring clean water on top of it. This approach is slow and quite wasteful. Fresh prana cannot flow easily into the affected part since the affected part is filled with diseased bioplasmic matter and the bioplasmic cha nne ls are blocked . The projected fresh prana is also not fully absorbed by the treated part and because of this there is a strong possibility that the ailment wou ld recur immediately or within a short period of time.
PRANIC HEALING
.11
\~'\.,'I:'
-
\
'"
There are several reasons why cleansing should be do ne before energizing: 1. Cleansing is necessary to facilitate the absorption prana or ki ,
f ~
of
2. Healing takes a longer time without cleansing and more prana is required to heal the patient.
/
3. A possible radical reaction could be induced if cleansing is not done before or after energizing. 4. Cleansing is necessary to reduce the risk, of damaging the Iiner bioplasmic channels or meridians. In simple cases, cleansing the bioplasmic body and/or the affected part is usually sufficient to heal the patient. In other cases, the diseased bioplasmic part is so depleted that the healer has to facilitate the healing process by energizing with prana, HAND AND FINGER CHAKRAS There are two very important chakras located at the center of each palm. These chakras are called the lef t hand chahra and right hand chahra, They are usually about one inch in diameter. Some pranic healers have hand chakras as big as two inches or more in diameter. Although the hand chakras are considered as
Fig. 3·2 Ha nd and Finger Chohra« (Energy Centers)
Ii""r chnkras, they have very important functions in pranic Illl~ , It is through the hand chakras that prana is absorbed nn the surroundings and projected to the patient. Both the hi lind left hand chakras are capable of absorbing and projector k i, But for right-handed persons, it is easier to ab'lI through the left hand chakra and project through the right ',II ('llIlkrn and vice versa for left-handed persons.
"n'"11
'I'Iu-re is a mini chakra in each finger. These chakras are also bl« or absorbing and projecting prana, The hand chakras ( I"•• concentrated or gentler prana while the finger chakras
.12
THE ANCn:NT SCIENC.: AND AlIT OF PRANIC HEALING
33
I.:I.EM.:NTARY PRAN IC HEALING
proj ect more intense or stronger prana . With infants, the aged, and very weak patients, it is advisable t o energiz e them slowly and gentl y by using the hand chakras. By stimulating or activating th e hand chakras, the hands be· come sensitized; thereby, developing the ability to feel subtler matter and to scan the different auras. It is t hrough scanning that the healer can locate the diseased areas in the bioplasmic body . FI VE BASIC TECHNIQUES IN ELEMENTARY PRANIC HEALING
3. 4.
Sensitizing the hands ' Scanning the inn er aura Sweeping (cleansing): General and Localized Energizing with Prana: Hand Chakras Technique
5.
a. Drawing in Prana b. Proj ecting Prana Stabilizing th e projected prana
1. 2.
A ll th e techniques in this chapter have been tried and tested. Most o f you will be abte to produce positive results in just a few sessions by properly following the instru ctions. It is very importan t to maintain an op en mind and to be persevering. Practice immediately what you have read and try th em . out for at least [our sessio ns.
'. f
,I
,\ l J
Fig. 3-3
Sensitizing the Hands
SE NSITIZI NG THE HANDS Since it would take considerable amount of time to develop th e auri c sight , you should th en at least try to sensit ize your hands in order to feel th e bioplasmic energy field or the inner aura in order to determine which areas of the pat ient's bioplasmic hod y is d epl eted or co ngested. PROCEDURE :
1. Place your hands about three inches apart facing each other. Do not tense, ju st rela x.
2. Concentrate on feelin g the , center of your palms and ahuu lta neously be aware of your ent ire hands for about five to 1,"11 minutes. At the sam e time, inhale and ex hale slow ly and I hylhmically. Concentration is facilitated by pressing th e centers ,r your palms wit.h your t hu mbs before start ing. It is by concenIrlltill/l at th e center of th e palm s that th e hand chahras are acti'/I'tI ; thereby. sensitizing th e hands or enabling the hands to I .ubtle energy or matter. Eillhty to ninety percent of you will be able t o feel a t ingling '/IO"t io n, heat, pressure or rhythmic pul sation between t he palms
34
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC IIEALING
I': U:MENTARY PRANIC HEALING
3 . Stop wh en you feel heat, a tingling sensat io n or a slight pressure. You are now feeling the outer .aura. Try feeling the size and shape of the outer aura, its width from head to waist, waist to feet , and from front to back . In most cases, it will feel like an inverted egg; the top b eing wid er than the bottom.
o n th e first try . It is important to feel th e pressure or the rhythmic pulsation. 3. hands.
35
Proceed immediately to scanning after sensitizing your
4 . Practice sensitizing your hands for at least two weeks. Your hands should b e more or less permanently sensitized after t wo weeks of practice.
4. It is very important that you gradually learn to feel the aura in terms of pressure in order to be more ac curat e in deter. mining the width of the outer, health, and inn er auras .
5. Do not b e dis couraged if you do not feel anything on the first try . Continue your practice, you should be able to feel th ese subtle sensations on the third or fourth session. It is very important to keep an open mind and to concent rate properly.
5. The outer aura is usually about one meter in radius but in some cases it may be more than two meters wid e. Some hyperactive children have outer auras a s big as three meters.
SCANNING
•
PROCEDURE FOR SCANNING THE HEALTH AURA :
'.
•
,1 . After determining the size and shape of th e outer aura, gradually mov e forward a little, still retaining th e ear lier position.
In sca nning, it is helpful but not really necessary to first learn how to feel t he size and shape of the outer and health auras before scanning the inner aura. This is to make the hands more sensit ive since both ' the outer and health auras are subtler than the inner aura and also to prove to yourself the existence of th e outer and health au ras. In healing, we are primarily int erested in scanning th e inner aura. It is in scanning th e inner aura that the troubled spo ts can be located,
2. Stop wh en you feel the subtle sensations again. These sensations may be slightly more intense. You are now feeling the health aura. Feel the size and shape of the health aura. Th e health aura is usually about tw o feet in width. When a person is sick , his health rays droop and are entangled and his health aura d ecr eases in size. Sometimes, th e health aura may de crea se to twelve inch es or less. The health aura of a very healthy and en ergeti c person may be as big as on e met er or more. It usually feels like a tapering cylinder, bigger at the t op and smaller at the bottom.
When scanning with your hands, always conce nt rate at the , center of yo ur palms. It is by concentrat ing at the cent er of your palm s that the hand chakras remain or ar e further activated; thereby, making th e hands sen sit ive to subtle energy or matter. Without doing this you will have difficulty in scanning.
PROCEDURE FOR SCANNING THE INNER AURA : PROCEDURE FOR SCANNING THE OUTER AURA: 1. Stand abo ut four meters away fr om your subj ect with your palm s facing the subjec t and your arms slightly outs t retched .
2 . Slowly walk t owards the subj ect, simu ltaneo usly trying to feel with yo ur sensitized hands the subject 's outer aura. Conccntrate at the center o f your palms when scanning.
•
1. Pro ceed to feel the inner au ra with on e or both hands. Move your hands slowly and slightly ba ck and forth to feel the inn er aura. The inn er aura is usually ab out five inch es in thickness. Concentrate at the center of your palms when scanning. It is by co ncentrating at th e center of th e palm s that th e hand chahras remain are furth er activated ; th ereby, making th e hands sensitive to subtle energy or matter.
or
:16
TIn: ANCIENT SCIENCE ANI> AliT O F I'IlANIC m :ALlNG
2, Scan your subje ct from bead to foot and from front to back. Scan th e left part and right part . For exam ple, scan the left a nd right ears or scan th e right and left lung s, When th e inner aura of the right part and left part o f th e bod y are scanned, they should have about th e same , thickn ess. If on e part is bigger or sma ller than th e other part, th en th ere is somet hing wrong with it . For instance, the cars of a pati ent were sca nned and it was found out that the inner aura of th e left car was about five inches in thi ckness while th e inner aura of the right ear was only about two inches in thickn ess. -The pati ent wh en qu estioned revealed that th e right ear has be en partially deaf for th e past seventeen years.
/,."" " "'~" . ~
I
-,
"f'\"'
J
'. "
I
'~
."
(':'
..}
"" \
\
\
I
, I'" {! t l, '
J/i.":!
: ,f, :, :i";;' ~~
i
4. In sca nning th e throat area , th e ch in should be raised upward in order to get accurate scanning. The inn er aura of the ch in tends to interfere or camo u flage the actual co nd it ion of the throat.
j
:; 'i'I)~ i
~
,
I
i
pranie congestio n Fig. 3-4
f
r \\\\:~
'
{::.~~~i\\ i i" I
3. Special attention should be gioen to tn e spine, to the vital organs, and 10 th e major chah ras, In many cases, a portion of th e spin e is usually eit her congest ed or d epleted even if the patient does not co mpla in about ba ck probl em .
5. Scanning of the lungs should be done at th e back and at th e side s rather than th e front in ord er to get acc urate result. Th e nipples have tw o mini chakras that tend to interfere in th e proper' scanning of th e lungs. A more advanc ed techniqu e is to sca n the lungs at the front, at th e back and at the sides by u sing two fingers, instead of using the entire hand.
37
' :L,,:m:NTAIlY I'RANIC HEALING
/
prani c dep let ion Scann ing th e Inn er Aura
11m. When the area is hollow , t h is is ca used by prani c d epletion. The affected part is d epl et ed of pra na or th ere is insufficient pruna in th e affected area. Th e surround ing fine meridians ar e Imrtinlly or severely h locked ; t he reby, preventing fresh prana from ,,1.I ... r parts to flow freely a nd vitaliz e th e affected part. In pranic d"pldion, the affect ed chakra is depl et ed and filled with dirty disuused bioplasmic matter . And usually it is partially underactivnu -d,
6. Special attention should be given to th e solar plexus since many diseases o f em ot io nal origin negatively affect the so lar plexus chakra.
INTERPRETING RESULTS FROM SCANNING THE INNER AURA 1. In scanning your pati ent , you will notice t hat there are hollows or protrusions in ar eas o f th e patient's inner
some
2 . When, th e area is protruding, this is cau sed by pranic ronuestion or bioplasmic co ngestion. It means that there is too much prana and bioplasmi c matter on th e affect ed area and the surrouud ing fin e merid ians are partially or severely blocked . The " XC!'", prana and bioplasmic matter cannot flow out freely. This co ngested prana and bioplasmic matter becomes devitalized and d i.pased a fte r a certain period of time since fresh prana cannot n"w in fre ely or its inflow is greatly reduced, and the devitalized mutter ca nnot flow out freely or its outflow is greatly reduced .
3R
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC IIF:ALING
In pranic congestion, the affected chakra is congested and filled with diseased bioplasmic matter. Usually it is partially overactivated.
3. An affected part may have pranic congestion and pranic depletion simultaneously. It means a portion of the affected part is hollow and another portion is protruding. For instance, a liver is congested or protruding on the left portion and is hollow or depleted on the right portion. Another example is that a portion of the left heart is congested or protruding and a portion of the right heart is severely depleted. 4. The smaller the inner aura, the more severe is the pranic depletion. The bigger the protrusion of the inner aura, the more congested is the affected part. The smaller or bigger is the inner aura of the diseased part, the more severe is the sickness. 5. An area m~y have a temporary pranic surplus in which case there is nothing wrong with it. For instance, a person who has been sitting down for a long time when scanned may have big protrusion of the inner aura around the buttocks area. Since the surrounding meridians are not blocked, the condition normalizes after a short period of time. 6. An area may have temporary pranic reduction in which case there is also nothing wrong with it. An altercation that has just occurred is likely to cause a temporary pranic reduction around the solar plexus area. After a few hours of rest, the condition will normalize. But habitual altercation or anger may cause 'pranic depletion around the solar plexus area which results in abdominal ailment and possibly heart disease. 7. The physical condition of the patient should be carefully observed and the patient should be thoroughly questioned or interviewed before jumping to any conclusion. 8. As stated earlier, diseases manifest first on the bioplasm ic body before manifesting on the visible physical body. There are cases in which there is pranic depletion or pranic congestion in the inner aura of an affected part but medical examination
":U;M.:NTARY PRANIC HEALING
39
would show negative result or the part is normal. In this case, the dlsense has not yet manifested on the visible physical body. Therefore, pranic healing should be applied to the disease before /I ran manifest physical/y.
HWEEPING Sweeping is generally a cleansing technique. It can also be used for energizing and distributing excess pmna. When cleansing I. done on the whole bioplasmic body, it is called general sweeping. '!t"lnsing done on specific parts of the body is called localized nueeping, The hands are used in sweeping. There are two hand posilions: cupped-hand position and spread-finger position. These two hand positions are used alternately. The cupped-hand position 'M more effective in removing the diseased bioplasmic matter nd the spread.finger position is more effective in combing and /Isc/ltangling the health rays. General sweeping has been called 811m cleansing or combing by some esoteric students. Sweeping produces the following results:
1. It removes congested and diseased bioplasmic matter. Blocked meridians or bioplasmic channels are cleansed and .jmC'IOKl!ed. This allows prana from other parts of the body to flow to the affected part, facilitating the healing process. \
2. Expelling of toxins, wastes, germs, and dirty bioplasmic matter is greatly facilitated by disentangling and partially strengthening the health mys. The health rays are further strengthened by energizing the whole body with psana. 3. By disentangling and strengthening the health rays, the health aura which acts as a protective shield is normalized. This Increases one's resistance against infection. 4. Sweeping automatically seals holes in the outer aura through which prana leaks out. Without sealing the holes in the
·10
1:1.I·:m:NTARY !'RA NIC HEALI NG
'I'm: ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF I'IIANI C HEALING
oute r au ra , the healin g pro cess is very slow even if the patient is energized with prana becau se prana would ju st simply leak out. This is on e of th e contributing factors why some times th ere is regression or th e di sease come s ba ck in a few minutes or hours a fte r th e patient has b een healed .
H
• 54 3 21 2 3 4 5
II
5. Absorption o f prana by th e patient is greatly facilitated after sweeping or cleansing.
'
\
It
.....
....
6 . Sweeping is a lso used to di stribute excess prana in a t reated area to ot he r parts of the body after it has been ene rgized t o prevent possible co ngest io n . 7 . Sweepin g is used to ene rgize by di recting excess prana fro m t he su rro und ing areas o f the body or from a chahra o r chahras to th e affect ed part tha t is loui in prana , For instance, a mild fo rm o f arthr itis of th e finger s was cured in minutes just by cleansing th e fingers and sweeping or d irecting th e excess prana from th e hand chakra to th e a ffected. fin gers.
wat er and salt
8. Radical react io n is reduced or avo ided by simply sweeping t he patient thoroughly. :1·5
Sw eeping is a very imp ortant pranic healing technique and it is very easy t o learn . It cleanses, st re ngt he ns , and greatly facili tates t he healing process. Many simple illnesses can be healed ju st by sweeping. G1~NF.R AL
SWEEPING
Ge neral sweeping is done with a series of downward sw eep lllO l'<'I/Wnt s only. In downward sweeping, you sta rt from the [u-m l dowlI to th e feet . Upward swee ping mov em ents arc not used ' in ,'I"lIn,IIIK h ut. lire used only t o reawaken patients who may have fulk-n 11 .1<',,1' or who may have b ecome slightly drowsy . In upward swellpillK, yOIl ,Ion fro m th e feet up to the head. II/II
. ~ ~~
I'~
u ~ :!
Genera l Sweep ing : liy cleans ing o r remo ving th e d iseased energy; circu lalion o f vilaI energy or prana is enhanced; th ereby, increasing th e rat e of healing.
"Il< l(,;lmURE : J. Cup your hand s and pla ce th em six inches above the hMd of th e patient. Do not unnecessarily touch th e patient . Mulnf.n in II distance o f about two inch es from t he patient 's body I y our hand s. :l. With your hands still cup ped , sweep your hands slowly lownward Irorn th e head to the foot followin g line #1 as shown III II ... Illustration . Slightly ' raise your hands and strongly fli ck 11"'111 do wnward to throwaway the dirty diseased bioplasmic mul.tor, This is very important t o avoid recontaminating the
.j2
TH F. ANCI ENT SCIF.NCE ANO ART OF !'RANIC HEALI NG
patient with t he diseased bioplasmic matter; a nd also to avoid contaminating yourself which would result no t only as pain in your fingers, ha nds, and palms but may result in t he weakening of your body and/or illne ss similar to t hat of t he patient. 3. Repeat the process in procedure no . 2 wit h spread. finge r position instead of the cupped-hand position. T his is to d isentangle a nd strengthen the healt h rays. T his is called co mb ing . 4. Repeat th e whole process in procedu re nos. 2 and .S on lines 2,3,4, and 5 as shown in the illust rat ion (Fig. 3-5).
43
!: N'I'ARV PRANIC HEALING
*
)( 'A LI",gD SWEEPING I.
Place your hand or hands ab ove the affected area and
low ly sweep away the d iseased bioplasmic matter. This is just
Ilk. <'I "II ning a dirty obj ect with your hand . Strongly flick your hand to throwaway the dirty bio1,,1i,; matter. :J . The sweeping movements can be done in any direction : ¥.n k lllly , horizontally , diagonally or in L·shape. \
.{,;.
f.1I'~·' rr.", ·A'\J''!U -,, ~"
5. Apply downward sweeping on tbe back of the patient by following the procedure in nos. 2, 3, and 4 .
6. It is very important to concentrate and to form a n intention to remove the diseased bioplasmic matter. Without t his, the sweeping process becomes less effective and more time-consuming. It is the in tention or th e application o f the will witb t he aid of t he hands that the diseased bioplasmic matter is thorough. ly and quickly removed.
''7-;' '
~'~~"i
~
~';l. -~~I
\ .
,
r "" ~
With zegular practice, you can apply sweeping with great case and with minimum effort. \,
7. After the downward sweeping, some patients may be· co me sleepy .' You may apply a few upward sweeping movement t o reawaken or make the patient more alert. There is no need t o flick your hands after th e upward sweeping. Upward sweeping is not a cleansing technique but a technique to reawak en the patient . It should be applied only after the patient ha s been re lat ively cleansed. Warning : To apply upward sweeping movement before applying the downward sweeping may result in the diseased b iop lasmic matter going to or getting stuck in the h ead area which may have negativ e physical effects .
/0'111. :J-6
Lo calized Sweeping: Th e rate of healing is increased by cleansing or rem oving th e d iseased energy from th e affected part.
Swee ping is very easy and can be learned almost immediately hy most people. Sometimes in localized sweeping, the di seased hloplasmic matter is transferred from the affec ted part to another pa rt o f the body. For instan ce, o ne practitioner was sweeping uwuy the co ngested biopla smic matter at the back of t he head of a pntien t , a part o f it wa s transferred to th e neck and sho u lde r llnoUS. T his caused the pain at t he back of the head t o pa rtially
44
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
move to the neck and shoulder areas. Should you encounter a similar situation, just simply apply localized sweeping on the new affected area. How many times should general sweeping and localized sweeping be applied on a patient? The answer is as many times as required. There is no fixed number of times. Usually, the author applies general sweeping once or twice and localized sweeping four or five times. However, in the case of a dying dog due to sccldent al intake of slow acting poison, it was necessary to apply general sweeping and localized sweeping twenty to thirty times per session since after each sweeping and partially removing the darkish grey bioplasmic matter from the dog, the darkish grey matter would reappear after a few seconds and later after a few minute s. Sweeping and energizing was applied alternately. This whole process was repeated once every two hours and three times the first day. Healing was continued for the next few days. After abo ut two weeks the dog became relatively active and healthy. In case of poisoning, do not try to use pranic healing only. Get proper medical tr eatment and apply pranic healing to strengthen and facilitate the healing process. As stated earlier, a disease or illness could be caused by internal and/or external factors. If the cause is malnutrition, obviously enough nourishing food or nutritional supplements should be taken by the patient. Since chemical poison is a physical or external factor, then one should definitely use physical or chemical fonn of treatment. Pranic healing should also be used to minimize the damage done on the body and to greatly facilitate the healing process.
45
I.F.MENTARY PRANIC HEALING I~NERGIZING WITH PRANA:
HAND CHAKRA TECHNIQUE
When projecting prana to th e patient 's bioplasmic body, one , hould simultaneously draw in air prana or air vitality globule rom the surroundings. This would prevent draining or exhausting oneself and becoming susceptible to infection and diseases. There are many ways of drawing in prana and projecting runa; one of the safest and easiest ways is through th e hand ;hukras._One of the hand chakras is used to draw in air prana Iud the other to project prana or vital energy to the patient.
LkJth left and right hand chakras can eit her predominantly draw III or project prana. The hand chakra is alternately drawing in and projecting prana at a rapid rate. Whether it predominantly draws III prana or predominantly proje cts prana is a matter of inte ntion r willing. You can use either the right hand chakra to proj ect prana and the left hand chakra to draw in prana or vice versa. hi. is a matter of personal preference. With the right -handed, I. easier to draw in prana using the left hand chakra and project lila ' with the right chakra and vice versa for [left-handed sons. , Prana is drawn in through one of th e hand chakras and irojected through th e other hand chakra. Attention or con cen" ,Uon should be focused on the hand chakras (on the centers of I", palms) and on the part to be treated with more emphasis on 1111 hand chakras, Focusing too much on th e part being treated hnn on the two hand chakras is a common mistake do ne by h"Rlnners. This would tend to reduce the flow of prana comin g in nd going out.
In the case of th e dying dog, the poison was already fully .assimilated into it s system and the veterinarian did not have any antidote ; t herefore, pranic healing was used alone because it was t he only solution available at that time.
1'1l0CEDURE:
Alt hough there are probably some great yogi, shaman or healer who can neutralize poison in their own bodies or the body of another person, who among us belong to this caliber? In pranic healing as well as in other field of activities, one should be fully aware of one's capabilit ies and limitations and should use sound judgment or common sense iii making decisions.
2. Concentrate or focu s your attention at th e center of your palm that will be used for drawing in prani c energy for about 19l1 to fifteen seconds. Th is is to partially activate the hand chakra; tlu-reby, enhancing its ability to draw in pran ic energy. If you in-
1. Press the center of your palms with your thumb t o dlltate your concentration .
6
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND AnT OF PRANIC IIEALING
47
t:U:MENTARY pnANIC HEALING
nd to draw in pranic energy through your left hand, then concntrnte at its center. 3. Place the other hand near the affected part and concenrate simultaneously at 'the centers of both hands. If you intend project with your right hand chakra, then place your right and near the affected part. Maintain a distance of about three to our inches away from the patient. Continue concentrating or )cusing your attention at the centers of your palms until the atient is sufficiently energized. For simple cases, this may take aout five to fifteen minutes for beginners. 4. When energizing or projecting prana, you must will or Irm an initial intention directing the projected prana t o go to Ie affected chakra and then to the affected part. It is a critical ctor that the projected prana be directed to the affected part, is will produce a much faster rate of relief and healing. Just •ergizing the affected chakra without willing or directing the nnic energy to go to the affected part would result in a slower tribution of prana or vital energy from the treated chakra to e affected part; thereby, producing a much slower rate of relief d healing.
,
• (alb)
Ii
Press the center of your palms with your thumb to facilitate your concentration. II';
i
i
i
5. The left and right armpits should be slightly opened allow easier flow of prana from one hand chakra to the other nd chakra.
6. There should be an initial expectation or intention to aw in prana from one hand chakra to the affected part and to oject prana from the other hand ehakra, Once the initial intenm or expectation has been formed, there is no need to further nsciously expect or will to project. The initial . expectation ,d concentration on the two hand chakras cause prana to be tomatically drawn in through one of the hand chakras and ejected out through the other hand chakra. 7.
It is important to concentrate properly on both the
~t and . right hand chakras, Success depends upon this. To con-
ntratc more on the projecting hand chakra and not to give e receiving hand chakra sufficient concentration would tend weaken and exhaust the healer.
Ill)
Concentrate at the center of your palm that will be used for drawing in pranic energy for about IS seconds. Fig. 3-7
(d) To energize, place .the other hand near the affected part and concentrate simultaneously at the center of each palm.
Energizing with Prana: Hand Chakra Technique
49 THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRAN IC IIEALING
/I
U :M&NTARY PRANIC HEAL ING
If you feel slight pain or discomfort on your hand while flick your hand to throwaway the absorbed diseased loplasmic matter. When energizing, the hand shou ld be flicked l"ularly to throwaway the diseased bioplasmic matter. 8.
~ergizing,
9. Energizing should be continued unti l the treated part is fficiently energized . The affected part has enough prana if you e l a slight repulsion coming from the treated area or if you ~I a gradual cessation of the flow of prana from yo ur palm to ~, treated area. The flow of prana may feel like a wafm '
12. Prana or ki may also be projected through the fingers inger chakrns rather than through the hand chakra. Th e prana ,ling out from the finger chakras is more intense. If the proM prnna is too intense, the patient may feel pain and a boring enetrating sensat ion which is quite unnecessary. It woul d be r to master energizing through the hand chakras before try:0 energize through the fin ger chakrns . In energizing with prana, visualization is helpful but not ssary , Just relax and calmly conc entrate on the hand chakras. result will automatically follow. The technique is simple, and q uite' effect ive. Try it and judge for yourself.
1-"/1. 3·8 Energizing: Reaching fo r the Sky Pose
Fig. 3-9 Energizing: EgyptiJln Pose (standing position) \
In drawing in prana, there are several possible positions: " reaching for t he sky" pose, "egyptian" pose, and"casual" pose . In the "reaching for the sky" pose, if you intend to draw in pranic energy t hrough the left hand chakra, raise your left arm and tum the palm upward . The act of raising the ann upward is like that of unbending a water hose. There is a meridian or bioplasmic channel in the annpit area which is connected to t he left hand chakra and the right hand chakrn. The unbending of this meridian allows prana to flow with minimum resistance. The act (. t concentrat ing on the left hand chakra is like turning on the water pump. By concentrating on the left hand, the left hand chakra is activated and draws in a lot of prana since th ere was nn intention or expectation to draw in rather than to project p runa ,
TilE ANCn;NT SCIENCE AND ART OF PUANIC rmALI NG
51
1';Lfo;MENTAUY PRANIC IIEALING
r-cncentration for b eginners since the upward position of the I_11m which co nd it io ns the mind to receiv e prana is not used . The author usu ally uses the "egyptian" pose because it is more co mfo rtab le and does not look too strange . This reduces t ile resistance from the patient. It is quite possible for a patient to partially and unintentionally block most of the prana projected to him by the healer, if he finds the healer too strange or if he ~ t ro ngly rejects and disbelieves this form of healing. That is why It is bette.' to establish rapport with th e patient to mak e healing faster and easier.
->~
STABILIZING THE PROJECTED PRANA une o r the poten t ial problem s in pran ic healing is the mst ahllity of the projected prana. The projected prana tends to, gradually leak out caus ing possible regression o r causing the illness to recur. This po tential problem can be handled by thoroughly deansing or sweeping the part to be treated and by stabilizing till! projected prana,
I
'~
J, \\d
II
I
-10 Energizing : Egyptian Pose (sitting position)
f'
-
Th e projected prana can be stabilized in two ways:
Fig. 3-11 Energizing : Casual Pose
In the "egyptian" pose, if you intend to draw in pranic Ity through your right hand chakra , bend the right elbow I it is almost parallel to the ground. The arm is moved slightly ~ from your body to make a small opening in your armpit This has the effect of unbending the meridians in the armpit Th e palm is turned upward. This conditions the mind to :Ve prana .
. In the "casu al" pos e, if you intend to draw in pranic energy
gh your left hand chakra, let your left arm hang loosely and ll y , Th e arm is moved slightly away from the body to allow II o pe ning in th e arm pit area. Th e palm is in casual position Is not raised upward . The casu al position requires more
1.
You sho uld finish all energizing with prana by project-
lng blue prana. This is done by visualizing and projecting light blue prana on the treated part.
2.
You can also just will or m entally instruct the projected
prnna to remain or stabilize.
I
You can perform this experime nt to pr ove to yourself the validity of these pr inci ples and techniques. ~
PROCEDURE: 1. Using th e ene rgizing-wit h -pra na tech nique : project white prnna on to p o f a table for about one minute and simultaneously visualize and form it into a ball without willing it to remain. Th is is the fir st pranic ball .
52
I' I. I':M ~: NTA R Y
THE ANCI.:NT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
2. Project, visualize and fo~ a blue pranic ball for about one minute without willing it to remain. This is the second pranic ball. 3. Project and form a white pranic ball for about One minute and will or mentally instruct the pranie ball to remain for one hour. This is the third pranic ball. Make sure the locat ions of the pranic balls are properly marked and that there are no strong winds that might blow the balls away. 4. Scan the three pranic balls to make sure that they are properly formed. 5. Wait for about twenty minutes and scan the three pranic balls again. You may find that the first pranic ball is already gone or greatly reduced in size while the second and third pranic balls are still quite intact. Please, do try this experiment immediately. It is simple and easy to perform.
BIOPLASMIC WASTE DISPOSAL UNIT The diseased bioplasmic matter has to be disposed properly in order to maintain a bioplasmically clean room and to avoid contaminating yourself and the other patients from this dirty bioplasmic matter. The diseased bioplasmic matter when removed from the patient's body is still connected to the patient by bioplasmic threads. The Hawaiian shamans (healers) or kahunas call the bioplasmic thread as 'invisible aka thread. In esoteric , parlance, this is called etheric thread. Unless the diseased biolasmic matter is properly disposed, there is the possibility that It may go back to the patient. To make a bioplasmic waste disposal unit, simply get a bowl f water and add salt into the water. It has been clairvoyantly bserved that water is capable of absorbing dirty bioplasmic matter nd that salt breaks down the dirty bioplasmic matter.
4
PRANIC HEALING
53
After sweeping or cleansing, you should flick your hands ownrd the bioplasmic waste disposal unit. You can perform this .1I1I(llc experiment: Get two bowls of water, put salt in one bowl IIlI do not put salt in the other bowl. Scan the two bowls before nd lifter flicking the dirty bioplasmic matter to each bowl. The lHILy bioplasmic matter can be obtained from sweeping your tlunts. Leave the bowls for about two hours and note the difrenee. You will notice that you could hardly feel the diseased bioplasmic matter in the one with salt; but could still feel it in he one without salt. Some healers use water, sand, water with tobacco.irneat and tlu-r organic matters as bioplasmic waste disposal units. Some iuerican Indian shamans use twigs as bioplasmic waste disposal IIIL. The twigs are placed in the mouth of the shaman and the .nsed bioplasmic matter is sucked out or extracted by the use the mouth. The twigs are used to catch the diseased bioplasmic ulller. The diseased bioplasmic matter is clairvoyantly and mbolically seen by some clairvoyants as spiders or insects or some other repulsive forms. Some shamans do not place any1l1Il( in their mouths. They just simply suck out the diseased lasrnic matter and "dry vomit" it out. For beginners, there the danger of literally swallowing the diseased bioplasmic uer. Therefore, it is safer to use sweeping. GESTED PRACTICE SCHEDULE 1. 2.
a. 4.
Sensitizing the Hands - five to ten minutes per day. Scanning - five to ten minutes per day. General and Localized Sweeping - ten minutes per day. Energizing with Prana - ten minutes per day.
The above schedule should be followed for at least twelve This is to prepare you in case there is a sudden need to I somebody like your own child. The above practice should 'I eb l" you to heal simple cases like fever, loose bowel movement, pnln, muscle pain, insect and bug bites etc ... y• •
l'ruferably , these techniques should be applied on actual lit• . If this is not possible, then get a friend or relative to t!t.h:H
on .
54
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND AIlT OFPIlANIC m ;ALING
If you are on e of those few who are not able to sensiti2lf! your hands on the first session, just proceed to sweeping and energizing with prana. Continue the practice of sensitizing your hands. You should be abl e to accomplish it in three t o four sessions. It is advisable to learn to heal simpl e cases first before going to more difficult cases. This is necessary in order to gain experie nce and confidence. It is preferable t o heal at least thirty simple cases before trying on your own to hea l difficult or severe cases.
III , 1,;~m NTA IlY PIIANIC HEALING
55
w,," k and very old patients, their cha kras are weak. Too much 1', '111111 or too intense energizing has a cho king effect on their , hll krno, This is simila r to the cho king reaction of a very thirsty I',',~on who drink s too mu ch water in .too sho rt a time. The nhllity o f the very weak and old patients to assimilate prana is v,., y slow. Th ese types o r patients sho u ld be energized gently ,,,I gradually. They sho u ld be allowed to rest and assimilate 1"a'lII for about firteen to tw enty minutes before energizing 111 again. 111'
If th e solar plexu s chakr a (e nergy cente r ) is suddenly overru-rgized resu lting in the cho king effect on the chakra, the patient
THREE THINGS TO AVOID IN PRANIC HEALING
1. Do not energize th e eyes directly . They are very delicat e and ar e easily overdosed with prana if directly ener gized . This may damage the eyes in the lon g run. The eyes can be energized through the back of th e head or throu gh th e area between the eyebrows. There is a chakra (en ergy center) in each of the location. It is safer to energize through the ajna chakra (the are a betw een the ey ebrows). In case the eyes ar e sufficiently energized , the excess prana would just flow to other parts of th e body. 2. Do not dir ectly and int ensely ene rgize the heart for a long time. It is quite sensitive and delicate. Too much prana and to o intense energizing may cau se severe pranic congest ion of the heart. The heart can be energized through th e back of the spin e near the heart area. In energizing the heart through the back, prana flows not only to the heart but to other parts of the body. This reduces the possibility of pranic congest ion on the heart. If the heart is energized through the front, the flow of prana is localized around the heart area ; thereby, incr easing th e possibility of pranic congest io n. 3 . Do not apply too intense and too mu ch prana on infants, very young ch ildre n (2 yrs. o ld and below), very weak and old pat ients . With infants and very young children , their chakras (en ergy centers) are still small and not quite strong. With very
"'ll y sudde nly becom e pale and may have difficulty in breathing. Iw"ld this happ en, app ly localized sweeping immediately on the slur plexus area. Th e pati ent will be relieved immediately. This I"' of case is rar e and is presented only to show the read er what ~u ,10 ill case somet hing like t his happ en s.
rl'S IN HEALING ,
I.
h~
Ob serve and interview the patient.
:l. Scan the spine , th e vital organs, the major cha kr as, and IIffected parts. :I ,
Apply gen eral sweeping.
.1.
Do localized sweepin g in t he affected ar eas.
Rescan the affected parts. In case of pranic congest ion , II to determine wh ether th e con gestion has been significantly 1I",.d. For pranic depl etion, scan to det ermine whether the nur nura of the affected part has become a little bigger or has lll\fl~. lIy normalized . ' u. For simple cases. sweeping or cleansing is som etimes urNI'l"lIl to h eal th e patient. ~:n crgi ze the
affected parts with pr ana.
., 50
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
8. Get feedback from your patient. If there are some pain left, ask for the exact spots and rescan those areas. Do more sweeping and energizing. 9. If the part is highly overenergized, do distributive sweeping to prevent possible pranie congestion. 10. Rescan the treated area to determine whether the af. fected area has been sufficiently decongested or energized. Thoroughness is the key to dramatic healing or very fast heating,
I.I·:MENTARY PRANIC HEALING
57
Itlll these two chakras would greatly improve the condition of
lltu patient. The heart should be energized through the back hOllrt chakra. Although you can heal without scanning, you would be milch more accurate and effective if you use scanning. Sometimes some of the malfunctioning chakras are located far away rom the painful or ailing part. WARHING OF THE HANDS
11 . In pranic congestion, cleansing is emphasized. In pranic depletion, energizing is emphasized. 12.
Stabilize the projected prana,
For beginners, it would be better if scanning is done before questioning the patient. This is to Improve their accuracy in eeanning, Scanning, like decision-making or other human facul ties, can be influenced by suggestion. In scanning the patient, you should watch out for this possible flaw and try to recheck your findings. For simple localized illnesses, general sweeping may be skipped . For infectious diseases, general sweeping should .' be applied even if it is just a simple case of eye infection or cold because the whole body is more or less affected. In infectious ~d iseases, the outer aura usually bas holes. The rate of healing is much faster when general sweeping is applied on these cases than when it is not. :CAN YOU HEAL WITHOUT SCANNING?
~ your ability to scan is quite limited, you still can heal without scanning. For simple cases, just ask the patient what rt hurts or is causing discomfort. Then apply localized sweep. Il lig and energizing. For some severe type of ailments, there are patterns that can be followed. For instance, patients suffering '' rom heart ailments usually bave imbalanced or malfunctioning heart and solar plexus chakras, Therefore, cleansing and energi-
Before healing, after sweeping, and after energizing - both h,nd. up to the elbows should be thoroughly washed . This is to ¥tnslt away some of the diseased bioplasmic matter left on the "Alld. of the healer and also to reduce the possibility of absorhUlll it into his system. Otherwise, this may manifest as pain in the 'Il'''s, hands, arms or manifestation of the patient's symptoms I.lto healer's body. Washing is also necessary to prevent bio· I.....lIlc contamination on your next patient. The hands should r"rnbly be washed with germicidal soap to reduce the poslIJlllly of infecting yourself (the healer) or the next patient. ITlCAL FACTORS IN HEALING 1. The patient must be scanned and rescanned thoroughly accurately. Correct bioplasmic diagnosis will lead to correct unent. Proper rescanning wilI give correct feedback as to ..rrectiveness of the initial treatment.
2. The patient's bioplasmic body must be thoroughly ,,,od to increase the rate of healing and to avoid radical re1011 .
a . The patient must be sufficiently energized with prana. Illlurricient energizing means slight improvement or slow rate of . IInll. Overenergizing on delicate organs must be avoided to Vllll pranic congestion.
M
I.k~MENTARY PRANIC
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALI NG
4. Stabilize the projected prana to prevent it from escaping or leaking out. Many new healers become overconfident and co m. mit the serious mistake of not stabilizing the projected prana When their patients teU them how their condition have greatl y mproved . As a result, some patients experience recurrence of ymptoms or ailments after about thirty minutes or after a few hours. Therefore, always stabilize the projected prana after enerizing!
59
HEALING
• 1. tarv nx 2 . thylOid
3. esoohunus 4 . lu ng s
5. heer t 6 . li ver
7. s toma c h
INSULATING GARMENTS
8. sprcon 9 . pa ncreas
Materials such as silk, rubber, and leather tend to act as artial insulator to prana. Patients should be requested not to ...ear silk since it makes projection of prana on them difficult . e at her or rubber shoes and leather belts should preferably be 'cmoved to make general sweeping more effective. Some healers lrefer to remove their sho es when healing in order to 'a bsorb I nor e ground prana. I ~W E N MAJOR CHAKRAS
10 . kidney s 11 . trn n $Ver Sf! c o lon
12 . ascend in g co lon 13 .dcsctl nd ing col on 14 . srnnll intustine
15 . ule rtl s 16 . o 'Jilt Y
1 7, bJatldel l B. tes t icles 19 . p fl lSlot te qtands
Although there are many major chakras, only seven o f them !i ll be discussed in this level. ' 1 . Basic Chakra. This chakra is located at the bas e of th e ine or at the co ccyx area. It energizes and strengthens th e whole o dy and is responsible for your physical well-b eing. It energizes hd affects the nearby organs and it also controls the adrenal lands. Persons with highly activated basi c chakra tend to be bust and healthy, while persons with less active basic chakra nd to be fragil e and weak .
2. Sex Chahra. This chakra is located at the pubic area . co nt ro ls and energizes the sexual organs and the bladder .
,
3. Solar Plexus Chahra. There are two solar plexus chakras. e o ne located at the solar plexus is called the front solar plexus iakm and th e on e at the ba ck is calle d the back solar plexus lokra . The t erm " solar plexus chakra" shall mean both the front ~r plexus chakra and th e back solar plexus chakra . The solar
20 . d i ilp hril(}rn
Fig. 3-13 The Internal Organs
plexus chakra energizes and controls the pancreas, liver, stomach, IRllIe intestine, the appendix, the diaphragm and to a certain (I"llree, the small intestine. The heart is greatly affected by this ihnkra . The front solar plexus chakra is an energy clearing house .,"te r, a large portion of prana from the lower chakras pass es through the front solar plexus chakra be fore reaching the higher rhukras and vice versa. The whole body can be strengthened by nergizing the solar plexus chakra .
4. Heart Chakra. There are two heart chakr as, The one locnted in front of the physical heart at the center of the chest II ca lled the front heart chakra and the other is at the back which I, culled the back heart chakra. The front heart chakra controls nd energizes the physical heart and the thymus gland. The back
60
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
61
NTARY PRANIC HEALING
• croum'chahra ajna chahra
throat chakro
,
\
~ - @
(
\
front heart chakra
\
front solar plexus chakra
@ @
back heart chakra
./
back solar plexus ehak ra I
.j
\@/
sex chakra
~
basic chakra <;
l' Fig, 3-12 (a) The Seven Major Chakras (energy centers)
heart chakra controls and energizes primarily the lungs and to a lesser degree the heart and the thymus gland , The term "heart chakra" shall mean both the front heart chakra and th e back heart chakra. 5. Th roat Chakro . The throat chakra energizes and controls the thyroid and parathyroid glands, and the throat. 6 . Ajna Chakra . This chakra is located at the area between the eyebrows. It' energizes and contr ols the pituitary gland, and it ulac energizes to a certain degree th e brain. It is also called the master chakro because it directs and controls the other chakras and th eir corresponding endocrine glands. Energizing this chakra
Fig. 3-12 (b)
cause the ·oth er chakras to light in a certain sequence. Some Ion project prana to the ajna chakra to reach an ailing part Is located far from the ajna chakm . The ajna cbakra affects 'yes, nose, brain, and other nearby organs . 7 . Crown Chakro. This chakra is located at the crown of head. It energizes and controls the brain and the pineal gland. 'lIlzing this chakra will cause th e proj ected prana to flow to \'.itIth. r parts of the body . It is just like pouring water to a funnel. healers, heal by proj ecting prana to the crown chakra to ' ' h an affected part. It Is Interesting to note that each of the seven major chakras
Izes and controls an endocrine gland or glands .
62
TIm ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
The whole body can be energized through the crown, ajna, back heart, solar plexus, navel, spleen, basic, hand, and fo~t chakms. An affected part can be energized directly or through the nearest chakra, Some healers may energize through a farther chakra, like the ajna or the crown chakra to treat a heart or abdominal problem. Therefore, one can deduce that there are so many possible healing techniques to treat one type of ailment. But the basic principles are the same which is cleansing and
energizing. Acupuncture points and chakros are gates through which prana can easily go in or come out. By energizing through the nearest chakra, the projected prana will have easy and direct access to the affected part. Whereas, when energizing directly the affected part instead of through a chakra or chakras, a filter. ing action on the projected prana takes place; hence, energizing in this way takes more time and more prana.
In energizing the whole body, the solar plexus chakro is usually used because of its proximity to the many important organs in the body. It is located at the center of the trunk which contains many essential organs. Energizing the solar plexus chakra should be done slowly and gently. Too much and too intense energizing could cause difficulty in breathing. TREATMENTS FOR SIMPLE CASES
1.
Headache
c. If the headache is due to eye strain, then the ajna lIhnkro., the eyes, and the temples should be cleansed and enerod. The eyes are energized through the ajna chakra.
1J11i
d. If it is due to an emotional problem or stress, then front solar plexus chakm should be cleansed and energized.
/Iemember to always get feedback from the patient and -to {wllYs rescan the treated area to determine whether treatment 1111. bccn done properly .
2.
Eyestrain or Tired Eyes
a. Scan the eyes, ajna chakra, and the temples. These usually depleted . b. Apply localized sweeping on these areas. Rescan to rmine whether the inner aura of the treated areas have in-d in size. ·If the size has increased, it means cleansing has ,II successful. c. Energize the eyes by energizing the ajna chakm the intention that fresh prana would flow to the eyes. You remember that energy or prana follows thought or where rr nttention is focused. Energize the temple areas. I
a.
Toothache a.
a. Scan the crown chakra, the ajna chakra, the back of the head, the entire head and neck. Headaches could be caused by pranic depletion or congestion on these parts. The eyes, the temples, and the solar plexus should also be scanned. b. Apply localized sweeping and energizing on the crown chakra, ajna chakra, the back of the head, and on the affected head area. If the cause is due to pranic congestion, localized sweeping is usually sufficient to remove the pain. Or just ask the patient what part is aching; and apply localized sweeping and energizing on the affected part.
63
I ,ltMI'~NTARY PRANIC HEALING
Scan the affected part. There is usually pranic
(lId Ion on the painful area.
Clean the affected
:;•• thle.
area by applying localized
c.
Energize the affected part.
d.
Instruct ' the patient to see a dentist as soon as "
64
4.
. 65
MENTARY PRANIC HEALING
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OFPRANIC HEALING
•
Cold with Cough and Stuffy Nose.
a. Scan the sjna chakra, the throat chakra, the front solar plexus chakra, the back heart chakra, and the lungs (front, sides, and back). These 'areas may be congested and/or depleted. b. Since the whole body has been affected to a certain degree, apply general sweeping to clean the whole body.
1111
chonra
"rollt cluJk ra '1,
~)o,e,!"}l
c. Apply localized sweeping and energizing on the ajna chakra, throat chakra, back heart chakra, and lungs. This is to clean and energize the respiratory system from the lungs to the throat and up to the nose.
~
back
heart cluJkra
,," ';~:"
~
" ',:
\\;;.,.~;
d. Apply localized sweeping and energizing on the front solar plexus chakra. This is to energize and strengthen the whole body. e. Rescan the treated areas and get feedback from the patient. If the treatment has been done properly, the patient should be greatly relieved. C. The patient may be given another treatment after four hours to reinforce the earlier treatment and to ensure rapid healing. g. Instruct the patient to rest and not to eat too much. Eating too much consumes a lot of prana which is needed for the rapid healing of the body. 5.
Fever
a. Scan the whole body with emphasis on the seven \IIsjor chakms, the spine, the lungs, the abdomen, and the soles of the feet. Persons suffering from fever usually have small inner auras of about two inches or less: b. Clean the whole body thoroughly by applying general sweepin g four or five times.
i.
v
(
"
r Fig. 3·1 4 Pranic Treatment for Cold c. Clean and energize the hand chakras, and the sole ehakras at the feet . This is to partially .a ctivat e and energize the hand chakras and. the sole chakras; thereby, increasing their capacity to absorb ground and air prana. This will gradually and steadily energize the whole body; thereby, providing the whole body with sufficient prana or vital energy .to fight th e infection. d . Clean and energize the front solar plexus chakra and the navel. This is very important and is a critical factor in rapidly bringing down the fever. e. Fever is usually caused by pulmonary infection. If the throat chakra, the back heart chakra, and the lungs are affected, then apply localized sweeping and energizing on them .
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF I'RANIC HEALI NG
116
67
L.~ M I';NTARY PRANIC HEALING
[7 ;-- ,
,
sole chahras
st~·})
hand chakras
[ront solar plexus chakra
Fig. 3-15 (a) Pranic Treatm ent (or Fever When this technique is done properly, most patient s will show dramatic improvement in an hour or ,less. On rare cases, some patients may experience a slight increase in temperature in the first two hours. This is partly du e to th e radical 'reactio n and the intensified fight betw een the germs and the white corp uscles. g. The tr eatment should be given two to three times a day to greatly increase th e rate of healing. The patient is likely to recover in less than a day or two. 6.
b. Apply localized sweeping on the front solar plexus chakra , th e navel and the abdominal area. Energize the front solar plexus chakra and th e navel. If th e pain is due to pranic congest ion , most likely th e patient wiu be partially if,not fully relieved just by sweeping. 7.
· ••
~I:,~,~}.)
'/;,'
' . . . ~' I
Diarrhea
a. Scan the front solar plexu s chakra, th e navel and the abdominal area. b. App ly general sweep ing.
navel
/
"
l
Stomach Pain and Gas Pain
a. Scan th e front solar plexus chakra, th e navel and t he abdominal area.
"
/~!l(;r;'" ,.
f.
Fig. 3-15 (b) c. Apply localized sweeping on the front solar plexus • th e navel and the abdominal area . Energize the front pluxus chakra and the navel. The patient should experience [ter" short duration of time. Const ipation u. Scan th e front solar plexus chakr a, th e navel, the 1hd!i 1 " ~ \lI 1 "rca and the basic chakra.
b . Apply localized sweeping and energizing with emnth.. front solar plexus chakra and th e navel. c. Usually the patient would be relieved in less than nute s. For acute constipation and chronic const ipat ion ,
8
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRAN IC HJ:o:ALr NG
69
MENTARY PRANIC HEALrNG
•
:J~:;'IJ~
~ (} ;:'
front solar plexus chakra
.j;'/i"l'l ..t\ ..
"
~~!r.rj\,. ~i. (, ~~) "'''' '', ..:,,~.,~
.
nauel
~
t may take several hours before the patient will be relieved . This tment when applied regularly will improve and strengthen the liminative system. '.
r
I
I
"
Fig. 3-16 Pranic Treatment for St omach Pain Gas-Pain Diarrhea and Constipation • •
9.
\
Dysmenorrhea. -,
a. Scan the sex chakra, the navel, the lower abdominal and the basic chakra.
b. . Apply localized sweeping and energizing on the sex , h kra, the navel , and the basic chakra. c. If the patient is exh austed , then the front solar us chak ra should also be treated.
basic
chakra
Fig. 3-17 Pranic Treatment for Dysmenorrhea d. Most patients will be relieved in a short time.
Irregular Menstruation or No Menstruation. Use the treatment for dysmenorrhea. Check the aina ~1I1AL" and the throat chakra.
Muscle Pain and Sprain. a.
Apply localized sweeping and energizing on the
IUlICUK1 part. The emphasis should be on energizing. Most patients
v r partially if not completely in a short time. b. For fresh sprain , energizing should be continued is complete relief. The patient should not overexert tor_awd part since it has not healed completely.
70
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
12.
71
I\ U :MENTA RY PRANIC HEALING
Backache
a. Backache usually manifests as pranic depletion. Scan the spine thoroughly. b. App ly localized sweeping on the .ent ire spine with emphasis on the affected part. Apply energizing on the affected part. The relief is usually very fast. c, Repeat these treatments for the next few weeks. This is necessary to make the healing permanent.
13.
Difficulty in Raising the Arm
Difficulty in Raising the Arm
a. This may be caused by pranic depletion or congas' tion in the armpit and the surrounding areas. b. Scan the areas thoroughly . c. Apply localized sweeping and energizing on the armpit, and on the shoulder. By thoroughly cleansing and energizing the armpit, most patients will experience dramatic improvement in just a few minutes. d. Difficulty in raising the arm could also be caused by heart ailment or high blood pressure.
14.
"'Ill, ,1·18 Pranic Treatment for
Cuts, Burns, and Concussions
a. Apply localized sweeping immediately and energize thoroughly. Make sure the treated area is sufficiently energized.
d. When the treatment is done properly and thorough. , the rate of healing is very fast and quite dramatic. 16 .
Insomnia
a. If the patient is too excited or overenergized, apply wnward general sweeping four to seven times. This would be Jrrtt:icnt to make the patient drowsy. Apply downward sweeponly. Do not apply upward sweeping since it would tend to tho patient more alert. b. If the patient feels depleted, apply general sweeping rout two times. Clean and energize the front solar plexus chakra, lhe crown chakra is affected, clean and energize it. 111 .
General Weakness a.
b. Since the rate of pranic consumption is very fast, the treatment has to be repeated once every hour for the next three hours. Repeat the treatment twice a day for the next few days. e. If the cut or concussion is on the head area, local. ized sweeping should be applied before and after energizing to avoid pranic congestion in the head area which may cause headache or other unpredictable side effects.
Fig. 3·19 Pranic Treatment for Cuts, Burns and Con cussions
Apply general sweeping two times.
b. Clean and energize the sole .chakras and the hand This will partially activate and energize the hand chakras lhu sole chakras making them absorb more ground and air \s which will gradually and steadily energize the whole body. II.
c. Rescan the hand chakras and the sole chakras to PJ,lInu lr", whether they have greatly increased in size.
72
l ;NTA RY PRANIC HEAU NG
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
}I)
73
d. Clean and energize the front solar plexus chakra then t he navel. j e.
Continue energizing until the patient feels much
u er,
17.
Insect and Bug Bites. a. Ap ply localized sweeping.
sole chakras hand chakras Fig. 3·20 (a) Pranic Treatment for General Weakne88
b . En ergize intensely and su fficiently the affected r-III. There shou ld be some reduction in redness and swelling in lilA" than t h irty minutes. c. Re peat the treatment after one,hour. 18.
Bo ils.
Ap ply localized sweeping and energizing on the af1.1'<1 part. 19 .
. ,,,.»«~
~.; .t;N.
(' ~ ,
front solar plexus
,.1\. ,-
"
~~ fi!,j~.•,
~
navel
~ (I>"i J1~~~
,
/
~
Pimp les.
a. Apply localized sweeping and energizing on the . The face is d epleted and the inner aura relatively grey . b . Scan the ajna chakr a and the solar plexus chakra. I'ply localized sweeping and ene rgizing on these chakras, It ill S pimples may have something to do with emotions and the lultllry gland . c. The face may be treated once or twice a day while major chak ras may be t reated once every two or three days. d . The pati ent is expect ed to watch her di et and to DI' her face regu lar ly clean . Irritat ing th e pimple should be
ldud,
Fig. 3· 20 (b)
e.
T he emphasis should be on cleansing and ener-
In~ t he face. Substantial improvement ma y occur in a few
I<.a ti me .
74
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
20.
Hiccup ,
Clean and energize the front solar plexus chakra. Energizing should be continued u nt il t he patient is relieved .
21.
L Il~mNTARY
75
PRANIC HEALING
Th e author has taught several ordinary people h'ow to heal, "I tlley have become relatively proficient in just a few weeks 111I 11 . Pranic healing is easy. It just needs an open mind and a lit rI~ l,,'rseverance.
Nosebleed
uow I"REQUE NT SHOULD HEALING BE DONE? Clean and energize the ajna chakra and the root of the nose. Continue energizing u ntil the bleedi ng stops.
22.
Stiff Neck
It depends on several factors:
I. "he Severeness and th e Criticalness of .the Ailment. - ,- .. -.In v'-'" cases, the rate of deterioration could be qui te fast. For \
a . Scar. the lower back part of the head , the entire neck, the shoulder, and the armpit. b. Apply localized sweeping and energizing on the affected lower back part of the head, t he affected part of the neck, the nape, the affected shoulder, and t he affected armpit. If the right area is painful, then the right lower back part of the head, the center and th e right part of the neck, the nape, the right sho ulder, and the right armpit should be cleansed and energized thoroughly. c. The emphasis should be on the lower back part of the head, the neck and the nape. If do ne properly, the effect is quite dramatic. d. Stiff neck cou ld also be caused by heart ailment or high blood pressure. .
23. Muscle Cramps
1\!WlllnR to take place, the rate of healing must be faster than 11 0 rnte of deterioration. To increase the rate of healing, the ruency of the treatments has to be increased. For example, treating patients with cancer, the treatment has to be given lenst once a day or once every two days. If the treatment is v"n once every two weeks, the patient is not likely to improve 'IlUse the rate of deterioration is much faster than the rate of ling. In emergency or critical cases, the rate of deterioration is fost that the treatment may have to be given on ce every hour once every four hours depending upon how urgent is the case . ncute appendicitis, the treatment has to be given once every i our Cor the next fo ur hours or until the condition has substantiall ~ lmproved . i'I'he treatment should be given two to three times in h ~ next few days. Not all cases of acute appendicitis can be Iitlol,od by pranic healing. Some may require surgery.
2.
Rate of Pranic Consumption. Tissue damages like cuts, concussions, and acute infections consume large ,ontit y of prana at a very fast rate . If th e patient is suffering m seuere infection or burn, then th e affected part should be wrgized once every hour for the next few hours since th e rate f pranic consumption is very fast. In acute pancreatitis, the )ntil'nt can be treated once every four hours until he has substanliIoily improved . Another factor is how fast th e patient wants to I ioell. If a patient has contussion on the arm and he wants it Ret well in a day or two, this would require several applications ,l f Il S,
1. Scan the affected part. 2 . Apply localized sweeping th oroughly . 3. Apply energizing on the affected part. 4. The emphasis should be on energizing. Energizing should be continued until there is substantial or complete relief.
-
16
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
of pranic healing for the firSt few hours. If healing is done immediately and properly, the sldn will not blacken or tum yellow and the rate of healing would be very fast, about less than a day or two days at most . If the patient just wants a moderate rate of healing, then the treatment can be applied just once. If pranic healing is applied immediately, then the concussion will be healed within a few days. 3. The 'Delicateness and Importance of the Part beinB Treated. If the organ being treated is quite delicate and vital like the head, eyes, and heart; then healing should preferably be applied at a longer interval to avoid possible pranic congest ion which may have serious consequences. If the part being treated if not so delicate or sensitive like the knee or the ann, th en healinr can be applied once every hour for the next four hours withou1 serious side effects or radical reactions.
4. The Age and Health Condition of the Patient. Patient, who are very weak, old or very young require a series of mile treatments since their ability to absorb prana is very slow. These are some of the factors to be considered in determinim the frequency of treatments. The healer should use sound judg ment or discrimination on this matter. The author usually prefers to treat a patient at an interval of onc e every two to three da:rs in most cases. In critical case, or if the patient wants a very fast rate of healing, pranic treatment is applied once every hour for t he next few hours on th e first day and once or twic e a day for th e next few days. The healer should observe or monitor th e pati ent closely for possible radical reactions which could be seriou s. WHOLISTIC OR INTEGRATED APPROACH IN HEALING As .stated earlier, disease could be caused by internal 01 external factors or a combination of both. Obviously, the health condition of a person is dependent upon 'the well-being of the
MENTARY PRANIC HEALING
11
sible physical body, the bioplasmic body, and the psychological heulth of the patient. Although many of the simple and serious I. cases can be healed by pranic healing, it is better to reinforce hu healing process by taking herbs or medicinal drugs. If the vl.lble physical body and bioplasmic body are treated simultanoously, obviously the rate of healing would be much faster ",I more effective than orthodox medicine alone or pranic hl'uling alone. An acupuncturist uses acupuncture to 't reat the loplasmic body and herbs to heal the visible body by strengthen. h'll the affected organs . Although the author heals by using pranic ling only and has obtained amazing results, he does not disiourage or prohibit his patients from taking medicine or under. olng surgery . The ancient famous Chinese doctor Hun To was ot.cd not only for his skills in acupuncture and herbs but also r his surgical skills. Although pranic healing can do a lot of fantastic things, it 11M its limitations. Sometimes proper diet, physical exercise, ~oklng herbs or medicinal drugs, change in lifesty le, emotiontherapy or surgery is required. It is important to maintain nc's objectivity and have a proper perspective of what the differnt types of healing can do . Extremes and fanaticism should be voided. Just as it is foolish for doctors trained in orthodox Il ./I.licine to ignore or sometimes ridicule paranormal healing, t Is equally foolish for a pranic healer to ignore what modem ID<'<.1icine is capable of doing and what it has done to cure and Jluviate the suffering of man from diseases! HOW DO YOU WILL OR INTENT? You do not have to tense your muscles or exert extraordiIIIlJ"Y effort when you "will" or intent. You do not even have to ualize or close your eyes. When yo u perform with understand, expectation, and concentrat ion , you are already willing! be degree of concentrat ion required is not extraord inary . The ee of concentration used in reading a book is sufficient to form pranic healing . Th e author does not expect you to believe disbelieve what he has written . What is expected from you is n open, inquiring mind with a strong interest to experiment and .Iry the validity of the principles and techniques suggested in Ih l. book.
78
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALI NG
The preliminary work with Kirlian photography far seems to indicate that psychic healing involves a transfer of energy from the bioplasmic body of 'the healer to the bioplasmic body of his patient.
.
I-IAPTER FOUR
80
Psychic Discoveries Behind the Iron Curtain by S. Ostrander and L. Schroeder
A more scientific method. . . . . first withdraws the congested and diseased matter, and then replaces it by healthier nerve ether (vital energy), thus gradually stimulating the sluggish current into activity. -
The Chakras by C. W. Leadbeater
Intermediate Pranic Healing Man lives only as 'lo ng as he has vital energy in his body. If he lacks vital energy, he dies. Therefore, we should practice pranayama (the art of controlling vital energy or prana through breathing). Hatha Yoga Pradipiha (Ancient Textbook on Yoga)
.. . by rhythmic breathing and controlled thought you are enabled to absorb a considerable amount of prana (vital energy), and are also able to pass it into the body of another person, stimulating weakened parts and organs and imparting health and driving out diseased conditions. The Science of Psychic Healing by Ramachamka
Yogi
,
,
HO
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
JICIlM.:OIATE PRANIC HEALING
81
DRAWING IN PRANA THROUGH PRANIC BREATHING In level I, you learned to draw in prana through one of the hand chakras. In level 2. you will learn pranic breathing in order to absorb or draw in tremendous amount of prana through the whole body from the surroundings. There are many types of yogic breathing for different purposes. Yogic breathing that enables the practitioner to draw in a lot of prana and facilitates the projection of prana i~ called pranic breathing. When you do pranic breathing, it energizes you to such an extent that your auras temporarily expand by 100 percent or more. The inner aura expands to about eight inches or more; the health aura to about four feet or more and the outer aura to about two meters or more. All of these can be verified through scanning .
•
You can perform this simple experiment: Ask a friend to do pranic breathing for about five minutes. Sean your friend before he starts doing pranic breathing and after he has done pranic breathing for about two minutes. Note the changes in the sizes of the auras . You may even feel a rhythmic pulsation or expansion. It is important that you perform this and other experiments so that your knowledge will be based on solid foundations. -I
METHOD No.1: Deep Breathing with Empty Retention
1. Do abdominal breathing. 2. Inhale slowly and retain for one count. 3. Exhale slowly. Retain your breath for one count before inhaling. This is called empty retention. M8THOD No.2: 7-1-7-1 1. Do abdominal breathing. 2. Inhale for seven counts and retain for one count. 3. Exhale for seven counts and retain for one count.
;,
Pranic Breathing: By doing pranic breathing you are able to absorb and project tremendous amount of vital energy or prana.
MgTIIOD No.3: 6·3·6·3 1. Do abdominal breathing. 2. Inhale for six counts and retain for three counts. 3. Exhale for six counts and retain for three counts. In doing abdominal breathing, you expand your abdomen t1y when inhaling and contract your abdomen slightly when II nil. Do not over-expand or over-contract your abdomen. would make breathing unnecessarily difficult.
H2
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC ImALING
I
inhaling Fig. 4-2
83
INTlmM~;IlIATE PRANIC HEALING
'¥"'1 ~--
exhaling Abdominal Breathing
The critical factors are the rhythm and the empty retention. [ lo lding your breath after exhalation is called empty retention; nd holding your breath after inhalation is called full retention: 'hrough clairvoyant observation, it is noted that there is a tre!llOndous amount of prana rushing into all parts of the body when nhalation is done after empty retention. This does not take place 'r the inhalation is not preceded by empty retention. When drawing in prana, you may use either pranic breathing r the hand chakra technique or both simultaneously. OW '\'0 DRAW IN GROUND PRANA, AIR PRANA ND TREE PRANA There is a minor chakra in each foot. This chakra is called w sole chakra. By concentrating on the sole chakras and simulncously doing pranic breathing, you can tremendously increase
Fig. 4-3
Drawing in Ground Prana
Iho amount of ground prana absorbed through the sole ehakras, ;;lll,,,'ntrating on the sole chakras activates them to a certain il ~~nl". Pranic breathing greatly facilitates or helps the sole chakras ill
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND AliT OF PIIANIC HEALING
84
85
Il'I'mltMEIJIATE PIIANIC HEALING
v ,
.--.
v·
,,-
~
. I .... !,/ <:...ttl~1 '\: •
"'".
\ .
/\
'
~
'to,
.
.
(:;;:;;}'/ .
!:
I.
\
.:\ \
C.: '~ ':\
.":
~
. . ...
" .:;
rr:
, "
\
•
Fig, 4·4
Fig, 4-5
Drawing in Air Prima
2. Press the hollow portion of your feet with your thumbs to make concent ration easier. 3. Concentrate on the soles of th e feet and do pranic ' breathing simultaneously. Do this for about t en cycles. • You can use the same principle to draw in air prana or tree prana through th e hand chakras t o energize yourself. To draw in air prana through th e hands, just concentr ate on the hand chakras and simultaneously do pranic breathing. To draw in tree prana through th e hand chakras, choose a big healthy tree and ask mentally or verbally the perm ission of the t ree to draw in its excess prana. Put your hands on the trunk of the ' tree or near it.
Drawing in Tree Prana
"titrate at the center of your palms and simultaneously do uc breathing. Do this for ten cycles and thank the tree for irunn, Some of you may experience numbness or tingling uon throughout the body. Once esoteric principles and ,11'1''''. are fully explained, they are usually very simple .
.
Iter energizing yourself, it is advisable to circulate the th e body, Visualize yourself filled with light nn nnd circulate the prana continuously from the back to 'O tlt several times, then from the front to the back several
'' 'M throughout I ~o,
86
TIl E ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
SENSITIZI NG THE HANDS THROUGH PRA NIC BREATHING By now, most of you should have more or less permanently sensitized your hands. However, sometimes you may experience moments wherein the hands seem not to be able to feel or scan. This can be immediately remedied by concent rat ing simultaneo usly at the center of your palms and at the tips of your fingers while doing pranic breathing for about three cycles. This will cause the hand chak ras and finger chas ra« to be actiuated, energized and sensitized so that you can scan accurately with your palms and with your fingers. SCANNING WITH THE FINGERS After sensitizing your hands, scan your own palm with your two fingers. Move your fingers slowly and slightly back and forth to feel the inner aura of your palm. Try to feel the thickness of your palm with two of your fingers and try t o feel the different layers of the inner aura . Practice also scanning your palm with one finger. Always concentrate at the tips of your fingers when scanning with your fingers. This will activate or further act ivat e the mini finger chakras; t hereby, sensitizing the fingers. When scanning .with your palms and fingers, always concentrate at the center of your palms and at the ti p of your fingers. This will cause the hand chakras and the finger chakras to remain activated or to become more activated; thereby, making the palms and the fingers more sensitive. Being able to scan with the palms is not sufficient. You must learn to scan with your fingers. This is required in locating or , proper scanning of small troubled spots. It is difficult to scan properly for small troubled spots. with the palm because it may only feel the healthier surrounding areas aro und the small trou bled spot . The small troubled spots are "Climouflaged' by the healthier parts. For instance, a person with eye problems usually have pranic depletion in the eyes, while the inner auras of the surrounding
I N T F.ItM ~; D1 AT E
PRANIC HEALING
87
may be normal. Since the palm is quite big and the inner urn of t,jle eyes is about two inches in diameter, it is likely that t Iw palms may feel only the healthy eyebrows and forehead without becoming aware of the small troubled spots. This could I", uvoided if the fingers were used in scanning. The spinal column . 1I0 uld be scanned by using one or two fingers in order to locate sma ll troubled spots. .'
In scanning a patient, Y9U do not have to scan th e outer and hea lt h auras . You were taught how to scan the outer and health u rns in order to prove to yourself the existence of these auras. Whitt is important is scanning the inner aura of the patient . In
' l'nnning t he inner aura, it is important to feel the general energy level or t he general thickness of the inner aura of the patient . This general energy level will be used as a reference or standard 0' comparing the conditions of some of th e major chakras and vltnl organs . The accuracy of scanning will be affected if-that area I. IICIInned for too long because the scanned area will become nrt la lly energlzed. . It is important that you should be able to feel the pressure IV/JIm scanning in order to det ermine th e thickness of the inner 11m o f the part being scanned . Some of you may feel pain in your hands or fingers when in contact with a diseased part. The inner urn has several layers . In scanning the inner aura, you may feel ssure at abo ut five inches and another layer which is denser stronger in pressure at about two or three inches away from 10 skin . Sometimes when scanning the inner aura of a part, the 1111' aura of that part may seem normal. But when scanned urt her wit hin, the next layer is rather thin which means that no part is quite depleted. In scanning the inner aura, it is importII/ /0 scan not on ly its first layer but also its inner layers. An Ivnnced yogi or an advanced practitioner of ki kung (the art of orating internal power) has an inner aura that is comparatively and has many layers. Sometimes the inner aura is more than meter in thickness.
Scanning is also very useful in determining whether an infant r (/ child has hearing or eyesight problem. .
• 88
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
In treating serious casee. th'J eleven major chakrae, the relevant minor chal,rae, all the major and vital organs. and the spine should be scanned thoroughly. It Is through proper scanning and correct understanding of the nature of the ailment that the correct treatment can be determined. SWEEPING WITH PRANIC BREATHING General and localized sweeping are more effective when used with pranic breathing since more bioplasmic matter and prana are harnessed t o remove diseased bioplasmic matter. When doing pranic breathing, the healer becomes more powerful. His etheric body or his bioplasmic body becomes brighter and denser. Just follow the instructions given in level No. 1 on how to apply general sweeping and localized sweeping, and simultaneously do pranic breathing. With this type of sweeping, the patient Is cleansed and energized simultaneously to a substantial degree. This type of sweeping is quite effective and very often sufficient to heal simple ailments. Sweeping can be 'd one several feet away from the patient and with fewer strokes. You do not have to bother what hand position to use. .
You may visualize luminous white prana sweeping and wash. ing the patient from the crown to the feet when do ing down. ward sweeping. Visualize the health rays being straightened. You do not have to do upward sweeping unless the patient is quite sleepy or has weak legs. When doing the upward sweeping, you may visualize the ground prana going up from the sole chakras up to the crown chakm. This should be done after the patient has been cleansed sufficiently with downward sweeping. To apply upward general sweeping before applying downward sweeping may result in the transferring of diseased bioplasmic matter to the head and brain areas. This may result in serious harm on the patient. You mayor may not visualize when you do sweeping but with some healers sweeping is more effective when accompanied by visualization. What is important is the intention to clean and energize the patient's bioplasmic body.
89
IN'l'EllMEDIAT E PRANIC HEALING
In sweeping, special attention should be placed on the back btoplasrrtlc channel or the governor meridian which interpenetmtes the spine, and the front bioplasmic channel or functional meridian which is opposite to the spine. Except for the spleen chakra, lmoat all the major chakras are located along these two channels r nadls, Cleansing or applying localized sweeping on these tw o iannels would clean the major chakras located along these two erldians resulting in a much faster rate of healing. You must member that all the major and vital organs are energized and ntrolled by the major chakras.
When applying localized sweeping, visualize the fingers and hands penetmting into the diseased part and the greyish ""ased matter being removed.
h~
N~:RGIZING WITH
PRANIC BREATHING
Prana is drawn in by using pranic breathing and projected hrough one or both of the hand chakms. 1. Do pmnic breathing slowly for about three to five cycles 1 simultaneously calm and still your mind. 2. Continue doing pranic breathing and simultaneously put ur hand or hands near the part to be treated. Concentrate on hi center of your palm or palms. \
3. Will or direct the projected pranic energy to the affected lIlkra then to the affected part. This is a critical factor and in y cases, would produce rapid relief since the affected part or n will be quickly provided with sufficient pranic energy . a/tentlon should be primarily focused on the hand chakra or kra« and on directing the pranic energy, and less on the breath1. Stop energizing when you intuitively sense the patient hough prana or vital energy . Rescan the patient to determine :t her he is sufficiently energized . In level no. lor elementary lc healing, you were instructed to atop energizing when you o slight repulsion or a cessation of flow of energy. As you IIIgCPID ~ more advanced ,in healing, this guideline is no longer valid
,
,
90
THE ANCI ENT SC IENCE AND ART OF PRANIC IIEALIN G
INTI.;IlMf;D1ATE PRANIC m;ALING
91
\
because your pranic energy level becomes much higher compared to that of the patient. To equalize your pranic energy level with the affected part of the patient may result in pranic congest ion on the part being treated.
•
5 . If the patient has severe infection, bums, or cuts, then the treatment has to be repeated after half an hour or after an hour. These types of cases consume pranic energy at a very fast rate; therefore, the treatments have to be repeated more frequ entl y . For pranic healers who are in the process of bec oming 6. proficient, to relieve simple ailments may require five to seven breathing cycles and more serious ailments may require abo ut tw elve cycles or more. This is just to give you a rough idea. You
may energize using your palm chakras or your finger chakra s or both of them simultaneously. Energizing sho uld be done simu ltaneously with pranic breathing. It is preferable to do pranic br eathing for three t o five cycles before you start energizing and to cont inue doing pran ic breathing for two cycles after you have sto pped energizing . Thi s is to prevent possible gen eral pranic depl etion on the part of th e healer. There are tw o types of double energiz ing or energizing wit h two hands : parallel double energiz ing and non-parallel do u ble energizing. In parallel double ene rgizing, simply place your han ds facing and parallel to each other with the affected part in between them. In non-parallel d ouble energizing, th e hands are dir ected at the affected part but are not parall el to each other. In parallel double energizing, an intense energy field is created causing t he hand to rhythmically expand and contract . Tingling sensation is felt not only in the affected part but also in other parts of the body. At times, th e patient may even feel a slight elect ric shock . Double energizing is usually used in cases that require tremendous amount of prana . Cleansing must be done before double energiz ing. Double energizing can also be used to quickly relieve simple ailments or illnesses mentioned in level 1.
Fig. 4-6
Parall el Dou bl e Energizing
NlmGIZING : DISTRIBUTIVE SWEEPING TE CHNIQUE ~;nergizing with the use of distributive sweeping t echniqu e Imply means the use of swee ping to red istribute excess prana e rn other parts of the body to the a iling part :
1. Clean the ailing part by applying localized sweeping.
UI
2. Sweep the excess pra na with th e use of your hand the surrounding parts and cha kras t o the treated part.
Thi s type of ene rgizing is qu ite effec t ive in healing simple r,ynts. Rut is not so effecti ve in mo re serious cases since these • of ailm ents require tremend ous a mount of prana. S ING DISEASED BIOP LASMIC MAT TER TI,,'n, are times when it is inconveni ent or not po ssible to nway th e diseased bioplasmic matter into a bioplasmic tll.posal unit. Should this happen, just simply visualize a
W
92
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
INn:ltM EDlATE PRANIC HEALI NG
93
'l'ILl ZING lOlROUND PRANA IN HEALING There is greater concentration of prana just above the ground hlln in the air. The density of prana just above the ground is hout four or five times greater than the prana contained in the lr. This conce ntration of ground prana can be used for healing. Ask your patient to lie down on the ground. A cotton hlunket or a mat made of natural material may be used to lie on. Avoid using leather, rubber, synthetic foam, synthetic mat or hln nket t o lie on . This tends to act as insulator which hinders Lh,' free flow of gro und prana into the body. Apply general sweeping and lo calized sweeping several times.
r the patient rest and gradually absorb fhe ground prana. The
~
,\ -Fig. 4-7
Non-parallel Double Energizing
fire beside you and throw the diseased bioplasmic matter into the fire. Then ex tinguish the visualized fire after treating your patient. Th e other way is to will the diseased bioplasmic matter to disintegrate when you flick it away . These two techniques are applica hle only for th e more advan ced healers. For beginn ers, you ca n try to heal in open spaces and throw th e diseased bioplasmic matter into the ground. It is a COmmo n practi ce am on g shamans to dispose of obj ects filled with diseased bioplasmic matter by burning them, ex posing them in the air fo r a prolonged period of time or burying them under the ground.
l or cleansing causes a sort of partial "pranic vacuum" which '"Its in the rushing of ground prana into the bioplasmic body th e patient and into the treated part. Energy tends to flow from liter intensit y to lower intensity or from greater concentration lower co ncen tration. Once the patient is cleansed, energizing III grou nd prana occurs automatically and gradually. The IIOftler should preferably energize the patient after sweeping to iort en th e time required to substantially energize the affected
n,
Th is is also the reason why som e shaman healers go to the tunt of burying the patient into the ground so that he can abrh more ground prana, If on e is not feeling too well, one can CI swim in the sea for about ten to fifteen minutes to cleanse 'I' bioplasmic body and after that bury his body in th e sand to Iwlily absorb ground prana. ' lwrrVE POSE Ilea ling would be a lot easier if the patient is receptive or not o ffer strong resistance. Projected prana can be rejected til" patient if he is strongly biased against this type of healing hu dis likes the healer or if he does not want to get well.
9 ·1
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND AlIT OF PRANIC HEA LING
It is, th erefore, advisabl e to establish rapport with th e pat ients to reduce resistance. If th ere is strong resistance on th e part of th e patient, requ est him to assum e the receptive pose during th e treatment. Request th e pati ent to turn his palms upward and to bend his head slightly downward. This is to redu ce his resistance and to make th e healing a lot easier. SUGGEST ED PRACTICE SCHEDULE 1.
Scanning with two fingers - five minutes.
2.
Pranic breathing with drawing in of air prana through the hand chakras - five minutes.
3.
Gen eral sweeping at a distance of one meter from the patient - five minutes.
4.
Energizing with pranic breathing - five minu tes.
Follow the schedule for about two weeks. You should also ry to treat many difficult cases. If you follow consistently th e insructio ns in this book, your healing skill will develop very rap idly . Yo u will be able to do a lot of things th at may be considered by athers as "impossible" or "miraculous"! )TH ER HEALING TECHNIQUES
The healing techniques that were explained earlier are those rfte n used by the author and his friends . Th ere are many other realing t echniques used by other healers, how ever, th e basic prin.iples are th e same - which are cleansing and energizing the af'ected parts: 1. Extraction Technique a. b. c.
Primitive Elementary Advanced
IN'I'ImMEDlATE PRANIC HEALING
-
95
2. Short Circuiting - Cleansing and Energizing
•
3. Short Circuiting - Redistribution ot Prana Extraction Technique - Primitiue There are several types of extraction technique. The simplest rm of extraction te chnique is done sometimes, if not usually, II y natural born healers with no training in healing. Th ese types of " ""Icrs simply touch th e affected part and involuntarily absorb r extract the pain and the diseased bioplasmic matter into his t'vd y hut without expelling it. This is becaus e they do not really now how to exp el the diseased bioplasmic matter and do not lurstand what is happening. Consequently, th ey are affected by the diseased bioplasmic matter but recover after a, good night IOuI'. This technique is definitely not advisable. Extraction Technique - Elem entary Another type of extract io n te chnique is by absorbing the ed matter through one of th e hand chakras and expelling I through the other hand chakra , You may use either of the (i chakras for extraction and expelling. Although this is an provement over the primitive technique, it is still not advisable use there is always th e possibility that som e diseased bioplasmatter will remain in th e healer's body. Just imagine what utd happen to the healer if he ext racts dirty bioplasmic matter In, twenty to fifty patients a day and for two hundred fifty II year. It is quite unlikely th at th e healer will remain healthy long. He might even end up with so many strange diseases. Idea of absorbing dirty, sticky, greyish diseased bioplasmic tur Is just plainly repulsive. I Ex traction Techniqu e - A duanced Another type of extraction technique is to simply extract IsoflKOd bioplasmic matter from th e afflicted part by an act III , The diseased bioplasmic matter is caught by th e hand and 'II into the bioplasmic waste disposal unit . No sweeping nent is done. The hand is placed a few inches away from the
THE ANCIE NT SCIENC.; AND AltT OF PltANIC HEALI NG
U6
INTJo:IlMElJIATE PltANI C HEALING
97
,
,
af flicted part and the diseased bioplasmic matter is extracted by willing it to come out.
Short Circuiting - Cleansing and Energizing Short circuiting can be done either to simultaneously clean and energize an afflicted part, or to redistribute prana from on e a rea to another part. Short circuiting (cleansing and energizing) is done by simply placing the energizing hand at the back of the chakra to be treated and the extracting hand in front of it.
If,NlmGIZ ING OBJECTS Objects lik e water, food , h erb s, medi cine, alcoh ol, oil , oint-
n...nt, balm, lotion, band aid , bandage and cotto n can be cha rged wllh praT to facilitate th e healing process. En er gized wat er can I... tak en internally by the patients t o fac ilitate the healing process. c,:old water absorbs more prana whil e warm water absorbs much I dlill.
Herbs, drugs, ointment, balm, loti o n and oil ca n be energized increa se their effectivity and their po tency. Ru bbing alcohol (Ion he energized to increase its di sinfecting effect and t o hasten UII' healing rate. Band aid, bandage and cotton can also be ener• r-d for similar pu rposes. IIJ
Procedures:
1.
Do prank breathing.
2. Place your energizing hand at the back of the chakra t o be t reated.
3. Place your ext racting hand in front of the chakra, Visualize your extr acting hand surrounded by a layer of bright light. 4. Energize th e back of the chakra. .Visualize and will the dirty energy to come out. The diseased energy should not penet rate th e lay er of bright light on the extracting hand . Do not ab sorb the dirty energy into your body! 5. Flick the dirty energy into the bioplasmic waste disposal unit. The flicking of the dirty energy can be done at several intervals .
Short Circuiting - Redistribution of Prana On e hand .is used fo r drawing in prana from the source and the other hand is used for energizing the part to be treated. Fo r ex am ple, in treating an arthritic knee, the hand that is drawing in prana is placed in fro nt of the basic chakra and the en ergizing hand is placed at the back of the art hrit ic kn ee. T here ar e other healing techniques not dealt with here but th e basic principles are th e same which are cleansing and energizing .
There are some patients who involuntarily or willfully rest the healing process. A patient t hat resists can, to a certain J tnnt , block or prevent the entry of pra na into his body. In this • energized oil can be used as an entry point for prana. It
ct8 "" a gate or hole for prana to ente r the patient's body. For healing skin di seases, energized ointment, lotion or 1m can be used after the init ial prank t reatme nt. Instead of huullng the patient so many times, healing sessions can be reo ucod , The healing process is compe nsated by the use o f energize d tment or medicine. Therefore, t he healer will have more time Irunt more serious cases. It is quite likely that in a few d ecad es from now, most drugs ncdicines will be energized with prana to produce faster and I'm : effective results.
Objects ca n be ene rgized by u sing pra nk breathing and the 'lcrgi1.ing technique. En ergizing can also be done by using hVlIl"ll1 means.
98
T HE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
99
INn ;llM EDIAT E PRANI C HEALING
ELEVEN MAJOR CHAKRAS 1. Crown Chak ra. It is located on the crow n of the head . It controls and energizes the pineal gland , the brain and the entire body. It is one of t he major entry points of prana . Energizing the crown chakra has the effect of energizing the who le body. It is similar to po uring water to a funnel causing the who le bod y t o be flooded with prana. That is why some healers heal by energizing the crown chakra even though the affected part is som ewhere else. Malfunctioning of the crown chakra may manifest as diseases related to the pineal gland and bra in . These may mani fest as physical or psychological illnesses.
1. larynx
2. thyroid 3. esop hagus 4. lungs 5. heart
6 . liver 7. stomach
a.
splee n
9. pancreas 10. ki dne ys
2. Forehead Chakra. Th is is locat ed at the center of th e forehead . It controls and energizes the pineal gland and the nervous system. Malfunctioning of the forehead chakra may manifest as insanity, loss of memory, paralysis and epilepsy. Energizing this chakm has a similar funneling effect like the crow n chakm causing the whole body to be flooded with prana ,
11 . transverse co lon
Aina Chakra. This chakm is located between the eyebrows. It controls and energizes the pituitary gland. It also con -
18 . testic les
12 . ascendin g co lon 13 . descendin g colo n
14.5mall int estine
t b.u teru s 16 . ovary
17.bladder
3.
trols or influences the endocrine glands and' vital organs by con trolling or influencing the major chakras, Malfunctioning of this chakra manifests as diseases related to the endocrine glands and the eyes. Treating diabetes requires not only treating the solar plexus' chakra (front and back) wh ich controls the pancreas but also the ajna chakra. Energizing this chakra also causes the whole body to be energized. The mechanism is different from t he crown ' and the forehead chakra, Instead of 'the usual funneling effect, energizing the ajna chakra causes the other chakras to light up in certain rapid sequence; thereby, energizing the whole body . That is why in charismatic healing or invocative healing, the healers touch either the crown or the forehead or the ajna chakm of th e patients with 'their fingers or palms. The sudden intense rushing in of prana in the head area causes some patients to lose consciousness. 4. Throat Chakra, This chakra is located at the center of the throat. It controls and energizes the throat, the thyroid gland s, and the parathyroid glands. To a certain degree it also influences
19 .pros tate glands 20 .diap hragm
Fig. 4·8
Th e Int ernal Organs
rx chakm. Malfunctioning of th e throat chakra manifests thr out related illnesses like goiter, sore throat, loss of voice, hm n, etc . . .
II . Heart Chahra, The front heart chakra is located at the Lur or the chest. It energizes and controls the heart, the thymus J und the circulatory system . Malfunctioning of the front chakra manifests as heart and circulato ry illnesses. Th e solar • chakra is quite sensit ive to emotion, tension and stress, hU N strong influence on the physical heart and t he front heart IIlI.IUlI. Malfunction ing of the solar plexus chakra may cause the heurt chakra and the physical heart to also malfunction. '" nL heart chakra is closely connected to the front solar pie-
(00
THE ANCIENT SCIENCf; AND ART OF PRANI C HEALING
101
11'1tMf.;l>IATE PRANIC HEALING
crown chakra forehead chakra ajna chak ra
throat chakra
~
front heart chakra
@@
front solar plexus chak ra front sp leen chakra
@
\*1
back heart chakra
' @ \
I
back solar plexus chakra
@ I @
back spleen chakra meng mein chakra
navel chakra sex chak ra
X Fig. 4-9
~
(a) The Eleven Major Chakras (energy centers]
xus chakm by several big bioplasmic channels and it is also energized by the front solar plexus chakra to a certain degree. Pati ent s with heart problems usually have malfunctioning BOlar plexu s chakra ,
There is also a back heart chakra which is located at the bac k of th e heart. It primarily controls and energizes the lungs and t o a lesser degree th e heart and the thymus gland . Malfunctioning o f th e back heart chakra manifests as lung problems. Energizing of t he heart is don e through th e back heart chak ra , Th e whole body could also be energized through th e back heart chakra. Energizing the front heart chakra has th e effect of immediate ly energizing th e physical heart. Th e main problem is that th e
@
basic chakra
t Fig. 4-9
(b)
I energy or prana tends to localiz e or does not spread easily ,ther parts of the body which may result in seriou s heart pranic "",.t/on. That is why it is not advisable to energiz e intensely " prolonged period of time th e front heart chakra. Experienced nle: healers prefer to energiz e through the back heart chakra hlcn does not have localized effect on the physical heart. Excess 'Ill can easily flow to the lungs and other parts of the body. H. Solar Plexu s Chak ra. The front solar plexus chakra is tt>
102
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC H'lALING INTt:IlMEDl AT E PRANIC IIEALING
103
• Subtle energies from the lower chakras and from the higher chakras pass through it. The whole body can be energized through the solar -plexus chakra. On rare occasions, overenergizing this chakra may result in difficulty in breathing. Excess prana should be removed immediately. The solar plexus chakra also controls the heating and cooling system of the body. Malfunctioning of this chakra may manifest as diabetes, ulcer, hepatitis, heart ail. ments and other illnesses related to the organs mentioned. The back solar plexus chakra is located opposite the front solar plexus chakra . The back solar plexus chakra looks like and has the same function as the front solar plexus chakra. It is slightly small er than the front solar plexus chakra.
7. Sp leen Chahra, The front spleen chakra is located on th e left part of the abdomen between the front solar plexus chakra and the navel chakra. It is located at the middle part of the left bottom rib . It is the major entry point for air prana or air vitality globule; therefore, it plays a vital part in man's general well. being. It energizes the other major chakras and the entire body by distributing the digested prana to them. The back spleen chakra is located at the back of the front spleen chakra, The front an d back spleen chakras have similar functions. ' It is not advisable to energize the spleen chakra of infants and children because they may faint due to pranic congestion. Should this happen just apply general sweeping; It is also no t advisable to energize the spleen chakra of patients with hyper. tension or has had a history of hypertension because this may increase their blood pressure. However, this chakra is used t o treat patients who are very weak or very depleted. It is important that the spleen chakra should be treated by experienced or advanced pranic healers only. , 8. Navel Chakra. This chakra is located on the navel. It controls and energizes the small intestine, lower large intestine, adrenal glands, and appendix. It affects the general vitality of a person. Malfunctioning of the navel chakra manifests as constipation, appendicitis, difficulty in giving birth, low vitality, and other diseases related to the intestines.
The word ki is used quite loosely to mean subtle energies. 1<1 is sometimes used to mean air prana, ground prana, red prana, nd other types of prana, It is also used to mean a type of "synIhetic ki" produced by the navel chakra, This "synthetic ki" is quite different from prana or vital energy. It affects one's ability 10 draw in, distribute, and assimilate prana. During bad weather iond it ions, the quantity of air prana is quite scarce. Persons with loollCr ~synthetic ki" have greater difficulty drawing in air prana; ~lIcrofore, t hey tend to feel rather tired or feel low than an average Iwr.on.
9.
Meng Mein Chakro. This chakra is located at the back navel. It serves as a "pumping station" in the spine that is ponsible for the upward flow of subtle pranic energies coming III the basic chakra. It controls and energizes the kidneys, the lrunnl glands and the blood pressure.
or Ihe
Malfunctioning of this chakra manifests as kidney problems, w vitality, high blood pressure and back problems. The meng mein chakra of infants, children, pregnant women J very old people should not be energized because of the tous adverse effects that will be produced. Please read the r healing technique for more explanation. This chakra uld be treated only by experienced or advanced pranic healers.
10 . Sex Chakra. This chakra is located on the pubic area. ntrols and energizes the sexual organs and the bladder. I[unctioning of this chakra manifests as sex related problems. rjnn chakra, throat chakra and basic chakra have strong in. 1)1"0" on the sex chakra, Malfunctioning of any of these chakras ...·.ult in malfunctioning of the sex chakra. I . Basic Chakra. This chakra is located on the base of the . It controls and energizes the whole visible physical body . iiPlIGtlllly the bones, blood, muscles, tissues of the body and of [nu-rnal organs, adrenal glands, and sex organs. It affects lJUdy heat, the general vitality, and the growth of infants hl ldren, Malfunctioning of this chakra manifests as cancer, ncer, leukemia, allergy, growth problem, and low vitality.
LOCATION
CHAKRA 1. Crown ChakIl._ ...
-'---
2. Forehead Chakn
Crown of the head
FU NCT IO NS "'-'; 0 CORRESPONOL-';G ORG ANS Brain and pineal gland .
Diseases related to the pineal and the bra in (physical or psychological illnesses). gland
Center of the forehead
Nervous system a nd pineal gland.
Loss o r memory , para lysis an d epilepsy.
Between the eyebrows
Pituitary gland and endocrine glands. Controls the other majo r
Cancer, allergy, a sthma, and diseases retated to the endocri ne glands and the eye s.
cbakras. 4. Throat Ch.akra
DISUSES
Center of the throa t
Throat, thyroid and pa rathyroid glands.
Throat-rt'lated illnesses like goiter , sore throat , loss of volce, asthma , etc.
-... o
5. Heart Chakn: a)
Front l\.eart
Center orthe chest
Heart, thymu s gland, and the circulatory system.
Hea rt and circulatory ailments.
bj
Back Heart
Back of the heart
Lungs, and to a certain degree the heart.
Lung ailment s.
6. Solar Plexus Chakn :
Acts es an energy clearing bouse cente r. It also controls the heat. ing and cooling system or the body .
oj
Front Solar Plexu s ,
Sola r plexu s area or · t be hollow area between the ribs.
Pancreas, llrer, diaphragm, large Inte stine , appen dtx, stomach , sma ll intestine and to a certain
degree oth er internal organs and et her plrts o r the body .
Diabeotes, ulcer, hep,lt itis, heart ~
0)
Front Spleen
b)
Back SpleeQ
ma-
a.ad ocJ:Irr
r
Left part of the abdomen between the front solar plexus chakra and the navel chakra. It is located at th e middle part of the len bottom rib .
Major entry po int fe r air prana or air vitality globule . Energizes . the other major chakras and the ent ire body.
Back of th e fron t spleen
It has similar (unctions with the
chasra.
front spleen cbakra..
8. "!!-relChakn
Savel
SmaU and large intest ines.
Constipation, difficulty in giving birth , append icitis, low vitality and ot her d iseases related to the inte st ines.
9. Meng Mein Chatra
Bact of the navel
Kid neys, adrenal glands, a nd energiZes to a ce rtain degree other internal o rgans . Controls blood pressure.
Kidney
10. Sex Chatra
Pubic area
Sexual organs, bladder and legs. or phys ical
Sex-related problems and bladder ailments.
Adrenal glands and sex organs. It energizes the wbcte physical body - bones, muscles, blood, and the internal organs. Affects general vitality. body beat, and the growt h of infants and child. ren o Cente r o f self.survival or
Cancer, leukemia, low vitality , allergy, asthma, sexual ailment , arthritis, growt h problem and psycholcglcal d isorders.
It is the lower creati ve center. 11 . Basic Ch!Jt18
Base of the spine
self-preservation.
Low vitali ty and weak body .
problem s. low vit ality , high blood pressure and back problems .
...o
'"
106
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE ANIl ART OF PRANIC II EALINll
107
INTERMEDIATE PRANIC HEALIN G
TREATMENT FOR SIMPLE AND SERIOUS CASES
1. Increasing the Body's Defense System by Increasing th e Vital Energy Level Many ailm ents are due to bact erial and viral infect ions. By increasing the pranic or vital energy level of the body , its defenso syste m is strengthened. ' a.
Apply general sweeping .
b . Clean and energize th e sole minor chakras and hand min or chakras. This is to partially activat e the sole and ha nd chak ras so that they will absorb more prana; thereby, increasing t he vital energy level of the body. c. Clean and energize th e front solar plexu s cha kra, This is to energize th e whole body , especially, the internal organs. d . Clean and energize th e navel chakra. This has two major effects: first, energizing and pa rtially activating th e navel chakra would cause the spleen chakra t o be partially a ctivated and energized so that' it will absorb more prana; thereby, increasing th e vita l en ergy level of th e body . Second, the navel chakra is partially activated ; thereby, producing more "synthet ic ki" which increases the ability of the ether ic body to ab sorb more prana. By increasing the vital energy of th e body, the body's resista nce or defense system is str engthened . This t echnique is used to ra pidly bring down fever as taught in Cha pter 3.
2.
Measles, German Measles, and Chicke n Pox a . Apply gene ral sweepin g.
b. Apply localized sweeping o n the face, the t hr oat , a nd th e front and back trunk. Special emphasis should be given to th e abd o mina l area.
sole chakras
•
hand chahras Fig, 4·10 (aj
c. To increase th e body 's defense system, clea n and nergiz e the sole minor chak ras, t he hand chakras, t he front solar plexus chakra, and the navel cha kra . d . Repeat the treatment on ce or twice a da y. General sweeping, and localized sweepin g can be applied several times a (tny.
3.
Mumps, and Ton silitis a.
Apply general sweeping.
b . Apply localized sweepin g on the throat and on t he ntlre neck area. Emphasis sho u ld be placed on the sides of the nl·c 'k. c. Energize t he throat chakra. d. Energize th e jaw min or chakras which are located I U", lowermost back part of the ears. By energizing t he jaw m [llor chakras, the ent ire mouth will be ene rgized including the , oLill glands, and the t on sils. Sin ce the affected parts will conume prana at a very fast rate, the thro at chakra a nd the ja w nor chakm should be cleans ed and energized tw ice a day.
108
T il E ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC IIEA LING
INT.:RMEDlATE PRANIC HEALING
109
jaw minor chah ra throat chahra
..'
.I~,l'~'~l';'
~,~. u p, '(/~i\'£\:IJ
f ront solar plex us chakra
Fig. 4-11 Pran ic Treatm ent fo r Mumps and To nsilit is
"
e:iH';fil:" ,I ' " j,i
navel chak ra
i.\' ~'.~:li/ I
-,
~
Fig. 4-10 (b ) Increasing the Body's Defense System by Increasing the Vital Energy Level e . To increase the body's defense system; clean and energize the sole minor chakras, t he hand chakras, the navel chakra, and the front solar plexus chakra.
4.
•
Fainting
a. Energize intensely the navel chakra until the patient recovers consciousness. This increases the pranic energy level of the whole body including the head area. This approach is slower but safer. b . Another approach would be to energize the back of the head. This approach is faster but there is the possibility of
prunic congestion of the head due to overenergizing. This manirests as headache. c. If the loss of co nscio usness is due to sudden emot ional shock; clean and ene rgize the front solar plexus chakra II l1d th e navel chakra. d. If head concussion is involved, clean and energize part. Then energize the navel chakra, the sole mino r rhnkras, and the ha nd min or chakras.
lh~ affected
6.
Nearsightedness, Farsightedness and Astigmatism
Th ere are min or chakras o n each eye and on each temple. 'I'hu ujna chakra , eye cha kras and the temple chakras are usually lepleted (pran ic d epl etion). The thickn ess of these chakras usual ly UIIKCS from t wo inches or less. In fewer or rare cases. yo u will ncounter eye a ilme nts caused by pranic congestion . a. Scan t he eyes. the ajna chakra and the temple hro kras with one or two of your fingers . If t he eye chakras are VQry d epleted and have an inn er aura of o ne inch or less, energize llahtly the eyes th rou gh the ajna chakra by visualizing prana IIIK to the ajn a chakra then to t he eyes before cleansing. This 10 mak e lo calized cleansing or sweeping easier.
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC IU;ALl NI1
110
b. Apply localized sweeping or cleansing on the entire head, aina chakra, eye chakras and temple chakras, If localized sweeping is done properly, the inner auras of the eye chakras would increase slightly. c. Apply alternately energizing and lo calized sweeping on the ajna chakra, the eye chakras and the temple chakras until the inner auras of these chakras normalize in size and in den sity . The eyes should not be energized directly but should be energized through the 'ajna chakra. At times, you will feel that the inner aura of a treated part has increased to its normal size but is not sufficiently dense compared to other healthy parts. You should continue cleansing and energizing until the inner auras of the eyes, the temples and the ajna chakra are normalized. d. It is quite likely that your patient will feel a slight immediate temporary improvement which is a good sign. The treatment should be repeated twice a week. Preferably, the patient should stop wearing eyeglasses to facilitate the healing process. Patients who suffer headache when they do not wear eyeglasses should gradually reduce the amount of time in wearing it . Complete healing may take about three to four months.
6.
Cross-eyes and Walleyes
Apply the same treatment as the preceding case .
7.
Glaucoma
The ajna chakra, eye chakras and the temple chnkras are pranically depleted. If it is due to habitual stress or tension, the patient is likely to have malfunctioning front heart chakra and solar plexus chakra. ' During severe glaucomic attacks, the patient may experience intense pain on the head and on the eyes accompanied by general weakening. He may also experience blindness for a shorter or longer period of time . a. Scan the 'ajna chakra, eye chakras, temple chakras, heart chakras and solar plexus chakras.
INTERMEDIATE PRANIC HEALING
111
b . To relieve the patient immediately of the pain or di scomfort in t he eyes, apply localized sweeping on the ajna chukra, the eye chakras and the temple chakras. Energize the eyes Ihrou gh th e ajna chakra until their conditions normalize. If done properly , t he patient will experience a substantial degree of ,,'lI ef. For patients who are recently blind due to glaucoma, eye.I~ht will be partially restored; for patients who have been blind Cor quite sometime, restoring the eyesight may still be possible hot woul d require longer treatment. The eyeballs may soften a llttl e b it. c. If the patient is experiencing a headache, scan the hund area, apply localized sweeping and energizing alternately to emove the headache. d . If the patient is experiencing a general weakening or the body, apply general sweeping ' several times. Apply locallIed sweeping and energizing ' on the front solar plexus cham. '['hese would strengthen the patient and also make the relief on his yo. last longer. The malfunctioning of the solar plexus chakra luo to emotional stress is a major contributing factor to this ailIl l. e. If the patient has a heart ailment, then the heart hou ld also be treated . f. Apply the treatment thrice a week. This should be outlnued for several months or for as long as it is required. If h ~ cause is of emotional origin, then hypnotherapy can be applied " th e patient or he can be taught how to relax and meditate In order to regulate his emotions properly.
For a patient experiencing severe glaucomic attack, the treatt may be repeated after one or two hours if he is still expe,\(;llIg discomfort. Instruct the patient to consult an eye specialI II rlor t he treatment. iI .
Heart Ailments
I lr-nrt ailments may manifest as pranic depletion or congesr hoth simultaneously on the heart cham. Although there
112
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC II EALl N(:
,i:""""
fron t heart chakra
f~ '" >.:'
~': . ': .'(J ,t:/
.
;1'<'-.::-. \f;, U
,9
"c!,~ ~,~~;,'
113
INT ERMEIJIATE PRANIC HEALING
,(~~ .':..
hack hear t chahra
fron t solar p lex us chak ra
.' ~
"
(
h Fig. 4-12 (a) Pranic Treatment for Heart Ailment are many types of heart ailments like heart enlargement, ma lfunctioning of the pacemaker, partial failu re of the heart muscles, 'e tc . . . ; the t reatment is basically the same which is cleansing 'and energizing of t he heart chakra and t he solar plexus chakra. a. Scan the heart thoroughly. Look for the small "tro ubled spots. Apply lo calized sweeping thoroughly on the ront .heart chnkra and on the small t roubl ed spots with yo ur ~ingers . Visualize your fingers going inside t he sma ll troubled ~potB removing the diseased bioplasmic matter. b. The heart should be energized through t he back hea rt chakra and not through the front heart chakra. Visualize
Fig. 4-12 (b) Lila physical heart and the front heart chakra becoming bright
no clean . Get feed back from the patient to determine which spot
r "pots are still painful or uncomfortable. Rescan and apply locnllzed sweeping and energize further. If done properly and I,h,;roughly , the patient will experience immediate partial relief. unsta ntial relief may also be experienced immediately or after voml hours or several days. In pranic depletion of the heart, 110 emp hasis should be on energizing, but thorough cleansing is 1. 11 very important . c. Apply localized sweeping and energizing on the III and back solar plexus chakras.
114
THE ANCIENT SCIt;NCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEAL ING
d . If there is severe pranic congestion on the front heart chakra and the front solar plexu s chakra, th en apply localized sweeping thoroughly. It may take about five to ten min utes to thoroughly remove the congested di seased bioplasmic ma tte r. Usually, th e patient will be relieved immediately after the localized sweeping. Energize the heart through th e back heart chakra and apply more localized sweeping. Energize the solar plexus chakra and apply more localized sweeping.
throat chahra
e. If the patient is quite weak, genera l sweeping sho uld be applied first befor e other treatment in order to strength. en th e hea lth rays and to seal off ho les in the outer aura. T his will definitely mak e healing easier . A treatment may last for a few minutes to about half an hour in most cases. Tr eatment should be applied thrice a week. Fo r crit ically ill patients, pranic treatment may be applied twice or thrice a day for th e next few days. There are no fixed guidelines. You will have to use your own discretion. It may take about several weeks to about two months to heal and norma lize the cond it ion. The recovery period varies depend . ing upon the seriousness of th e heart ailment, the cooperation of the patient, the frequency of pranic treatment and other releva nt factors. 9.
116
m RMEJJlATE PRANIC IIEAUNG
6';~::;~:'i l:~:~: ;::.:.]
front solar plexus chakra
{'·'~?;:" :l
.'
"::::" .'. :,~'
"
navel chahra
/
~
Lung Ailments ,..Ig. 4.13 (a) Pranic Treatm ent fo r Lung Ailment
Th ere ar e many types of lung ailments (pneumonia, tuberculosis, etc...) but the treatment is more or less the same. a. Clean the entire body by applying general sweeping several times. Apply localized sweeping on the lungs (front, sides, and back) and on the back heart chakra. The lungs should be cleansed from all sid es. If the front heart chakra is also affected , t hen' it should also be clean sed. b . En ergize the back heart chak ra a nd visualize prana going into all parts of the lungs. It is very important that the lun gs and the back heart chakra should be highly energized. If
honrt is affected, visualize . prana going into the heart and tront hea rt chakra. If the throat is affected , then it should 11 0 treated . If the instructions are followed thoroughly , the lont will be relieved immediately and the tightness on the t nn-a will be greatly reduced. c. Some patients with lung ailments are quite debili. '1'0 strengthen and increase the energy level of the body; I UIIO energize the front solar plexus chakra, the navel chakra, 111",,1 chakras and the sole minor chakras.
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
116
.
"
~.
~;)
117
INT ERMEDIATE PRANIC HEALING
back heart chakra
hand chakras
sole chakras Fig. 4·13 (c)
b . Patients suffering from asthma or asthmatic attack hnve depleted throat chakra and secondary throat minor chakra. The secondary throat minor chakra is located on the lower soft portion of the throat. Apply localized sweeping and energizing :>n the throat chakra and on the secondary throat minor chakra, I'he emphasis is on energizing.
\
c. Clean and energize the back heart chakra and the to strengthen the lungs. If the solar plexus chakra is r"cted, clean and energize it. By treating the throat chakra, ~hn back heart chakra and the solar plexus chakra, the patient III be immediately relieved.
III nils. This is
Fig. 4·13 (b)
d. Apply pranic treatments twice a week until t he patient fully recovers. For patients suffering from severe lung infection and are in critical condition, treatment should be given thrice a day for the next few days. 10.
Asthma
• The treatment is divided into two parts. The first part is to relieve the asthmatic patient. The second part is to gradual ly heal the ailment. a. The outer, health and inner auras of the patient are sometimes quite grey. It is advisable to apply general sweeping several times.
d. An asthmatic patient has malfunctioning ajna chakra basic chakra, Clean and energize the ajna chakra and the bask Illlkm . To improve the quality of the blood produced, the bones the body have to be cleansed and energized. Clean and ener1M th e spinal column, and the bones in the arms and in the legs. p ly localized sweeping and simultaneously energize the spinal. 1I(1lnmn. Apply localized sweeping while visualizing your hand Ding into the bones of the arms and legs. Energize the bones in arms through the armpit minor chakras and the hand chakras. ralize the pranic energy going into the shoulder blades and the nUR In the arms. Energize the bones in the legs through the hip 'i r chakras and the sole chakras. Visualize the pranic energy lIlg into t he bones in the hips and in the legs. These will substan.lIy reduce the frequency of the asthmatic attacks and will :l llully cure the asthmatic patient. I IfJ
118
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE ANll ART OF PRANIC IIEALlNll
119
INn:RMEDlATE PRANIC HEALING
throat chakra secondary throat chahra
r.(~·o/)::·;i' ~( v ~. :I:~;~~,t.
i
,'P.~,;, . ~,
./
ft' u
front solar plexus ch ah ra
bacl, heart chahra
"''4,:,\;,.-
" Fig. 4-14 (a) Treatm ent for Asthma
e. Apply the entire treatment twice a week until th e patient is cured. 11. Liver Ailments
Patients with liver ailments like jaundice, hepatitis and cirrhosis of the liver are quite depleted and have greyish inner, health and outer auras. The liver, when seen clairvoyantly, is grey . If it is inflamed, then it is seen as muddy red. The liver may be depleted and congested simultaneously. For example, the left part may be congested while the right part is depleted. The solar plexus chakra is quite depleted (pranic depletion). Some patients with liver ailments have bloated abdomen. a.
Apply general sweeping several times.
b. Apply localized sweeping and energizing on the solar plexus chakra and on the liver. On an area where there is pranic congestion, then localized sweeping should be emphasized. On an area where there is pranic depletion, then energizing should be emphasized .
Fig. 4·14 (b)
c. To increase the energy level of the body and to streng1,1,,'1\ its defense system, clean and energize the sole minor cbakras, (II" hand chakras, and the navel chakra. d. If the meng mein chakra and the kidneys are affected, 1\ and energize them . Do not energize t.he basic chakra because hu patient may experience pranic congestion on the entire body r lIi~h blood pressure (see Chapter 7 for further explanation). Apply pranic treatment twice a week until healing • cumplete .
\20
THE ANCIENT SCIE NO: ANI> ART OF PRANI C HEALl NIl
c. r ililkm. ' ';''~·'::;:·;.\I~.:,
~,\;,,:;~ \
,-; tJ ;\ \::: ,:,,,.':)'
chahrn
T
...i~;:;.'::;: ~-:~;\
sex valera
meng nwtu
/
\.
121
fNT EIIMf:IlI A1'E I'IIA NIC IIEALING
If the bladder is affected, clean and energize t he sex
d . Apply pranic treatment t hrice a week until healing is o mplete. If t he infection is acute, apply pranic treatment several lil lles a d ay . For infan ts, children, pregnant wo j.ien, and very old patients, 10 not ene rgize the meng mein chakra. Just energize the kid ne ys lrcc tly without passing t hrough the meng mein chakra, Overnurglzing the meng me in chakra or energizing the basic and me ng ieln chakras of infants, children and very old people may cause 'JvIlre high blood pressure.
A Fig. 4-15 Treatment for Kidney and Bladder lnfections (read instructions thoroughly befor e applying) 12 . Gastric and Duodenal Ulcers a. Scan the front solar plexus chakra and t he upper abdo minal area.
(E~;';:
;;~:)~
,
b. Clean and energize t he front solar plexus chakra and t he affected area.
l'hfl/.'/"a
Apply pranic treatment twice or t hrice a we ek un til c. healing is complete .
b . if the kidneys are infected, clean the basic chakra, the meng mein chakra, and the kidneys. Then en ergize the kidneys directly without passing through the meng mein chakra.
;;~;"';:o/\
/
:':~~":'~~~..:\""~'
... '
..
.'
A
I~.
Apply general sweeping several times.
'.f~r:
-t'
Fig. 4- I 6 Treatment for Sex ual Ailm ents
13 . Kidn ey and Bladder ln fections a.
,
basic cnanra
Sexual Ailments
II . T here are many types of sexual ailments like impotence, \.IIiLy and prostate infection. To treat these types of cases, fir.t t he sex chakra, the navel chakra and the surrounding
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART or PRANIC HEALI NG
122
b. Clean and energize t he sex chakra, the navel ch akrn and t he affected surrounding area. T here is a minor chakra in each of the ovaries and testes and if t hey are affected, clean and energize t he m . c. Special attention should also be given to the basic chakra , the solar plexus chakra, t he t hroat chakra and the ajna cha kra, Malfunctioning o f any of t hese chakras w ill also cause t he sex chakra to ma lfunction. If an y of t hese chakras is malfunct ion ing, then localized sweeping and energizing should be applied . d . Repea t t he t reatment tw ice a week un t il healing is co mp lete. 15 . Ailments of the Endocrine Glands
a.
Scan t he majo r chakras.
b . Apply localized sweeping and energizmg on the malfunctio ning chakras. The ajna chakra should be treated . c. Repeat the treatment twice a wee k until heali ng is corn plete. Inst ru ct the patient to consult a specialist. 16 . Broken Bones and Broken Fingers
a. Sca n the affected part and the affected minor chakras, T here are mino r chakras on the armp its, elbows, ha nds, fing ers, hips, kn ees, soles and toes. b . Apply localized sweeping and energizing on the injured area. Clean and energize the affected and/or the nearest mino r chakras. Th e emphasis should be on energizing. c. The nipple chakras affect the arms. T hey are located o n each n ippl e . Sca n t he nipple chakra. If it is affected, then energize the nipple chakra. Prana can be easily directed to the a ffect ed area in the arm through t he nipple chakra.
' Im MEDIAT E PRAN IC HEALI NG
123
d . The healing process can be accelerat ed by increasing pranic energy level of t he body. En ergize the ba sic' chakra , navel chakra, the solar plexus cha kra , the hand chakras and "ole chakras. c. You may repeat Procedureslb'und c severaltimes ja day quicken the heali ng process.
17. Small Busts Women with sma ller busts may t ry asking a pranic healer to lvnte and energize their bu st s if they are that co nce rned about rn, Although t he author has not personally tried this t echnique, lu.. observed t hat women with bigger bu st s tend to have stronger tenser nipple chakras wh ile women with smaller busts t end buvc weak er nipple chakras. I ll. Thin ning flair 1\ person may have very healthy crown chakra and foreh ead ' ru but sti ll have falling and thinning of ha ir. This is because minor -chakras o n t he scalp area are d epl eted . When scanning hcud area, t he initial laye r of t he inn er aura on the head area uite normal but furt her scanni ng would sho w that the innerI layer is q uite depleted . Clairvo ya ntly, this is see n as light o r light yellow ish grey o n t he scalp area . Apply localized pillg a nd energizing o n the entire scalp . Pranic treatment uld be ap plied two to t hree t imes a week. Other co mplen~Pry fo rms of treatments sho uld a lso be given.
1!l. Hemo rrhoid
l h-morrhoid ma nifests as pranic co ngest io n on the ' anus r chakra. The solar p lexus chakra and the na vel chakra are pnrtia lly affected . T he anus min o r chak ra is located between Ion,j., chakra and the anus. It is located slightl y abo ve the an us. yantly, it is seen as mudd y red . Apply lo calized sweeping nergiz ing on t he anus. T he emphas is is o n sweeping. Clean
124
'mE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND AliT OF PRANIC HEALINI:
and energize the front solar plexus chakra and navel chakru, Visualize the prana cleansing and energizing the large intest ine. Visualize the prana coming out of the anus and cleansing tho anus minor chak ra , Treating the solar plexus chakra and the navel cha kra is very important since the large intestine and the anus are cont ro lled and energized by these two major chakras.
N'I' lm M ~; D IAT E
PRANIC HEALING
125
1( they are affected, cleanse and ene rgize t hem . It is likely that t ho,e will be noticeable improvement o n the fir st treatment. c.
Repeat the treatment t wice a week .
I'tINCIPLE OF LAG T IME The patient may also use co ld water to remove the disea sed bio plasmic matter from the affected part. He just simply will. o r intents that the cold water remove the diseased b ioplasmic matter away. The patient is also expected to maintain proper hy giene.
20. Chronic Appendicitis , , a. Cleanse and en ergize the front solar plexus chakra, the navel chakra and the appendix . Usually, the patient will be relieved immediately. b.
Repeat the treatment once every two days.
Th e principle of lag t ime means that th e rat e of healing of !lo bioplasmic body is muc h tast er than t he rat e o f healing o f t he . Ible physical bod y . Therefore, in so me cases the patien t may t expe rience an immediate relief o r cure because the visible hy sical body heals at a slo wer pace, o r lags behind compared the bioplasmic body. For exam ple, even though the heart a has been thoroughly cleansed , energized and looked quite ht , a patient may claim that he has expe rienced only very ht immediate relief after the pranic treatment. He may, how" experience substantial relief and improvem ent after a few urs or after a day or two . This d elay or lag time in relief or cure pecially common in more severe case s. The degree of delay lag time will d ep end on whether there is organic damage or not, degree of damage, the age and the condition of the patient's y,
21. Sinusitis
a. Cleanse and en ergize the forehead chakra, the ajna chakraund the root o f the nose. Th e emphasis should be on t he ajna chakra. b . Cleanse and energize the right and left nostril minor chakras. These minor chakras are located at the low er side o f th e nostrils. , c.
Repeat the treatmen t twi ce a week.
,
22. Loss of Sme ll a.
Use t he treatment for sinusitis.
b.
Check the ear chakras and the back head minor cha kra,
DOES IT
TA KE TO COMPLETELY CUR E A
This depends o n several fa ctors : the frequ en cy of treatment, ge and physical co nd it io n of the patient, the patient's d egree foceptivity, the presen ce of interfering or causal factors which the delay or prevent healing from manifesting, the degree linage, the nature of the ailme nt, the skill of the pranic lor, th e degree of co operation from the patient, and in som e , the use of other forms of healing or treatment to comple,t pranic healing. As stated earlier, the approach in healing uld be integrated or wholist ie. l'he rate of reli ef for severe and simple ailments may range " a few minutes to a few days. In general, the time it takes to let ely cu re a simple ailment using pranic healing alone ranges
126
THt!; ANCl~N1' SCI I:!; N C .I!: AN U AU.T
ur
l"11.J\l'U,", ttt.J\LINl.I
from a few minutes to a few da ys; for chro n ic or more severe ailments, it may rang e from a few days to a few month s. In som e cases, the cure is even dramatic or "mirac ulo us". But not all a ilment s and not all patients ca n be cured.
INn :IlMEDlATE PIlANIC il EALING
I.. -d, it may cause the di seased bioplasmi c matter to be drawn huck . And if the pat ient t ries to recall or keeps recalling how his 1I111O(>ot feels like, most likely the di seased bioplasmic matter may he attracted aga in to his bioplasmic hody. 6.
PREGNANT WOMEN Pregnant women sho uld be energized slowly and gently. Overenergizing or intense and prolonged energ izing should be avoi ded especially on the navel chakra, the sex ch akra, the bas ic chakra and the meng mein chakra, O verene rgizing or intense energizing on any of these four chakras may have drastic negative effects on the unborn child.
127
T he patient is suffering fro m a severe type of disease
wh [ch co nsu mes pra na at a very fast rate and that the prana
projected was not su fCcie nt. T he refo re , the pat ient should be rented more frequently .
n l'A SONS WHY SOME PATIENTS AR E NOT HEALED 1. All o f the preceding factors men tioned (that may contrito the immedi at e recurren ce of pain or symptoms after nn ic t reatment) , may also be the co nt ribut ing factors why ti cnts do not get well .
1111t.e
IMMEDIATE RECURRENCE OF PA IN OR SYMPTOM S Seveml factors may contribute to t he immediate recurrence of the symptoms after pranic treatment .
1. Localized sweeping was not applied and ene rgizing was not done sufficiently . Since the part to be treated wa s not cleansed , fresh prana has difficulty penetrating fully into the part that is being treated. It is like trying to put fr esh water on a sponge filled with dirty water. This can be done by using a lot of prana and projecting them with a stronger fo rce . However, there is t he risk of radical reaction that will cause .rnore temporary disco rnfort to the patient. It would be a lot easier if t he dirty wat er is removed first from the sponge before pouring in fresh wat er. 2. General sweeping was not applied on the pat ient wit h holes in the outer aura; therefore, prana co nt inues to leak out causing aga in pranic depletion on the treated part. 3. The projected prana was not stabilized, causing it to simply escape or leak out from the body . 4. Bioplasmic waste disposal unit was not used, and as a result, the diseased bioplasmic matter is still co nnect ed t o the patient's bioplasmic body. If the patient is not sufficiently ener-
2. The patient may no t be receiving the right pranic eat me nt due to improper scanning. For instance, difficulty mo ving t he arm could be caused by pranic congesti o n on 'the rt chakra and t he solar plexus chakra o r by pranic congestion I the men g me in chakra, So just treating the arm will give temrary relief but not permanent result. 3. In suff icien t energizing and insufficient frequency of nic treatment. This is like giving medication of insufficient 'lle and at insu fficient intervals. 4. Certain ailme nts require other fonns of treatment. r instan ce, ailm ent s d ue to malnourishment and improper t. 6. T he pa t ient is simply too old and too weak or too kly to be healed . Fo r certain unex plained factors, some aged t.ionts just do not retai n a large portion of the projected prana. hI. docs not mean, how ever, that very old or very sickly patients iu td be igno red . On the co nt rary, they should be given proper " and t reatment.
128
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
6. The disease is of karmic ongm and that the appro priate time for complete healing ha s not yet arrived. Or the patient may not have yet learned the lesson that he is supposed to learn . (Books written on Edgar Cayce and his works provide a lot of information ab out karma in relation to d iseases.) PERSONAL HEALTH PROBLEMS THAT A HEALER MA Y ENCOUNT ER
1. Some healers may experience pain in the finger joints , .or in the hands or in the arms, This is due to the absorpt ion or d iseased bioplasmic matter or diseased etheric matter from th o patients. This could b e avoided by immediately washing the hand. and the arms after gen eral and localized sweeping and also after ene rgizing. In t he long run, not washing th e hand s.and the arm s immediately will result in regular partial absorption of diseased bioplasmic matter which may result in arthritis of the fingers. T he healer may use salt and water to wash h!s hands and arm •. 2. Some healers may experience the symptoms or t ho ailments of their patients. This is due to full absorption of t he di .. eased bioplasmic matter into the system of the healer. This could be caused by two factors : firstly, by not washing the hands and arms after healing; and secondly , by not using the waste disposal unit when treating patients. Some of the diseased bioplasmic matter may have been absorbed by the legs from th e surrounding area . It is advisable to take a shower after treating a lot of pat ient. in one session to clean the entire body. The healer should wasl, his ent ire body with salt or with salty water. This pro cess ha« cleansing effect on the ent ire body and the healer will feel hi. body becom ing lighter. 3. Some heal ers may become sick with infectious d iseasea. Tnis can be avoided by not healing when the healer is feeling low and also after an emot ional outburst or intense anger or irritation. These types of negative emotions cause temporary pranic depletion, drooping of the health ray s and also punctures on th outer aura . All of these can cause the healer to be very susceptible to infectious diseases. It is also advisable to wash the hands
INTKItMlmlATE PRANIC HEALING
129
III I th e arms with germicidal soap. This is not only t o pro tect III. healer but also the next patient.
4. The healer may become too tired or d epleted a fter "olin g a patient or several patients. This could be caused by 'v"ral factors:
The healer energizes intensely and at a very fast rat e. a. amount of prana proj ected is much more than the amount. prnna drawn in or the rate of projecting prana is much faster n th e rate of drawing in prana, This results in general pranic pletion, This can be avoided by being patient and by, not being R hurry. Heal your patients slowly and gradually. Some heal ers have
very
high energy level. Their inner aura
rhout two feet or more in thickness and very den se. They can orh or draw in tremendous amount of prana at a very fast
10. But these are except io nal cases, not the general rule. Some lors are born with a very high energy level while others attain through disciplined esoteric training. A certain type of life· 10 may also result in a very high energy level in the long run. being a vegetarian most of the time, having a moderate sex , living a well -regulated emotional life, possessing a clear dent but decisive mind, and doing plenty of regular physical cise (especially tai chi and yogic exercise)"; all of these, in the run, will result in good health and very high energy level ,
Through clairvoyant investigation, it is observed that vegens usually have more refined bioplasmic body and have hter and denser inner aura. Although it is advantageous to .orne a vegetarian , it is not a necessity . b . After treating the patients, som e healers may cont inue nergizing" their patients sub consciously. This can be avoided visualizing the cord s between you and your patient as being I off after the treatment. c. The healer is closely surrounded by his patients and y lend to draw in prana from the healer sub consciously; ruby, causing the healer to become depleted . This can be ,,wJiL'
160
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC ImALl NG
3. Energize the affected chakras and parts to be treat ed. Cont inue energizing until the treated parts look quite bright and healthy or until you feel th e treated parts have enough prana. you just simply feel th ~ patient has enough prana or the treated part is already fuJI and is no longer absorbing prana. 4. Get up and open your ey es. Scan the patient to d eter. mine whether he has been properly treated. If not, repeat th•• ent ire process until the treated parts have substantiaJly improved. Wash your hands after th e treatment.
DISTANT I'RANIC HEALING (ABSENT HEALING)
18 dr awn from th e surroundings and projected directly to th e patient without passing through the body of the healer. You can " Iso co mbine Method NO.1 and Method No.2 . After you have become proficient, you can try healing old Illltients at a distance. Then you can gradually try new patients. fll,FERENCES AND SUGGESTED READINGS :
1.
The Th erapeutic Touch by Dolores Krieger, Ph .D., R.N. 1979. Prentice-Hall Inc., Englewood Cliffs, N.J. 07632 .
2.
Th e Scien ce of Psychic Healing by Yogi Ramacharaka. 1909. Th e Yogi Puhlication Society.
3.
The Psychic Healing Book by Amy Wallace and Bill Henkin. 1978. Wingbow Press/Berkeley.
~.
Magnetic Therapy by Abbot George Burke. 1980. Saint George Press, 3500 Coltrane Road, Oklahoma City, OK 73121. '
METHOD No . 2 1.
Let the patient sit in front of you and close your eyes.
2. Visualize a brilliant ball o f light on top of the pati ent. Visualize a stream of white light washing th e head area and grad. ually going down and cleansing the entire body. Gather th e diseased bioplasmic matter and dispose of th em properly.
161
3. Visualize th e greyish matter in . th e affected part as becoming less dense and lighter. Will it to COme out or see it as floating out.
5. 4. The diseased bioplasmic matter can be disposed o f by willing it to disintegrate immediately or by visualizing the greyish matter as gradually thinning out or just simply visualize a fire and throw the diseased bioplasmic matter into it.
Edgar Cayce - Encyclopedia of Healing by Reba Ann Karp. 1986. Warner Books, Inc., 666 Fifth Ave., New York, N. Y. 10103.
Ii .
5. Energize th e affected parts. This is done by visualizing a baJl of light (pranic ball) being formed and projecting it to th e affected part .
The Way of the Shaman - A Guide To Pouier and Healing by Michael Harner. 1980. Bantam Books, Inc .• 666 Fifth Ave., New York 10103.
7.
Th e Secret Science at Wor}, by Max Freedom Long. 1953. DeVorssand Co., P.O .Box 550, Marina del Rey, CA 90294.
8.
Gateway To Wisdom - Taoist and Buddhist Contem· platiue and Healing Yogas Adapted for Western Students of th e Way by John Blofeld. 1913. Shambhala Publicat io ns, Inc., 1123 Spruce St ., Boulder, Colorado 80302.
, 6. Open your eyes and rescan the patient. Give furth er treatment if required . The difference between Method No .1 and Method No .2 is that in Method No, I, prana is drawn in to th e body of the healer before projecting it to the patient. In Method No.2, prana
·' 16 2
Til E ANCIENT
SCmN C~;
AND ART OF PRAN1C IIEAI.IN(;
9.
The Secret of Chinese Meditation by Lu K'uan Yu. 1964. Samuel Weiser, Inc., 740 Broad way , New York , N.Y. 10003.
10.
A waken Healing Energy Throu gh th e Tao by Manlak Chiao 1983. Auro ra Press, 205 Third Ave. 2A, New York , N.Y ., 10003.
11 .
The Tao of Meditation - Way to Enlight enm ent hy Jou Tsung Hwa. 1983. Tai Chi Foundation, Jou Tsung Hwa, POB. 1904, Piscataway, N.J. 08854.
12.
Therapeutic Breathing Exercises, Ed. by K.H. Wu, Trans. by Lheng Ping. 1984 . Hai Feng Publishing Co ., Rm . 701 , Chung Shang Bldg., 7/Fl. , 9.10, Queen Vict oria St., HongKong.
13 .
Health, Youth and Beauty Through Colo r Breathing by Linda Clark and Yvonne Martine. 1976. Celestial Arts, 231 Adrain Road , Millbrae, California 94030 .
14.
Th e Principles of Light and Color -The Healing Power of Color by Edwin Babbit. 1878 .(Ed. by Faber Birren . 1967.) Citadel Press, 120 Enterprises Ave., Secaucus, New J ersey 07094.
15 .
The Seven Keys To Colour Healing by Ro land Hunt , A.M.I.C.A., Ms. D., Ps. D. 1971. Th e C.W. Da niel Co . Ltd ., 60 Muswell Road, London, N. 10.
16 .
Th e Art of True Healing by Israel Regardie. 19 37 . Helios Book Service Ltd., 8 Th e Square, Toddington, Nr. Cheltenham, Glos.
17.
. Initiation Into Herm etics by Franz Bardon, Trans. by A. Radspieler . 1956. Diet er Rugg erb erg, Wup pert al, Western Germany.
HAPTER SEVEN
Advanced Pranic Healing A professor visited a R osni (Zen master) to learn about Zen. TIle professor was more int erested in talking and trying to impress the Zen master than ill learning. Th e Roshi invited the pro fessor for a drink and pou red tea to the pro fessor's cup and continued po uring until it was ove rflow ing. The professor alarm ingly said, "the cup is full and cannot receive mo re! " The Ze ,i master calml y replied, "Yo u are full o f preconceived ideas and opinions. To learn, you must empty your cup !" The professor respectfully bowed to the Roshi and rem ained silent. - A Popular Zen Story
Miracles are "fantastic " events which utilize the hidden laws o f natu re that mo st people arc not aware of, Miracles do not break th e laws of nat ure, they are actu ally based on them! - C.K .S.
THIS CHAPTER is predominantly o n the instruction s given by Teac her Mei Ling to t he author. • II.G ., a nd others also provided useful information. Teacher Ling is on e o f th e .mentors of th e autho r in h is esoteric st ud .
-
165 164
Tm: ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC Ht:AU NlO
ies. Some of the concepts and techniques are " n ew" and are different from other books on color healing. Instructions on the art of instantaneous healing of fresh wounds are given in this chapter. Many of the advanced t echniques should be pract iced preferably by exper ienced pranic healers, and not by beginners. Advanced pranic healing uses pranic color healing and cha kral pranic healing to produce very rapid healing and to cure difficult ailments.
ADVANCED PRANIC HEALING
it is broken down and distributed to the other chakras. All these take place automatically or at a sub conscious level. White prana is co mposed of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and violet pranas, Of the six color pranas; the red ', blue, and green pranas are most frequently used in healing. • The properties of each of the six color pranas and their applications:
Air prana, solar prana and ground prana are made of wh ite or general prana. Air and ground pranas are called vitality ,globu les in esoteric parlance because when seen clairvoyantly or by a person with slightly more sensitive eyes, they appear as small sph eres or globules of light. Vitality globules come in different sizes. Some contain more units of white prana and some contain less. Ground vitality globules interpenetrate the ground and extend several inches away from it. They are denser or mo re closely-packed and usually bigger than air vitality globules. Som e of th e bigger air vitality globules can be easily seen just by staring at th e sky for a few minutes especially , just before sunset. You do not need to be a clairvoyant to be abl e to see air vitality globules. A lot of you will be able to see them in a few sessions. Also, with more practice you will be able to see ground vit ality globules just a few inches away from the ground . COLOR PRANAS
•
Vitality globules (conglomerations of units of white prana ) are absorbed by the chakras where they are digested and broken down to its components. When white prana is digested, it produces six types of color pranas corresponding to the colors of the rainbow. A substantial amount of air prana is ab sorbed dir ectly by the spleen cha kra ( front and back) . The air prana is broken down to different color pranas and distributed to the other chakras. Ground prana is absorbed through . the sole chakras. A portion of the ground prana is directed upward to the spin e and other chakras, while a large portion is directed to the perineum minor chakra, to the navel chakra, the n to the spleen chakra where
REDPRANA 1. Strengthening (vitalizing and vigorous) 2. 3. 4. 5.
Warm Distributive (improves circulation) Constructive - rapid tissue or cellular repair Sustains the visible physical body 6. Vitalizes the blood, tissues and skeletal system of
the body.
7. Stimulating and activating Applications: 1. Internal and external wounds 2. Broken bones 3 . Allergy , 4. Sluggish or weakened organs or parts 5. General tiredness or weakening 6. Paralysis 7. Reviving uI\Conscious patients 8. Reviving or prolonging the life of dying patients 9 . ' Measles ' ORANGEPRANA 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Expelling Eliminative Decongesting Cleansing Loosening - loosens diseased bioplasmic matter,
• 166
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING AIlVANCED I'RA NIC HEALING
6. Melting 7. Extracting or abstracting 8. Splitting, exploding and destructive Applications:
1. All ailments related to expelling or elimination of waste, germ s, toxins and diseased bioplasmic matter. 2. Kidney and bladder ailments 3. Constipation 4. Menstrual problems 5. Removing blood clot 6. Arthritis 7. Cyst 8. Cold, cough and lung problems Orange prana has a very potent effect, therefore, it should be avoided in treating delicate organs like the eyes, the brain, th e heart, and the liver. Regular and inten se energizing with orange prana On delicate organs may cause serious damage like detached retina or hemorrhage of the brain. Orange prana should not be used on patients suffering from appendicitis becau se it may accelerate the rupture of th e inflamed append ix. Orange prana is also used to facilitate the abstraction of consciousness of a dying patient . GREENPRANA
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Breaking down Digestive Decongesting Detoxifying Disinfecting Dissolving Loosening of diseased bioplasmic matter
Applicat ions: 1. Breaking down blood clot 2. Disinfectant
167
3. Cold 4. Fever 5. Used ·in localized clean sing for dec ongest ing and loosening stubborn d iseased biopla smic matter. Orange or green prana is usually used in decongesting and ch-ansing a disea sed part by loosenin g the d iseased bioplasmic mutt er. After being loosened , the diseased bioplasmic matter is removed by localized sweep ing and then th e affected part is energized . Th e loosening and expelling of th e d iseased bioplasmic mutter by orange or green prana would enable fresh prana to ent er th o affec~ed part, thereby, restoring health t o th e treated part. Green prana is milder and safer compared t o orange prana. Wh.'n intern al or gans are t o be energized with orange prana, as ." fety precaution, it is advisable to use green prana first before projecting or ange pran a. .
Light green prana should be lIsed first before energizing II II more potent pranas like orange, red and violet pranas as a ..ccautio nary measure to avo id possible harm or damage on th e patient. Energizing first with light green prana and then with light runge prana is very effect ive in decongesting, expe lling and cleans1 1l~ physically and bioplasmically th e part being tre ated . Please, note the sequence. Light green prana is used first before Iigbt nge prana and not orange prana first nor both simultaneo usly . When light orange-green prana is projected or when both orange '11111 and green prana are pr ojected simultaneously, the effects these pranas are multiplied several times; therefore, the effect de stru ct ive to a certain degree and is used in tr eating arthritic M. When th e darker shades of green and orange pranas are d, the effect is qu ite destructive hence they are used in treatcy st and tumour. For a more potent effect, dark orange"n prana is used. YELLOW PRANA
1. Coh esion or cem enting 2. Assimilating, multiplying and growth 3. Stimulating effect on the nerve ~. Initiating or starter
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
168
Applications:
1. 2. 3. 4.
Wounds Fractured bones Skin problems Cellular repairs
BLUEPRANA
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Strong disinfectant Inhibiting Localizing and contracting Soothing and mild anaesthetic Cooling 6. Pliability or flexibility Applications:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Ailments due to infection Removing of pain Inflammation Inhibit chakras, organs and motor action Rest and sleep inducing Stop bleeding Fever
An experiment was done by the author on a paralytic. Treatment was first given to the brain, then to the right arm . Light blue prana was directed to the affected right arm for several minutes. As a result, the patient has greater difficulty in raising his right arm. When light red prana was directed to the affected area, the patient was able to move his right arm with greater ease. The next day there was even greater. improvement. This shows that blue prana has inhibiting effect while red prana has strengthening and stimulating effects.
Violet prana has the properties of all the other five pra~a .• and is very potent. It is used on severe types of ailments. It is usually not used on mild ailments. Light violet or green-violet prana is used for rapid healing of partially damaged internal organs
ADVANCED PJlAN1C HEALING
169
like severe gastric ulcer. Light violet prana is used to treat severe Infection like syphilis and pneumonia. Dark violet prana is disrupting and exploding, and is used to treat cancer. Through clairvoyant observation, the indigo color is normally flat found in any of the chakras and in any part of the bioplasmic hody, that is why only six types of color pranas are described in this chapter. The effect of the color prana is qualified and enhanced by tho intention of the healer. For instance, blue prana can be used 1.0 inhibit a chakra or an organ by forming a strong intention to Inhibit when projecting it. To use color prana instead of white prana is just like aproaching a specialist instead of a general practitioner. Color prana I. more specialized and more potent than white prana. More viJnlllizat ion skills are needed in the use of color prana. The author ullily uses a safer technique which is to combine color prana of \I~hl"" shade with white prana. He usually visualizes the projected /III as dazzling white at the core with a tinge of color prana on periphery. For example, he would visualize the projected nil as brilliant or dazzling white at the core and with light red the periphery to strengthen an organ. The potency of the lvr prana is diluted, thereby, making it safer. White prana is Jill lutrtnonizing prana. It is harmonizing in the sense that it prov• other color pranas required in healing and redistributes S8 color pranas in the treated area to other parts of the body: mr-t.imes the author uses undiluted light color prana or darker lor prnna for more potent effects.
When in doubt as to what color prana to use, just use white The author usually uses white prana, especially, on infants, very young children and on old patients. On certain occasions I white prana is not sufficiently effective, then color prana I. For instance, allergy can be alleviated by using white or pranas, But there are certain types of allergy that can only lluved by using red prana while using white prana or other prunas will not produce any substantial effect on this severe ( allergy.
1111 .
17U
TIlE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
To students or practitioners of color healing, the properties or qualities of green, yellow and orange pranas may seem strange o r doubtful. This was also the initial reaction of the author b ut fu rth er study and experiments would show t hat these ar e co rrect. By experimenting o n color pranas and studying the pranas , conta ined in t he chakras and t he organs controlled and energized by th e corresponding chakras, it is possible to deduce and verify th e correctness of the properties or qualities of the different types of color prana as stated in this book.
ELEVEN MAJOR CHAKRAS The major chakras are about three to four inches in diameter . With more advanced yogis, th eir major chakras are about five to six inches in diameter and are bri ght er and more refined. Th e majo r chak ras do not only co nt rol and energize th e whole physical bod y but th ey also control and affect one's psychological and sp iritual conditions.
1. Basic Chahra. It has four petals and contains red and orange pranas. The red prana from the basic chakra is used for energizing and strengthe ning the entire visible physical body. T his chakra energizes and influences th e ent ire visible physical body muscles, bones, blood, adrenal gland s, sex organs, internal organs, genera l vitality, body heat - and the growth rate of infants and childre n. The quality of blood produced is influenced by the ba sic chakra , This cha kra is very important and will be used very o ften in advanced pranic healing. Malfunctioning o f this chakra may manifest as allergy, low vitality, ca ncer, sexu al a ilment, growth problem and also psychological disord ers. Th e basic chahra is th e center o f self-survival or self-preservatio n. Some, people who se ba sic chakras arc un deractiv e t end to be impractical, unrealisti c or in some severe cases, th ey t end to be completely out o f tou ch with reality. Person s with suicida l inclination t end to have weak and underact ive hasic chakras. 2. Sex Chahra. It has six petals and co ntain s red and o range pranas. This chakra co nta ins red prana of two di fferent shad es. It co ntro ls and energizes th e sex organ and th e bladder. Inn er and Outer Auras of a Loving Coup le
,
Outer Aura o f a Spiritual Aspirant Do ing Meditation on the Two Hearts
:II
0
2
2
~
j
J:
m
> :II ~
-.
> <
m ,-
ttl
> CIl
s
./
~
~
c::
ttl
> o
::s
~ C· .,
'm" J:
> :II
9I::l ;::a
CIl
"ll ,m m
CIl
m X
2
~
CI>
CIl
o
:II
0
:E 2
(
~
J:
:II
0
> ~
0
:: m
:II
Cl
~
2
"ll ,-
:: m
X
2
m
c
CIl
ADV ANCED PRANIC HEALING
187
The sex chakm also energizes the legs to a substantial degree. It is clairvoyantly observed that when a person is urinating, his sex chakra and meng mein chakra produce more orang prana which is used in expelling and eliminating waste matter from the body. The sex chakra is the lower or physical creative center. 3. Meng Mein Chakra. It has eight petals and contains orange, yellow and orange-red pranas. Meng mein chakra controls and nergizes the kidneys, the adrenal glands, and to a certain extent other internal organs. It acts as a pumping station for the red pranic energy from the basic chakra and is responsible for the upward flow of pranic energy in the spine . This chahra is very important and will be used very often with the basic chahra in advanced pranic healing. 4. Navel Chakra. It has eight petals and predominantly contains yellow, gr en, blue, red and violet pranas, It also contains a little of orange prana. This chakra controls and energizes the small intestine, the lower large intestine, and the appendix. The navel chakra produces the "synthetic kin which facilitates or helps in the circulation of prana within the meridians. "Synthetic kin facilitates the drawing in of prana by the etheric body. Persons with more "synthetic kin can draw in more prana than those with less "synthetic ki". Persons with less "synthetic kin feel low during poor weather. 5. Spleen Chakra. A spleen chakra has six petals and con tains red, orange, yellow, green, blue and violet pranas. The spleen chakra dmws in a lot of air prana and energizes other major chakras by distributing the digested pranas to them. In other words, the spleen chakra energizes the entire bioplasmic body; thereby, energizing the visible physical body . ..he spleen chakra is closely related to the navel chakra. When the navel chakra is energized or activated, the spleen chakra becomes energized or activated; thereby, drawing in more air prana. Thus, increasing the pranic energy level of the entire body.
Activated Crown Chakra o f oSpiritual Aspirant Do ing Meditation on the Two Hearts
A person can be energized just by concentrating on the navel chakra. By concentrating on the navel chakra, it becomes
18B
N ' 1': 0 "RANIC ilEALING
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART 010' PRAN IC HF.ALINCI
ac ti vated and ene rgized. T his in turn activates and en erg izes til( spleen chakra which ene rgiz s the other chakras ; ther eby, en ergizing t he ent ir body. 6 . Solar Plexus Chak ra. A solar plexus chak ra has t II P tals and contains red, orange, yellow , green and blue prana.. It also contains a little violet p ra na . This chakra contro ls and n rgizes th liver, pa ncreas, stomach, large intestine, diaphragm and to a certain d egre n rgizes th e adrenal glands, t he sm II int stine, the heart, the lungs and oth er parts of the body. It i asier to en rgize th e pancr as through th e back solar pIe u chakra. An ex hauste d p erson can be revitalized rapidly by en er gi zing the solar plexus chahra. More green prana is produced when a person is eat ing. The solar plexus chahra is one of til ' most important chakras because it controls and en ergizes so ma ny vital organs. It is so easily disturbed or imbalanced by negative motions. The solar plexus chah ra is th e cent er of lower e motions.
When a p rson is very an gry , his so lar plexus ch akra pulsat rratically. This aus s th diaphragm to move errati cally resulting in irregular shallow br at hi ngs. When a p rson is removing his bow I, th e so lar plexus chakru, th navel chak ra and th e ba sic chakra produc a lot o f orange a nd yellow pranas. Wh n yellow prana 'om s in co ntact wit h orang prana, a t rigg ring ff ct on th larg int sti ne is pro I uc d. This is th e r aso n why orang or yellow pr an a or both ar used in treating co nst ipat io n .
7. Heart Chahra , A h art chakra has tw Ive petals. Tho front heart chakra co nta ins a lot of yellow and gold en y lIow pranas with som orange-red prana. It controls and nergizes ti ll' heart and th e thymu s gland . Th buck h art cha kra co ntai ns orange red , prana with sa m go ld n yellow pruna. It 'on trols and JIl rgiz s primarily th lung s and t a c rtain d gr th h ar . I'he heart chahra is .th cen t r o f high r or refined emotion s It is v ry clos Iy related to th so la r plexus chakra sine both ar 'motional centers. To agitat e th alar plexus chakra is also t gitate th heart hakra. This is why negative emot io ns havi trim ental effect. on t h heart in th long run .
189
Throat Chakra. It ha s sixt e n p tals and predominantly blue prana with som gr n and violet pranas. A lot of I prana is produced wh nap rson is eating. It controls and lz 's th throat, the t hyro id glands, the parathyroid glands h lymphatic syst m. Malfun tioning of thi chakra manifests hr at related ailm nt s lik goit r, so r throat, loss of voice, thma. The throat chah ra is th e center of th e lower or cont, mind or lower m enial facult y and it is also th e high er creaH.
,
Ill.
-cn t r.
Ajna Chahra. It has nin ty six petals and is divided two divisions. Each divi sion has forty eight p tals. With some ns, one of the divisions is predominantly light yellow; and other division is predominantly light violet. Others have l.i h green in one of th divi sions; and light violet on the other I m . The predominating color pranas in the ajna is not the in all persons. The color of the ajna chakra also changes I th psychological stat of a p rson. The ajna chahra is the 'r of th e high er or abstract mind and it is also the will or t iue cent er. It co nt ro ls and nergizes the pituitary gland and -ntir body . T h ajna hakra is call d th master cha kra bendo crin glands and it .o nt ro ls all t h maj or ihakras, th Vital organ s. 1alfun 'Hon ing of this chakra manifests as lat d to th indo ir ine gla nds and th 'y s. Foreh ead
hakra. It ha s on
hundred forty four petals
wn"u '~"~I into tw Ive divi sions. Ea ih division ontains twelve petals.
rhakra .o nt ro ls and nergizes the pineal gland and the nersyst m. Malfun ·tioning of th for h ad chakra may man is insanity, loss of m mory, paralysis and epilepsy. The IW'd chakra contains violet, blu , red, orange, yellow and I pranas. Th e [o reh ead chah ra is the center of the lower hi or cosmic consciousn ess. Crown Chah ra, It has nine hundred sixty external petals tw lve inn r petals. The crown chakra is the only chakra with et of petals. It can also be onsidered to have an inner and r .hakras. The front h art chakra looks like the inner chakra .ro wn chakra. The tw Iv inner petals contain predomigold n y How prana and th nine hundred sixty external
19 1
nv ANCEl) PUANIC Ut;AI.lNG 190
TilE ANCU;NT SCIENCE AND AltT OF I'UANIC IIE AUN£:
petals contain violet, blue, green -yellow and orange-red pranas, The crown chakra cont rols and energizes the brain anCi the pineal gland. Malfunctioning of t h is chak ra may manifest as disease. related to the pineal gland and the brain which may manifest as physical or psychological illnesses .
The crown chakm is th e center of the higher Buddhic or cosmic consciousness. The mental faculty can be compared to a blind man while the Buddhic consciousness to a person who can see . For a blind man to have an idea of the shape of an elephant, he has to spend considerable amount of time touching the elephant and trying to deduce and synthesize the data gathered , while a person who can see will be able t o imm ed iately know the shape of an elephant. Buddhic co nsciousness is understandin g a subject matter not t hrough a long period of study nor thro ugh inductive or deduct ive reaso ning but through immediate "direct
comprehension or perception ". Ano the r term for Buddhic co nsciousness is Christ consciousness:) Through Buddhic consciousness one feels oneness with all, onen ess with God . It is through Christ consciousness that one feels lovin g-kindness to all.
ENERGIZING WITH COLOR PRANAS There are t hree methods of energizing with col or pranas:
1 . By visualizing 2 . By using the chakra l t echnique 3 . By co mbin ing visualization and chakra l te chniqu es In the visualizati on approach , you simply do pranic breathin g and visualiz e the speci fic color prana co ming out of your hand . Do not visu alize the specific co lo r prana being drawn in, just visualize the specific colo r prana projecting o ut of your hand chakra. For example, if you want to energize with green prana, you just simply visualize green light projecting out of your hand chakra . Practice regul arly so that you can be sure that the colo r prana projected is the expected one. It is quite possible that you may be visualizing green or blue prana projecting out of your hand chakra but what is actually co ming out is light red prana, Or
"II may be trying to project light red prana b ut what is co ming ul, is dark red. Practice is necessary to become proficient in proj ecting color pranas.
In the chakral t echnique, you simp ly choose a source chakra hnl provides the speci fic colo r prana or pranas requ ired. For Humple, if you want to treat an infection with blue or green-blue runa , you can draw in prana from your throat chakra and project th o blue or green-blu e prana through your hand chakra, This can Imply be done by doing pranic breathing and simultaneously uicentrating on your throat chakra and your hand chakra . You . ho u ld form an inten tion t o d raw in prana from your throat hukra and project it out through the hand chakra . This is the me as the energizing technique taught in elem entary pranic h.."llng. Instead of concentrating on the left and right hand hnkras, you just simply co ncent rate on your throat chakra and our hand ch akra. Another example, if you want to treat a fresh wOllnd using orange-red prana, you can use the basic chakra as I", source chak ra and pro je ct it out through your hand chakra. ' Sometimes, just using the chakra l technique is not enough to irod uce the right ty pe and the right shad e o f co lor prana. It is ecessary to combine visualization technique with the chakral ·hnique. For exam ple, if you want to strengthen an internal nn with light red prana , concent rate on the basic chakra or vh:ualize the ba sic cha kra as red and .light red prana projecting ul. of your hand chakra. If you just" concentrate on the basic hukra without visualizing your hand project ing light red prana, ou might be projecting 'orange.red prana instead of red prana. Ill ~1 prana is st rengthe n ing. But most internal organs cannot wllhstand too mu ch ora nge prana or orange-red prana because thny will be physically d am aged. I
You can per fo rm an ex pe riment transforming white prana to olor prana by an act o f will . This experiment requires the help f a clairvoyant or a person with auric sight : get a glass of water lie! place it ill fr ont of you . Draw in vitality globules or white prima from the surroundings into the water by willing and visual17.inR th e globules gathering and forming into a white ball of light. Bring the ball of whit.e prana (white ball of light) down into the
,.'
192
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART
O~'
PRANIC m :Al.I Nll
IIVANC~:D PRANIC
HEALI NG
193
water. Visualize and transform the white ball o f light into t h.. speci fic color prana that you want . Get feedbac k from th e clnirvoyant whether you have been successful in drawing in substantlnt amount of prana into the water and whether the wh ite prana hns been transformed into th e desired color prana. Let t he clairvoyant ob serve th e energized water for several hours and for severnI days to see wh ether the white prana has b een pennanentl y transfonned into the desired color prana,
Sometimes, eve n though th e h ealer is using his hand chakra energize t he a ffect ed part, he a lso unconsciously energiz es wit h hl l "yes; thereb y, damaging t he ey es in the long ru n . T his usu ally nnppens to heal ers w ho tend to stare intensely at the affected rt when they are healing.
At first, you may encounter pro blems in gathering tl lIl vitality globules and transforming them into the specific co lor prana, The transformed prana may no t be so steady. For example, yo u may visualiz e gree n prana and may get other color pran ns instead . Not all of the vitality -globules nre transformed into tlu expected color prana. The transform ed color prana is not sta hl•. a nd the color vacillates between green and white. If the green prana is still quite unstable, more "willing" or visual izat ion has to be done. These problems can eas ily be o vercome b y lot s of pructi ce.
In general sweep ing, use first light gree n prana to clean, dengest and d isinfect the patient, then light red prana to strength n t he entire b ody..
MORE ABOUT ENERGIZING Some healers use their eyes in energizing patients. Th is pra cti ce when done frequently for a long period o f time or for even II short period of time would damage th e eyes. When you energize, an et heric or bioplasmic link is est ablished between the proj ect. ing chakra and the diseased part. Diseased ' et heric matter or di sea sed bioplasmic matter sometimes would be absorbed by th .. proj ecting chakra through the et heric link . That is why th e eyes will be damaged if used regularly in projecting prana to ti ll! di seased parts. Sometimes, healers experience d iseased bioplasmic matter creep ing up to the arms wh en they nre energizing with th eir, hand chnkras. It is not advisable to regularly energize directly from your major chnkra to the di seased part o f the patient fo r the sam reason. It is better to energize with t he hand chak ra or fin ger chakra since the hands and fingers are easier to clean and are not too delicate compared to the eyes, brain or heart.
DVANCED GE NE RAL SWEEPING
1.
Visual ize a brilliant ball of light ab ove t he crown.
2. Apply d ownward sweeping movement and visu alize ht whitish gree n prana coming down fro m t he ba ll filling and I"nnsing t he entire body w it h more emphasis on the fron t part o f w bod y , Visualize all the fro nt major cha kras as clean and bright. 3. Apply another downward sweeping movement and ialize light whitish green prana cleansing t he ent ire bod y It h emphas is on t he back part of t he bod y . Visualize the spine J all the back major chakras as clean and bright . 4. Apply another d ow nwa rd sweeping movemen t and ualize light whitish green prana cleans ing t he entire body with mphas is on the im portant internal organs. Visualize t he internal uns as bright light red . I 5 . Apply a nother downward sweeping movem ent tw o lows a nd visualize light w hitish red prana energizing and tron gthen ing all the important intern al organs. Visual ize all !.he health rays as straight and bright especially on t he a ffected 6. Apply a nother d ownward sweeping movem en t and visualize light wh itish red prana energizing and strengt hen ing the "ones and the muscles. Visualize all the health ray s as straight fllld b right. You may repeat the entire process several times.
191
THt: ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANI C m :A 1.1 Ntl
This advanced form of general sweeping cleanses, ener~I,. ". and strengt he ns the entire bod y. It can relieve asthma am i ""11 be used to treat chill and fever. It has very beneficial effl'd. on pat ients who have j ust undergone surgery and sho uld h used befo re and aft er surgery.
ADVANCED LOCALI ZED SWEEPING Visualize light whitish green prana or light whitish hili, prana surroundi ng your han d about six inches in diameter 111111 about o ne to one and a half feet long. Apply localized sweep iu on the affected part and simultaneously visual ize the d isea...1 greyish matter being removed and t he affected part being fill" I with prana . T his advanced localized sweeping is quite ef foctlve a nd can remove mild toothache, headache and other minor a ll ment s with just o ne or two sweeping movements. For musrh pain , you ca n use light red pran a.
DECONGESTIN G OR LOOSENING If the di seased bioplasmic matter is difficult to remov e 0' qu it e stubborn, it wou ld be advisab le to energize first with lighl whitish green pran a for ' two breathing cycles, then fullowod with light whitish orange prana for two breathing cycles to 100 "'11 th e stub born di seased bioplasmic matter. Please note th e . ,. qu ence, green prana first before orange prana. This approach I. much safer. The removal of the loosen ed diseased bioplasmhmatter can be fac ilitated by proje cting light whitish yellow p ranu or light wh iti sh blue prana wh en applying loca lized sweep i ll~ . If cleansing is done properly, partial relief or improvement sho uld occu r. For delicate organs like the brain, the eyes, the heart HIII I th e, liver; it is not advisab le to use orange pra na. CLEAN SING DELICATE ORGANS Sometimes an a ilme nt can be caused by partial clogging IIr very fine bio plasmic chan nels. An example wou ld be nearsight"d
AIIVANCED PRANIC HEALING
195
or farsightedness. Used -up prana and diseased bioplasmic latter in the ey es are loosened and broken down into very fine particles by energizing with light whitish green prana. Project light whitish yellow prana to group together these fine particles or easier removal and apply localized sweeping. Light yellow prana is preferable than blue prana because blue prana tends In remove not only the used-up prana but also the fresh prana, I'Iease note that light green prana is used in loosening and cleansIng delicate organs like th e eye s and the br ain . Orange prana is not used because it is too powerful and may result in undesirable sld e effects. There is no point in taking unnecessary risks.
""00
1I0 W LONG SHOULD ENERGIZING BE DONE? There is no definite answer to the above ~est ion . It is left to the healer's discretion. Certain factors have 't o be considered like the condition of the patient, the severity of the ailment, th e rate of pranic energy co nsumpt io n of the affected part, an d the proficiency of the healer. Some 'healers prefer to energize Inte nsely and rapidly while others prefer t o energize moderately nnd gradually. Advanced heal ers can energize a chakra in just u few second s. Color prana is projected only for three or four econds. For mild ailments, the entire treatment may take on ly less than a min ute. For ordinary infection, energizing with blue prana a nd green prana for about five to seven breathing cycles would be suffident; and for very severe types of infection, energizing would require about ten to fifteen minutes once every two hours for the next eight hours. For organs that have been slightly weakened , energ izing with light red prana for about five to seven breathIng cycles would be sufficient . Organs that have been severely weakened may require fift een breathing cycles Per treatment. These are just rough guidelines. You will have to use your own di scretion. It is very important to rescan a nd determine whether energiaing is sufficient or not.
196
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE ANI) ART OF PRANIC IIEAI.INII
HOW FREQUENT SHOULD THE TREATMENT BE GIVEN 'I In emergency cases, the treatment should be given at fast,l" intervals until the condition stab ilizes. For severe ailmen ts, th .. treatment should be given once a day or once every two days and for less severe types of ailment, it may be given once a week . Ordinary ailments usually require only one or two healing sessions. It is important that the rate of healing should be much fast er than the rate of deterioration. That is why for em ergen cy or severo cases, the treatment should be given at faster intervals.
TREATING INFANTS AND OLD PEOPLE In treating infants, it is advisable to avoid using dark green prana because it may affect the future development of t he organs bein g energized. Using localized sweeping and en ergizing wit h white prana would be sufficient to clean and ene rgize the infant. There is no point in taking unnecessary risk, no matter how minimal it is. In treating infants and old people, it is advisabl e to avoid using dark blue prana especially in the solar plexus an d hea rt cha kras because of its strong inhibiting effects on the fu nct io n ing of t he organs.
ovhNC.:1l1'RAN1C HEALING
197
I" ding, inhibiting, containing, localizing, cooling and soothing ["d•. Green prana has disinfecting, d econgesting and cleansing [t.d8. Green prana breaks down-dirty diseased bioplasmic matter. r severe types o f infection use violet prana because it has the tl o ngest disinfecting effe ct . Other pran as have also disinfecting pro pert y but of lesser effectivity. After disinfecting the affected rt , en ergize with light red prana to strengthen it. Blue prana disinfects by it s inhibiting action, its localizing )(1 containing effect s, and also by stimulating t he product io n 0 1 th e antibodies. Green prana acts by breaking down the diseased "" no eit her directly or indirectly by stimulating the production I nutibodies or substances with breaking down effec t s on the bll no, When greenish blu e (30% green ish prana and 70% blu e rn nu) is used . the poten cy is increa sed severa l times. Preferab ly, "'ni .h-blue prana should no t be used in gene ra l swee ping beu." som e patients canno t withstand it and may bring forth V"'" d etrimental effec ts o n them , Gr eeni sh blue pran a is used for severe infection or inflammalion lind sho uld be used with ca ut io n on delicate organs. It is 1'0 used to treat food poisoning and insect bites on the arms nd on the legs. It shou ld preferably not be used on those below w,' nt y years old and those ah ove forty five years old because it linK II co nst rict ive effect on d elicate organs. When used regularly ur II certain period of time, they may have damaging effects.
INVO CATION BEFORE HEALING '1' lt " NGT Il ENING It is better to invoke the aid of the Divin e Providen ce be foro
healing the patient to make the pranic treatment easier, more effective and safer. If the patient is suffering from severe ailm ent th en request the Lord to assign a healing angel to rem ain with the patient after the treatment to ha sten the healing process.
.
INFECTION AND INFLAMMAT ION For t reating infection and infla m matio n, use light wh iti . h f(l'een pran a, then light whitish blu e prana, llIu e prana is for di s
Light whitish red prana is used to stre ngt he n the organs r parts that have been weakened . Energize the affected part with Ih,ht whitish green prana for two breathing cycles , then with light whit ish red prana for seven breathing cycles. In cases where the pa rto 01 ' organs to be treated are inflamed; ene rgize fir st with lI~h t whitish green prana for abo ut two breathing cycles , then wll II light whitish blu e prana for ab out seven breathing cy cles, rll) [ina lly with light whitish red prana for about two br eathing yr-l.. s to st re ngt he n th e inflamed parts o r o rga ns. Ligh t whitish ,d pruna is safer to usc than light red prana , Avoid using dark (id prana as thi s may e n URC fu rthr -r inflammation.
198
TIlE ANCIENT SCI~;NCE AND ART OF. PRANIC m ; AI.INli "NC~:D
PRANIC HEALING
199
INHIBITING Blue prana can be used t o inhibit a chakra and its com ' spend ing organs. For example, the overproduction of gastr» juice can be inhibited by first cleansing the solar plexus chak m with white prana and second, by energizing it with blue pmnn . It is clairvoyantly observed that patients who are recovering from gastric ulcer has a lot of blue prana in the solar plexu s chakra.
pruna. This is done by energizing the arms throughthe hand hakms a nd the armpit chakras with light red prana for about ur br eathing cycl es for each chakra. En ergize the legs through ole chakras and the hip chakras with light red prana for about 1Ir breathing cycles for each cha kra . Visualize the light red 1111 going inside the bones. Repeat the treatment twice a week th e first few weeks then reduce it to once a week. Partial T,alfunetion ing of the liver or the kidn ey may also cause allergy. IlIl'h cases, also treat the solar plexus chakra and the liver or ,he mung mein chakra and kidney or kidn eys.
DISINTEGRATING DEPOSITS Green prana and orange prana ar e used in d isintegrnt i n ~ d eposits. Clean the affected area and energize with green prann for about five breathing cycles, then energize with oran ge pra nn for about five breathing cy cles to dissolve and eliminate th" deposits. This is followed by energizing with light red prana fur four breathing cycles to promote circulat ion and to strengthen the part being treated .
ACUTE ALLERGY AU types of pranas can relieve allergy but th e best ty pll of prana to use for allergy is red prana. There are certain tYP" 1 of acute or severe allergy that can be relieved only by using prana. There is a type of severe skin allergy that looks like seve skin infect ion but does not respond to any an tibiotic t reat ment. This type of allergy can be healed by ene rgizing the nffeet"1i part with red prana or by wrapping a red cloth near t he affect ed area, Energize th e affected pa rt with light green prana fOl one breathing cycle, th en with light red prana for ab out five 10 eight breathing cycles.
,,,I
To cu re the patient of alle rgy and not just relieve it, clean". the ajna chakra and the basic chak ra. Energize the basic chak rn with red pran a for ab out seven breathing cycles and th e ajna chnkru with light whitish red prana for about four breathing cycles Th e boqes in th e arms and legs have to be en ergized wit h Ii ~h l
IW TO ACTIVATE THE CHAKRA Activating your chakra or that o f th e patient's is need ed mor e advanced and fast er healing. A simple method of actio I.Jllg th e chak ra would be to visualize and will the chakra to louse in size and brightness while simu lt aneo usly energizing wilh red prana. Visualize the chakra as incr easing from three hOKto about five inches and it should be visualized as dazzling. he key factor is in willing. Do this for five breathing cycles. JolTER HEALING TECHNIQUE - ACTIV ATING AND NlmCIZING TH E BASIC CHAKR A AND THE I~NG MEIN CHAKRA Activating a nd energizing the basic and men g mein chakras very important techn iq ue in healing . The basic chakra ener"~ I th e ent ire physical body. Activating and ene rgizing th e basi c krn alone would increase th e pranic energy level o f the body II limited degree . As stated ear lier, th e men g mein chak ra acts so me sort of a " pum p" to facilitate the di stribution of red nk- energy from the basi c chakra to th e othe r parts of hody . To be more accurate , it acts as an "accelerator" since it creases the rate of vibration of th e prana co ming from the lc chakra. So the rate of vibration o f pranic energy from the It: cha kra is higher when it comes out of the rneng mein chakra n before going into it , Without 'act ivat ing and ene rgizing the ng Olein chakra, the pranic energy fro m t he ba sic chakra wou ld II
200
VANCED PRANIC HEALING
TilE ANCIENT SCmNCE AND ART OF PItANIC m:ALI NG
have difficulty spreading rapidly to other parts of the body. Th is is just like having a big factory in full production bu t with a very poor marketing department to distribute the products. When these two chakras are activated and energized, pran ic energy from the basic chakra would gush out with tremendous speed through the back bioplasmic channel or meridian and spread ing to all parts of t he body . The ent ire bod y and the inter. nal organs are energized and strengthened and becom e much brighter and more reddish. Activating and energizing th e basic and meng mein chakras is co nsidered as a "master healing te chn ique" . This healing technique can be used to treat many types of ail. ments. This master healing te ch niq ue can be used for :
1. Energizing and strengthening the internal organs and the ent ire body. This te chnique is very useful for patients wh o are weak or very depl eted and have ailments involvin g th e int ernal organs. With some depl eted patients, th e energizing and strength. ening effects are almo st instantaneous. It can also be used to make strong young athletes even stro nger. 2. To greatly increase and strengthen the body's defense mechanism. This technique is used on severe types of infecti on. It means that if your patient has severe eye infecti on or lung infection, th en this healing tech nique can be used. Do not usc this healing technique on patients with venereal disease or has had a history of venereal disease since this technique produ ce a lot of 'red prana which will activate the venereal germ s; thus, worsen the condition of the patients. 3. , Th is " master healing technique" acc elerates th e healing pro cess several tim es and can be used on some severe types of ail. ments. Exceptions are wh en th e pat ient has high blood pressure or is suffering from prani c congest ion throughou t th e body . Pranie con gestion th roughout th e body happens somet imes to esoteric student s who overpractice or pra ctice incorrectly advanced type of yoga. 4. This t echnique can be used on emergency cases. Uncon scious patients who are on the verge of dying can be revived
201
using this te chnique. When th e basic and the meng mein hnkras are energized , red prani c energy from t he basic ehakra J ~he. up to energize the brain and the entire body.
IJ y
5. This t echnique accelerates tissue repair or th e growth (" of cells and can be used on pat ients before and after surgery. This "master healin g t echnique" is also used as a supplerneny or supportive healing te chnique tog ether with the main pranic '~llment. For example, if th e patient has lung ailment, th en the IUllg••hould be treated (main pranie treatment) and the basic and meng mein chakras should be activat ed and energized to furIocr increase th e rate of healin g. The main pranic treatment can Riven before or after activatin g and energizing the basic and the III! mein chakras.
I.
One of th e effects using this powerful healing technique is it tends to increase th e sexual drive. Pati ents should be ad:J nbout this and be t old t o avoid sexual activity to prevent uic depletion and to accelerate th e healin g pro cess. Procedure: L. Apply localized sweepin g on th e basic and meng mein krus, With som e patients, it is necessary t o clean the back and t. channels. 2. Activate and energize the basic and meng mein chakras Ihe patient for about five to seven breathing cycles. You may ~ I V ll tl' and energize th e two chakras one at a time or you may l~l vute and energize both simultaneou sly. Visualize the chakra s .i ng in size up t o five inches in d iameter , and becoming hlcr.
For advanced healers, the will power sho uld not be used in orce . Otherwise, th e patient may suffer undesirable side t. du e to overactivating of the basic chakra and th e meng chakra, Rescan the basic and meng mein chakras frontally hJeways to determine the degree of activation.
202
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC IIEAI.IN O
This powerful healing t echnique is quite safe as lo ng as till' following guidelines are observed :
1. Never use t h is powerful healing t echnique o n pregnant women. The energy generat ed can overwhelm or destroy th e delicate chakras of the unborn baby. There is the possibility u ( miscarriage or the baby may be stillborn. 2. Do not activate and energize more than seven cycl es. For powerful healers , the number of breathing cycles has to btl reduced . The patient may be overen ergi zed resulting in hi gh blood pressure and possible allergy throughout the body. He may fe,,) quite weak and un easy for the next few days because of too muc h pranic energy. Also , the brain will be affected and th e patient may find it difficult to concentrate.
3. Do not energize in te nsely th e sp leen chakra if the basic and meng mein chakras have been activated and ene rgized or will be ,activated and ene rgized. This will cause the body to be o ver. energized. T he side effect s will be similar to overactivat ing and overenergizing t he basic and meng mein chakras, except t hat they may be even mo re severe. This is similar to a b lown fuse o r melted wire d ue to too much electric current. Do not activate or ene rgize intensely the navel chak ra if , th e basic and meng mein chahru« have been or will be activated, By activating o r energizing inten se lY' the navel chakra , the sple en cha kra becomes activated o r inten sely energized. 4. This technique should not be used o n pat ients with high blood pressure and on patients su ffering fr om glaucoma . 5. It sho uld not b e used on patien ts suffering fr o m leprosy becau se it would only worsen the ailmen t. It sho uld not be used o n patients suffering fro m can cer , 6. This master healing technique tends to increase the gro wth rate of cells; therefore, it will increase greatly the growth rate of tt", cancer cells; thereby, worsening the condition , It should also no t be applied on patients with cirrhosis of the liver because it wo uld only worsen the co nd it io n.
v ANCED PRANI C HEALIN G
203
7. Do not use this healing t ech n iqu e on leukemi a palitHsince it would tend to incr ease the white blood cells; t he re, wo rsening the condition.
8.
Do not use this healing technique on pa t ients suffering
m severe heart ailments. The heart has a st rong tendency to
nw or attract pranic energy . The us e o f this advanced healing chniq ue on a patient with ser ious heart a ilme nt may resu lt in u ie co ngest io n manifesting as card iac arrest .
9 . This healing t echnique should be used o nly o n th o se uents whose ages range from fifteen to forty five years old. (nnts a nd child ren may suffer brain d amage due, to too mu ch nn ic ene rgy ru shing upward . With child re n, their cha kras are not [te developed and to subject them to inten se pranic ene rgy nIfty ca use serious imbalance in their bioplasmi c body. For o lde r t ients, this technique will hav e detrimental effects since th eir :"J ies and endocrine gla nds have atroph ied and canno t with-' nd too mu ch pranic energy . As di scussed in earlier chapters, Innts, child re n, weak and o ld patients sho uld be gent ly a nd gradlIy en ergized! This master healing technique can be toned down by ju st rgizing th e basic and m eng mein chakras without sub stantially Ilvat ing th em. This means that yo u do not visualize or will the h a kru to be come bigger and brighter but y ou just simply ene rgize ~:nerg iz i ng without a ctivating the ba sic and men g mein cha kras I II he used for patients whose age ranges from abo ut t we lve to t y years old . It sho u ld no t be u sed on infants. This milder form mast er healing technique is st ill qui t e poten t and can easily Ilvrl(ize a nd strengthen a depleted pati ent in a sho rt time . Th e IIW guidelin es sho uld be followed wh en using this "m ilder form master healing technique". This " master healing technique" sho uld pr eferably be used '1/ ex peri en ced healers, not by beginn ers.
20~
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE ANI) ART OF PItAN IC m :AI. INI
HOW TO ACTIVATE THE ADRENAL GLANDS
V AN C~:I) I'RANI C HEALING
205
'\'ANTANEOU S HEALING OF A F RE SH WOUND:
n ANGE ·RED PRANA The adrenalgglands can be activated t o t emporarily incrt'Il"" physical strength and stamina . '
1. 2. glands.
Apply the master healing technique. Will or direct the pranic en ergy to go t o t he ad renal
3. Activate the back solar plexus chakra fo r about fivc to seven cycles. 4. glands.
Will or direct the pranic en ergy to go to the adrennl
5 . After the required physical feat has be en done, normnl ize the meng mein chakra, the basic chakra and the back solar plexus chakra , 6. The same guid elines used in the master heal ing te ch nique should be followed (please read the guidelines thoroughly before applying this technique) . This t echnique can al so be used to treat emergency ailments or cases.
ACTIVATING AND ENERGIZING THE BASIC CHAKRA AND THE PERINEUM CHAKRA To facilitate the flow of pranic energy from the ba sic cha k rn to the legs in order to strengthen them, just activat e an d energiz» the basic chakra and the perineum minor chakra . Th e act of act.l vating and en ergizing the per ineum min or chakra is like turning on a water fau cet. You do not have to ask your patient t o assume an embarrassing po sition just to activat e and ene rgize th e pe, l neum minor chakra . Just visuali ze the perineum in fron t of y01l1 hand chakra , then proceed to acti vate and ene rgize it . Five to seven breathing cy cles would be sufficient to activate and energi... the ba sic cba kra and tl}e perineum minor chakra.
Instantaneous healing o f a wound is app lica ble o nly if t he "li d is fr esh. Tbe rate of inst an taneous , healing ra nges fr om HIt tw enty minutes to o ne o r t wo hours o r longer . How ,." it will take d ep ends o n the body of the patien t , the profincy of the healer , and the size of the wound. Tbe healer ma y I'" several short rests wh en ene rgizing.
'fil e basic chahra wllicll is tile source o f orange-red prana is (/ in instantaneou s healing of a wo und . The red prana is abo ut ty percent and the o range prana is about fo rt y percent . The :1 lind orange pranas are pro jected simu ltaneo usly and not one r the other. The effect is quite different if o ra nge prana is lTol"cted fir st, then red pran a o r vice versa co m pa red to orangefirana . Ora nge prana has a cleans ing or expelling effect \Itch may increase the b leed ing; and red prana has a st rengt he neffect and to a certain degree incr eases t he growth rat e of li•. Orange-red prana accelerates the growth rat e o f ce lls, there, ca us ing rapid if not instantaneous healing o f the fresh wound. It is important that t he basic chakras of the patient a nd the I", sho u ld be act ivated and energized . This is ne cessary in C' to have enough pran ic ene rgy to produce insta ntaneo us ling o f the wound . T o use the basic chakra o f t he heal er alone not eno ugh . It would take a long er time before t he wound will fully or substantially healed . The instantaneous healing tech ue, the " maste r healing techn iqu e" and so me adv an ced healtr-chniques were taught to the aut ho r by his Respected T each er i Ling .
I'roccdure:
I.
Activ at e a nd ene rgize t he patient's basic chakra for five to seven brea t h ing cycles, then acti vate a nd ene,r,i,ze II' basic chakra for ab out five to seven breathing cyc les, Or u may activate and ' ene rgize simulta neo us ly both your basic l UI.
I
206
TilE ANCI ENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRA NIC IlJo:AI.I N'
chakra and the patient's basic chakra. This is done by activat iu and energizing your patient's basic chakra and simu ltaneou sly co ncent rat ing and activating your basic chakra. Visualize y0 1l1 basic chakra and the patient's basic chakra as becoming biKM'" and brighter for about five to seven breathing cycles. 2. Energize the fr esh wound with pranic energy frolll your basic chakra and the patient's basic chakra . This can II" done by applying short circuiting on the patient's basic chak m and on the wound. Short circuiting is done by drawing pr a nlr: ene rgy from the patient's basic chakra with one of your hond chakra , then directing it to the wound with your other hnnd chakra. Put one of your hands ' near the patient's basic chakrn and the other near the wound. Concentrate simultaneously O il your basic chakra and hand chakras. Visualize the wound bei ng en ergized with orange-red prana, and as healing and closing. YOIl do not have to visualize your basic chakra and the patien t 's bnsl chakra, This is unnecessary and would only make you tense lind easily tired. Just visualize the orange-red prana coming out o f your hand chakra but be sure to co ncent rat e on your basic chakrn and on the other hand cha kra simultaneously , Your visualizatio /l does not have to be clear. What is important is th e int ent ion or the willing. Continue with the treatment until the wound is COm pletely healed. You may take several short rests wh en treating. 3. Instead of using short circuiting technique to draw III pranic energy from the patient's basic chakra, you can just simply will the pranic energy from his basic chakra to go to the wound . It would be advantageous if your meng mein ch akra and tI", patient's meng mein chakra are activated and ene rgized to focill tate the flow of pranic en ergy. By activating your meng melll chak ra and the pati ent's meng mein chakra, th e healing rate the wound is furth er increased . If the cut is on the leg, then th e patient's perineum minor chakra should be activated and ene r gized . The instructions may see m long and co mplicated but it i. actually quite simple and sho rt .
or
Your initial reaction to this teaching WOUld, of co urse, II" of doubt. This is quite normal even for students of esoteri c scie nce. Does instantaneous healing of a wound require an exceptional
207
v ANCf;n PRANIC HEALING
HI? No, it does not require an except io na l person but the k -r sho uld at least be pr oficient in intermediate pra nic heal-
, T ry it several times and judge for yourself. The first few io ns may take you a longer time to heal rapidly or instan u-ously the wound and it may not be o ne hundred pe rce nt 1"c1 but with more practice you can bec o me very proficient at it. ou want to become a good healer , just reading an d spec ulat ing ut pran ic healin g is not eno ugh. Th e o nly way t o learn pran ic linK is through lots and lots o f practice and experiments.
I
This instantaneous healing of a wound technique is used on II wounds. It ca nno t be used on delicate internal organs be· II "" too mucn orange prana may cause damage to the interI organ being treated .
Orange-red prana is not used in healing th e brain and th e syste m . Using it would result in the production of abnorJ or " mo ngo loid" celis which would only result in more harm . ~.,us
It is ad visable t hat you ex per ime nt with small wounds first, grad ually go t.o bigger ones. With small wounds, you mu st t en ergiz e it to stop the bl eeding. You may u'se blu e prana, hilll prana o r 'o ran ge-red prana to stop the bleeding. Clean the und and rem ove the blood by using cotton and alcohol. En er the wound for abo ut twenty minutes and observe the result. ntinue ene rgizing if the wound is not sufficiently or co mpletely 11.'1. With bigger o r surgical wounds, the pro cedure is more less the same. It is important to stop the bleeding fir st , then II and remove the blood before stitching or taping the wound thor. It is then ene rgized for instantaneous healing. Th e author personally expe r ime nt ed on instantaneous healing of sma ll unds and has obtained very good results. II
This technique can probably be used on a patient whose has been acc identally cut-off. You will of course need the h>o f a surgeon to re-attach the finger . ",~r
You may u se pranic invocative healing to obtain th e help o f ht.y angels or "mahadevas" to accelerate furth er the healing I,h" wound .
208
Til E ANCIENT SCmNCE AND ART
O~'
PIlANIC m eALIN,
BROKEN BONES Light orange-yellow prana (60% yellow; 40% orange) is u",·d for rapid healing o f fractured bone. You can u sc the basic chakrn as the so urce fo r or an ge-yellow prana. Visualize the basic chakrn and the projected prana a s orange-yellow and ene rgize for ab out ten to fifteen minutes. Visualize again the basi c chakra as orang» red . Energize the affected part with light orange-red pran a for about five breathing cy cles. The basic chakra of SOme pat ient . with severe heart ailment or high blood pressure is orange-yellow, that is why you have to normalize your basic chakra at the end or th e treatment.
RA PID HEALING OF OLD WOUNDS AND BURNS: G REENISH RED PRANA Gr een prana is not used on fresh wounds because it is slow» In effect and tends to make the wound wet or "watery". It is u. ,,1 in t he rapid healing of old wounds and bums. A lot of green pra nn I. required in the breaking down of dead cells. To heal old wo und. and bums, ene rgize with green ish red prana (40% gree nish pran a and 60 % red prana) the affected part for abo ut fift,"'n minutes. You may use the solar plexus chakra o r the navel chakrn as a sou rce cha kra for green-red prana. Repeat the treatment on ce or tw ice a day . The healing o f old wounds may take several days or longer depending upon the age and the condition of the patient's bod y, th e size of the wound and the proficiency of the healer . A h l~ wound has a mu ch higher rate of pranic energy consumption t han a small wound; therefore, a small wound would heal at a fast", rate . A vegetarian whose bioplasmic body or et he rlc body is mu ch brighter , den ser and healthier than most people would generally heal at a mu ch faster rate than those who are not vegetarian. So mo sma ll old wounds can be co mplet ely healed in a few hou rs hy co nti nuo us ly en ergizin g it with greenish red prana a lte rna ted wit h o range -red prana .
VANCI':1l PRANIC HEALING
209
For fresh bums, cleanse immediately and energize alternately 1\ hlu e prana, and green prana for about fifteen minutes. Re ( the treatment once every hour for the next three hours if ulrod, Repeat th e -treatment twice a day for the next few
•• " NERATION : GREEN·YELLOW PRANA AND I;ENISH VIOLET PRANA C:reenish viol et prana (40% greenish prana and 60% violet lind greeni sh yellow prana (40% greenish prana and 60% HoW prana) are used in regenerating damaged brain, nerve iI. lind Internal organs. Light red prana is used to strengthen Millin being treated with the above colo r pranas. The rate of Ilnll depends on the degree of damage, the physical condition (h, - patient, the karmic factor, and the healer's degree of prolency in healing. It may take several days, weeks, months or tndefinite period of time. ,I Ill)
Clean the a ffected chakra and organ with light whitish green n, I':nergite with light wh itish greenish violet prana for about nty minutes, then ene rgize with light whitish greenish yellow Ill' for abo ut five minutes. Energize the affected organ with ,t red prana for about four breathing cycles to strengthen it. , ,..t the treatmen t tw ice a week. You may use the ajna chalua' lh,' source chakra for greenish viol et prana or violet prana and 101ar plexus chakra or nav el ~hakra for greenish yellow prana.
liE ABOUT KARMA When a person does something with intention whether posiIy or negativ ely , the karmic effect is t enfold. This is the (wiple hehind tithing. When you plant a grain of rice, you hart not only a grain of rice but you harvest many times what you ve planted. When you plant a mango seed, you get a mango that would produce many mango fruits.
210
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC m:AI.INli
When spiritual aspirants including pranic healers do so met hing with intention whether positively or negatively, t he karmlo effect is one hundred fold . This is no exaggeration bu t is to h u take n lit erally. To delib erately misuse one's power or what hn. been taught in this book would have a devastating or crushing effect on oneself. It is wiser and better to do good d eed s ratlu-r than negative deeds.
:ov AN C~:D PRANIC HEALING IIIl
211
is used on skin or bone grafting. It is projected on t he area
hun, the hone or skin was taken. This is done for about tw enty
thirty minutes per healing session. Orange-red prana is less rre.dive in such a case because it does not have the ability to " Mil" the hole or gap where the skin or bone was taken . Use basic krn or meng mein chakra as the source chakra for orangelIow prana.
You do not have to blindly accept the author's wo rd s. Yon can ex pe rime nt by doing something not too negative and cbservi what happens. You can also try doing something po siti ve Iiku tithing and observe what happens. Very often the karmic effect I. not on a lump sum basi/but is done on a piecemeal or staggered basis but still the negative karmic effects are devastating. Th .. a ut hor has personally experimented and experien ced the imme cI iate effects of both positive and negative karma.
To stabilize and prevent possible in fectio n on the grafted or skin, ene rgize it with light green prana for ab out five thing cy cles and then with light blue prana for about five athing' cycles. To strengthen and facilitat e the assimilation r tho grafted bone or skin, en ergize with light red prana for four font hing cycles and then with light yellow prana for four breath1M cycles,
T he law of karma is not fatalistic but is self-d eterm ining cr self-dire cting. It is self-determining in the sen se that karm il: effects originated from oneself; therefore, one can delib erate ly produce positive or negative karmic effects by sett ing in motion p ositiv e or negative causal factors. It also means that one is respo n sib le a nd accountable for one's deeds, words, and Ieelings/tho ughts. One can not blam e other people, one's parents, one's environment or so me un seen forces fo r the problems or troubles o ne is ex. pe r ienc ing, If one gets in trouble, then one should get out or it with or without outsid e help . If one is experien cing a 'lo t or "had luck" or one's co nd it io n is quite restrictive o r o ne i. sub jec ted to "injustices," then one should meditate an d learn wha te ver lessons to be learned , from them. On e should d o good deeds to gene rate good karma . Definitely one should work hard and inte lligently to impro ve one's conditions, It is by learning o lle's lesson s, by doing good deeds. and by wo rk ing hard and inte lligentl y that one can reverse an adverse condition . It is hy wo rking out or overcoming negative karmas that one is purified and ga ins inn er strength and wisdom.
Il ANIC HEALING APPLIED IN SURGERY
O RA NG E.YELLOW PRANA Orange -ye llow prana is not used in healing fre sh o r old wo und . because it s use tends to form ugly scars o r keloids. Orange-yellow
uu
Pranic healing is u seful for treating patients before, during d nfter surgery . Pranic healing can be used t o reduce bleeding, minimize the po ssibility of infection, t o st re ngt hen the body nl the part or organ to be operated on, and t o accelerateI' the rate rocov ery . Several days hefore surgery, the body of the pa t ient can be engt he ned by applying general sweeping and by act ivat ing and ' ,~ i zi ng the basic and the meng mein chakras . Tho area and organs to be operated on a nd th e nearby rkrns should a lso be cleansed and energ ized several times .
Just before surgery, the part or o rga n to he o pe rated on uld be en ergized with light whitish green prana for about two
'tl h ing cycles, with light whitish blu e prana for about eight athing cycles t o reduce bl eeding and to prevent possible infecn ; und then with light whitish red prana for about two breat h. cyc les to st re ngt he n the area to be operated on . The major krn s nearest the part to be operated o n sho uld also be enerI with white prana .
212
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PIlANI C IIt;ALINU
During surgery if required, the healer may apply pran ic healing to reduce bleeding; and to clean, ene rgize and strength en the entire body, a specific organ or a specific majo r chakra or chakras. After the surgery, general sweeping should be applied severnl times a day to clean the entire body. The etheric body or th e bioplasmic body is greyish after the operation. Chakras t hat aro depleted have to be cleansed and energized . The are a operated 0 11 should be energized with light green prana for about tw o breat hing cycles, with light blue prana for about seven br eathing cycle. and then with light orange-red prana to accelerate the hea ling or the wound. The treatment should be continued for the next several days or weeks. RAPID GROWTH : RED PRANA AND YELLOW PRANA When red prana and yellow prana ar e used one after th o other, it would result in rapid growth of cells. This can probably be applied on children with , polio and on children wh o wan t to grow taller. With polio patients, it would be advantageou s to acti vate and en ergize the basic chakra and the perineum min or cha krn, Do not energize with yellow-red prana or red prana and yellow prana simultaneously because it will produce d isru ptive if not destructive effects on the patient. This can also be ap plied on plants to produce faster growth . You may perform an ex perime nt for about o ne month on rapid growth of plants with the use of red prana, and yello w pra nn. When energizing th e plant, project the red prana first followed hy yellow prana, never energize with both pranas simultaneou sly. .visualize the pranic en ergy going into the root and into the cor ,' ~f the plant. Yellow -red prana is very powerful and would result in ' too rapid mul ti plication of cells resulting in the destru ction of the plant or tree being ene rgized . This prana is never used in healing. Red prana, and yellow prana ca n also be used to facilitntu th e assimilati on and acceptance by the body of a newly t mn planted organ . This would reduce the risk o'f rejection.
IlVANCt;O I'RANIC HEALING
213
INCREASING RESISTANCE AGAINST INFECTION Activating and en ergizing the meng mein chakra and the basi c h ukrn is used to increase the body's resistance against infection. /I snfer t echnique would be to ener gize the navel chakra, the lOISand the soles with light red prana.
ST OP THE BLEEDING Different types of prana can be used to stop the bleeding in " ".t cases. To heal a wound that will not stop bleeding or takes long time for the blood to clot, energize the wound with blue IIIU' for about four breathing cycles or until the bleeding stops. IIorl(ize the wound with orange-red prana to facilitate the healing "'''ss. Orange-red prana has also th e ability to stop bleeding. For nose bleeding, energize with white prana or light blue about four breathing cycl es or until the bleeding stops.
i"" for
For hemophilia, energize with greenish blu e prana until h leeding stops. Not blue prana, then green prana but both Ill S simu ltane ously. This technique is based on th e instruction II to th e author by his Respected Teacher Mei Ling . Greeni sh blu e prana is not used in general sweeping because II'" patients may experience adverse reaction or side effects.
,
'EI'S IN HEALING: 'I .
Interview and observe the patient carefully .
Scan all the major chakras, th e relevant minor chakras, important organs and the spine thoroughly. An affected krn whi ch seems unrelated to the ailm ent and is quite far from loeution of th e a ilme nt may be a major co nt ributing factor Lh" ailment. Thorough scanning is th e k ey to proper treatment. 3. Clea n and energize the chakras and organs to be treated . the ne cessary co lor pranas to correc t or remedy th e ailm ent.
•• 21'1
THE ANCIENT SCU;NCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALlNIl
In cases where you are not sure of what color pranas to use, th en just use white prana. For instance, a patient with lung infect ion sho uld be treated with green prana; then with blue prana to di s1nfect ; then with light orange prana to expel diseased bioplasmic matter, toxins and germs in the lungs; and then with light red prana to strengthen the lungs. White prana may be used at t he end or during the treatment to dilute the potency of th e colo r prana used and to harmonize the condition. For pranic congestion, cleansing should be emphasized . 4. For pranic depletion, energizing should be emphasized. The pro jected prana should be stabilized! Be sure to resean the treated parts. 5. The treatment can be divided into two parts: relieving the patient and correcting the co nd it ions causing th e ailments. For example, the healer may relieve a patient of headache by treating the head area and correct the condition by treating th o eyes if the cause of the headache is due to eyestrain. Another example, the healer can relieve an asthmatic patient by treati ng the throat chakra, the secondary throat chakra and th e back heart chakra. This condition can be corrected by' treating the ajna chakra, the basic chakra and th e bones. There are cases in which it is not possible to remove tho cause. For instance, a patient may have glaucoma due to habi tu al tension. It is possible to relieve the patient hut permanent CU rl' will have to depend on the patient's emotional control or h is ability to relax under stressful cond it ions. Under such cond iti ons, the healer may repeat the treatment at a faster interval so that t ho rate of healing is much faster than the rate of deterioration u nt il the affected organ is in a very healthy state. The treatment, th en can be ,given at a longer interval to counteract whatever d et eriorntion due to the pr esence of factor or factors causing th e di sease. Before treating the patient, the healer should esta blish rap port with the patient to reduce resistance and the patient should assume the receptive pose . If the patient is religious, it would ,'" ad visable for him to pray to make him more receptive. The healer sho uld be flexible enough to adapt to different patients.
I 'VANCED PRANIC IIEALING
215
,
Do not forget to wash your arms and hands after sweeping ~ 1If1 after energizing! leUKEMIA Patients suffering from leukemia have very depleted basic hlokra and ajna chakra . The minor chakras in the arms and legs r(, depleted. The weakening of these major and minor chakras IIses the abnormal blood co nd it ion. 1. Apply general sweeping several times. Clean the spine horoughly with light red prana several times. 2. Clean, activate and en ergize the basic chakra with light I prana for about tw enty breathing cy cles and the ajna chakra t h light whitish red prana for about t en breathing cycles.
a. Since the patient is quite weak , the solar plexus chakra the navel chakra should also be treated and energized with hI. red prana for about ten breathing cycles for each chakra ,
,j
4. Apply localized sweeping on the ent ire arms and legs. :rgize the hand chakras and th e armpit chakras with light whitII red prana for about seven breathing cycl es for each chakra , . 1 visualize the light whitish red prana going into the bones of \ Q arms. Energize the sole chakras and hip chak ras with light Ilitish red prana for about seven breathing cycles for each chakra 1<1 visualize the light whitish red prana going into the bones of I,·gs. Do not use dark red prana since it will produce negative d .s instead of po sitive healing results. Due to karmic factor I debilitated co nd it ion of the patient, th ere is no guarantee t. t.he patient will be cured . But definitely the patient's health II he greatly improved . ' K L ~;
CELL ANEMIA
Use the treatment for leukemia .
216
THE ANC1ENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRAN1C HEA LING
CANCER OR MALIGNANT TUMOUR Cancerous organ or part is clairvoyantly seen as dark mu ddy yellow . There is too much yellow prana in the affected area resulting in the rampant growth of cancerous cells. Therefore, thr first thing to do is to prevent the cancer from spreading; second , to neutralize the dark muddy yellow prana with dark oran gegreen prana (30% orange prana, 70 % green prana) or violet prana ; and third, to treat the malfunctioning ajna and basic chakra s.
IIVANCED PRANIC HEALING
217
.II" healing should be continued. If there is no great improvement IlO ring this period, then the cause is maybe of karmic origin or he healer is not proficient enough . Sinc e canc er is usually of irtnlc o rigin; th erefore, th ere is no guarant ee of cure but at "./ the patient 's health will improve and th e int ense pain will gradually relieved.
:YST
1. Apply general sweeping several times. Most ca ncer patients, if not all, have blackish or darkish grey auras. The outer , health and inner auras are all badly affected.
1. The affected part is congested and filled with dirty J pranic energy . ' Apply localized sweeping thoroughly on the acted part.
2. Treat the patient by cleansing and projecting dark blue prana on the affected ar ea for fifteen minutes. This is to inh ibit the growth of cancer cells and to localize them.
2. Energize the affected part with light blu e prana then light green prana. This is to inhibit and disintegrate the
"
3. Project dark violet prana or dark orange-green prana for about ten minutes to destroy the cancer cells. ,4. With cancer patient, the ajna chakra and the basic chakra are malfunctioning, and the sola r plexus chakra and till' navel chakra are quite depleted . Cleanse and energize with liKht violet prana the ajna for ab out ten br eathing cycles and th o basi c chakra for ab out twenty breathing cycl es. Tr eating tho ajn a and basic chakras is very important since the ajn a chakru cont ro ls all the major cha kras and the basic chakra energi zes the ent ire visible physical body.
, 5. Clean and energize the solar plexus chak ra with light violet prana for about ten breathing cycles and th e navel cha krn with light red prana for about ten breathing cycles. By energizlng them, the entire depleted body of the patient can be energized. 6 . Do not use the master healing technique. It will increa« th e growth rate of cancer cells.
The solar plexus chakra is usually congested. Apply ough sweeping on the front and back solar plexus chakra, rgize the solar plexus chakra with light whitish blue prana. lit the treatment three times a week. :I .
Nt~ItEAL
I . Apply general sweeping with light whitish blue prana 'f ill tim es.' 2.
Apply localized sweeping on the navel chakra, sex
krn and the sex organ. Energize them with light greenish blue a then with light violet prana. Do not use red prana. Increase the body's defense mechanism by energizing light violet prana on the sole and hand chakras. Visualize the energy going insid e the bones.
:I.
4. 'li S
The treatment should be given at least once every two days, If there is sub stantial improvement in a month or tw o , then
DISEASES
Clean and energize the crown, forehead, and ajna with light violet prana.
Apply localized sweeping and energizing on all affected with light greenish blue prana then with light violet prana.
218
Tm; ANCIENT SCIENC E AND AllT OF ('I\ANIC IIEALl N( ;
Repeat pranic treatment three times a week. Instruct the patient to see a medical doctor.
SEXUAL IMPOTENCE
1. Apply localized sweeping and energizing on th e navel, sex, and basic chakras with light whitish red prana or use tho master healing technique, 2. If the ailment is psychological in nature, apply localized sweeping and energizing on the solar plexus and crown chakru s with light violet prana. ,3 . If the patient has a history of venereal ailment , do not use red pranic en ergy and also do not use th e master healing technique. Just clean and en ergize th e sex and navel chakras with light green and then with light violet prana.
IRREGULAR MENSTRUATION AND DYSMENORRHEA 1. Scan the affected,area and apply localized sweepi ng on th e sex chakra, the navel cha kra, the basi c chakra, and t he low I" portion of the spine.
'IVANCED PI\ANIC HEALING
219
2. En ergize th e affected part with light whitish green prana r ubout four breathing cycl es, next with light whitish blu e prana or ubout four br eathing cycles, and th en with light whitish red J11110 U for about four breathing cycles. The basi c and the meng loin chakras may be ene rgized, too, with light red prana for ve breathing cycles to accelerate the healing process.
1.
Apply general sweeping.
2. Clean th e front and ba ck solar plexus chakras , En ergize ,he pancreas through the back so lar plexus chakra ; first, with ht greenish yellow pr ana for about tw elve breathing cycles ; .ond , with light whitish red prana for ab out three br eathing los. This is to heal and strengt he n th e pan creas so that it will rmaliz e its product ion of insulin . 3. Scan the ajna chak ra . If th ere is pranic co ngestion, Iy localized sweeping and ene rgize with light whitish blu e " nu for about three br eathing cy cles. If th ere is pranic deplen, apply localiz ed sweeping and energize with light whitish :1 prana for about four breathing cycles. Instruct mentally or bully the patient's ajna chakra to normalize the production lnsulin . Repeat the treatment two times a week.
2. Energize the sex and navel ' chakras with light whitl. h orange prana for five breathing cycles for each chakra, I. 3. Energize the basic chakra with red prana for abo ut breathing cycles.
Apply general sweeping several times.
[011I
BACKACHE OR INJ URED BACK 1. Apply localized sweeping on the spine a nd on the fected part.
II [
2. Apply localized sweeping o n th e throat chakra and o n r-condary throat min or chakra, The seco ndary throat minor kno is located on th e lower so ft portion o f the throat. Ener th em with light green prana for on e br eath ing cycle, then with It whitish red prana for about four br eathing cycles for eac h krn ,
:1. Apply localized swee ping o n the lung s and o n the cle heart cha kra. Energize th e lungs through th e back heart
220
TilE ANCmNT
SCU; NC ~;
AND ART OFPRAN IC IIEAI.J NO
VANC~;()
PRANIC HEALIN G
221
cha kra with light green prana for o ne breathing cycle, with IIl1hl orange prana for about four breathing cycles then with IllIhL whitish red prana for five breathing cycles. Clean and en erKI", the solar plexus chakra with light red pran a for about five b ronth ing cycles. These will give the pa t ient immed iat e relief.
:I. First, energize the back heart chakra and the lungs with Illl" t whitish green prana for five breathing cycles, then with light hlll Hh blue prana for about five breathing ' cycles. This is to len IIHe and disinfect the lungs. If the infection is severe, en ergiz e II h light violet prana for ab o ut t en breathing cycles.
4. To gradually and co mplet ely heal the patien t , encrKI"" with light whitish red prana the ajna and the basic chakras f(1I about seven breathing cycles.
-l , For strengthening and eliminat ing effects, en ergize the lunKH with light whitish orange prana for about four breathing deH, then with light whit ish red prana for about three breath.11 cycles.
5. To improve the quality of the blood produced , the bonos in the body have to be cleansed and ene rgized. Apply Iocall xrd sweeping and simultaneously energize the spinal column wlLh light whitish red prana several times. 6. Apply localiz ed sweeping and simultaneously visunliz« your hand going into the bones of the arms and legs. EnerKi',' the bones in the arms through the hand cha kra s and the annpll chakras with light whitish red pran a {or about five breath In cycles for each chakra. Visualize the light red pranic energy goinN into the bones in the arms, the sho ulde r blades an d the che'l bones' Energize the bones in the legs through th e sole chakrna and the hip chakras with light red prana for .abo ut five breathing cycles for each chakra . Visualize the light red pranic energy goin into the hip bones and t he bo nes in the legs. This techn iq ue I. very ' effective in treating asthmatic cases. The purpose of thl . pranic treatment is to improve t he "quality" of the blood pro du ced; ther eby, gradually making the patient immune to irritants •
&. En ergize the solar plexus cha kra with light red prana H"ven breathing cy cles to ene rgize the low er lungs and the II"" physical body.
n. If the nose and t h roat are also affected then they Quid be treated a lso . 7. For patients su ffering from severe lung infection o r borculosis, activate and ene rgize with light red prana the basic men g mein chakras for about five breathing cycle s. This uhl greatly ac celerate the healing process . With th e use o f master healing techn iq ue , it is possible to completely heal "IILicnt with tuberculosis within a month or two . Repeat the I,, · treatmen t twice a week . If t he patient is very weak and in It'll I co nd it io n, treatments shou ld be given at fast er intervals. Since the back heart chakra is so closely related to the front
lin chakra, malfunctioning of t he lungs may severely affect To strengthen the body, activate and energize Lh" 7. basic and men g mein cha kras for abo ut four breathing cycle. Repeat the treatment tw ice a week .
,
lu-nrt and vice versa. In healing patients with lung problem s, Important to a lso sca n the front heart chakra .
NUS IT IS AND STUF F Y NOSE
LUNG INFECTION, T UB ER CULOSIS I. 1.
Apply gene ra l swee ping several times.
Apply gen eral sweeping. :l .
2 . Apply localized sweeping on the lungs and on 1I", back heart chakra .
Apply localiz ed sweep ing and ene rgizm g on the forethe ajna chakra and on the root of the nose with hi IIn'en prana for three breathing cycles, and with light whitish 1 ~ prana for four breathing cycles for each chakra .
u chukra,
22 2
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE ANI> ART OFPRANIC I1EALl NlI
v ANCf:U PRANIC HEALING
223
3. Cleanse and energize the right and left nostril min", chakras with light green prana for two breathing cycl es and with light blu e prana for two breathing cycles for each minor cha kru
-t , Energize the back head chakra with white prana for lilt four breathing cycles and visualize the pranic energy going the eyes.
4. Energize the back head chakra with white prana fm three breathing cycles. Usually, the relief is very fast . Check t ho temples, the throat and the lungs. Repeat the treatment twi co II week.
uld avoid wearing eyeglasses for the duration o f the treatment
ceding conditions can be followed , it is quite likely tha t t he
COUGH
Uont may ,be completely I healed within three months. The rate hl'lliing will depend on the patient's age, the cond it ion of t he lent 's eyes and the proficiency of the healer.
1.
Apply general sweeping several times.
2. Clean and energize the throat chakra and the secondary throat chakra with light green prana for about three breathin cycles, with light whitish orange prana for about five breat hln cycles a nd with light blue prana for about four breathing cycl" "
3. Energize the solar plexus ehakra with white prana fu, about seven breathing cycles. If the nose and lungs are affect"I, then they should be treated also.
NEARSIGHTEDNESS, FARSIGHTEDNESS, ASTIGM ATISM, CROSS.EYES, WALLEYES, CATARACT
1. Apply localized sweeping on th e brain, the ajn a chakrn , t.he eyes a nd the temple chakras. 2. Energize the eyes through the ajna chakra with li~h l whitish green prana for five breathing cycles. This is to clean and to loo sen th e used -up prana in the minute nadis of t he eyo" Energize the eyes with light whitish yellow prana for one br eat h ing cycle. Apply localized sweeping on the eyes. 3. En ergize the eyes with light whitish violet prana for fiv,' breathing cycles. This Is to strengthen the eyes. Energize ti ll! eyes with light blue prana for two br eathing cycles. Thi s is tn stab ilize the projected prana and to give pliability or Oexibillty to th e parts of the eyes.
Repeat the treatment two to three times a week . The pat ient thi s t ends to neutralize the effect s of the treatments. If the
Once the patient has been healed, he should not overuse II I11rly his eyes and should go back for periodic treatments, lyd ully if he fe els his eyes are weakening. This is ju st like :Ili ng your dentist once or twice a year. ~
I . Clean the eyes, the t emples and the ajna chakra. Bnerthe eyes with whitish green prana, then with light whitish luo prana. Apply localized sweeping and energizing alternately '!t.II th ere is substantial relief. 2. En ergize the eyes through the ajna cha kra with light prana for about seven breathing cycles to regen erate the
3. Energize the back h ead chakra with white prana for b Ollt four breathing cycles and visualize the pranic en ergy going to th e eyes. -l, The treatment should be done three times a week for bo ut a month or two even if the patient does not feel any pain
di scomfort.
Do not use orange prana in treating eye problems. This may ult in irreversible eye damage!
224
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF I'RAN IC m :AI.I NlI
IVANCED PRANIC IIEALING
FLOATER
T!': APPENDICITIS
Clean t he ajna chakra, the eyes and the temple minor chakru s Energize the eyes through the ajna chakra with white prann II , with light whitish green prana for ten breathing cycles. Rep"al the treatment three times a week.
I.
EYE INFECTION 1 . Since it is clairvoyantly observed that som e pa tiente suffering from eye infection have holes in their outer au ras, apply general sweeping. A portion of the health aura droops and the health rays are entangled . Very often the application of general sweeping makes the difference between the rapid rate of healln and the much slower rate of healing. 2. Apply localized sweeping and energize with light wh iti.h green prana for about four breathing cycl es, then wit h light whitish blue prana for about four breathing cycles. Use light violet prana if the infection is severe. 3. Cleanse and energize the back head chakra wit h white prana. Visualize the eyes being energized and becoming brighter, 4. If there is Ulceration, energiz e with light violet prana for about five breathing cycles and th en with light whitish greenish yellow prana for about five br eathing cycles in order to accelerate the healing of the wound.
22 5
Apply general sweeping several times.
:l. Apply localized sweeping on the solar plexus chakra, t he vll l chakra, the appendix and Ih e enti re abdo minal area.
3.
Apply localized sweeping on the ent ire spine.
1. Energize the front solar plexus chak ra and th e navel ,nkra with light green prana for t en breathing cycles for each 11m, and with light blue prana for about ten breathing cy cles ach chak ra. Visuali ze th e prana going to the appendix . This VNy important since th e solar plexus and navel chakras control I energize the large intestines including th e appendix. That is 'y II person suffering from acute appendiciti s initially feels pain n the solar plexu s area. 5 . Energize the solar plexu s chakra and th e navel chakra lUi light whitish red prana for abo ut two breathing cycles for <'II eha kra in order to strengthen the append ix and the large al ine . 6 . Energize the meng mein chakra and the basic chakra lI.h white prana for about five br eathing cycles. Do not activat e 'em since the splee n chakra has been energized by energizing h u navel chakra . Repeat the t reatment o nce every o ne and a half hours for
1I11 next six hours. When treatments are repeated within a few 5. Energize the navel chakra, the solar plexus chakra, t hll hand chakras, and the sole chakras to strengthen the body', defense system.
CHRONIC RED EYES Clean and energize the eyes through the ajna chakra with light wh itish blue prana for ten breathing cy cles. Ap ply tr eat . rnents three times a week.
iours, do not again energize th e basic chakra and the rneng mein [mkra. Repeat th e entire treatment twi ce a day for the next few I,ys. ·0 0 not energize with orange prana because it may accelerate . I,,: n ipiu ring of the inflamed appendix. It is advisable to have h,' patient ho spitalized during th e treatments so that his cond iion can be clo sely monitored by med ical doctors, and em ergen cy ,rgery can be perfo rmed if the sit uat ion requires it. T his treatment is used for healin g acute appendicitis that uho ut one day o ld . If th e pati ent has already been in pain for
226
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC II EALl Nl:
IIVANCED PRANIC IIEALING
227
several days before approaching a pranic healer, it is b etter It he will be operated on since the risk of rupture of the inflam.. 1 append ix is greater. '
1...msed thoroughly with the u se of your .fingers. Visualize whit e lI"ht o r prana coming o ut of your fin gers a nd removing the diseased bio plasmic matter.
Patients who have been recently healed should avoid heavy or strenuous exercises for the next few months. Heavy meals shou ld also be avoided. They should have daily vowel movemen ts and should ' go back for further treatment if they experience slight pain in the appendix area.
3. Clean t he fr ont and back heart chakras an d t he fro nt J,,1 ba ck solar plexus chakras.
For treating chro nic appendicitis, just energize the solnr plexus and navel chakras with light whitish green prana, and liRht whitish blue prana.
4. Energize the heart through the back heart chakra with prana for about ten breathing cycles. Visualize the heart lid th e front heart chakra as very bright and healthy.
Wh Ito
5.
Or energize the heart wit h light whitish green prana fo r
bout seven breathing cycles and then with light whitish red prana )r about five breathing cycles. Light green prana breaks down
la"'lsed bioplasmic matter and also directly and indirectly causes HEART AILMENTS
hI. physical obstruction to dissolve. Light red pra na strengthens
Ill. heart. There are many types of heart ailment s. Heart ailmen t s mny manifest as heart's muscle failure due to clotting or obstruct ion in the heart arteries, as heart infection, as malfunctioning of ti ll' heart valves, as heart congestion eit he r of the left or right heart , as hole or holes in the dividing wall between the left and the right heart, and as irregular beating of the heart or as heart enlargem ent. In pranic healing, these problems manifest as either pran lc heart congestion or depletion or both simultaneously. With prani.. heart co ngest io n, the emphasis sho uld be on localized sweepin g, With pranic heart depletion, the emphasis should be on energiz ing. Apply localized sweeping on the front a nd back heart chakras, and on the solar plexus chakra . In treating heart ailments, white prana or light green prana and light red prana are usually used in energizing. Orange prana is not u sed here because of ih possible damaging effect on the heart. 1. Scan the heart thoroughly . The heart must be scanned with one or two fing ers to locate the small troubled spots. To help you locate these, ask the patient what specific spots hu rt.
2 . Apply general sweeping. Clean thoroughly the fronL heart chakra. The small spots with pranic d epletion must h"
6.
Energize the solar plex us chakra with white prana for
nout five breathing cycles. Rescan the heart to determine wh ether
hns been properly and thoroughly t reated . Get feedback from tlent .
7. For inflamed heart, clean and energize the heart with hl, whitish green prana for five breathing cycles, a nd with light hltish blu e prana for seven breathing cycles. 8. For heart with d efective valve, o r with phy sical wounds hol es, energize with light whitish green -violet prana for about IfH) br eathing cycles , with light green -yellow pran a for three uhing cy cles, and with light whitish red prana for three breathcyc les, The treatment should be given at least three times a week. the patient cannot b e disturbed, ene rgize the heart by visualfill the back of the patient in front of your palm. Pranic healing very effect ive for heart ailme nts. Usually, the patient fully rovers in a short t ime.
228
TilE ANCmNT
S CmNC~;
ANIl AllT O F PItANI C m :ALl Nl:
HIGH BLOOD PRESSURE Although di etary habit a nd ten sion are major factors co n tributing to high blood pressure, this ailment manifests as pran hco ngest io n and overactivation of the meng mein r-hakra , Some times, the meng mein chakra is overactivated and d epl eted. Th •• author experienced high blood pressure wh en he was experiment ing on activating and energizing of the basic, m eng mein anti splee n chakras. The et her ic body or t he bioplasmic bod y wl1l'n seen clairvoyantly was very bright and glaring. Because of th, · ext remely high pranic ene rgy level, the body felt quite weak anti concentration was difficult.
If the ba sic chakra is d epl eted, then there is gen eral prankd epletion of the body. If the basic ch akra is quite active, then there is gen eral pranic co ngest io n of the body.
1. If there is gen eral pranic depletio n o f the body, apply advanced general .sweeping. This is quite important since tI", bioplasmic body is weak a nd d epl eted . 2. If there is gen eral pra nic co ngest io n of the body, apply elementary gen eral sweeping. The inten t ion is to remove execs pranic energy. 3. Scan the meng mein cha kra frontally to determine th« degree of pranic co ngest io n an d then scan it sideways to det..r· mine the size or degree of overactivation. An overa ctivat ed meIIK mein chakra sometimes has a di am eter of five inch es or rnor« while other cha kras are o n ly abo ut three to four inch es in dia m eter. 4. Clean t he m eng mein chakra thoroughly. Inh ib it tI", meng mein cha kra by ene rgizing with blu e prnna, co upled with a strong inten ti o n o f inhibit ing the d egree of act ivity o f t he mcnK mein chakra a nd visual izing it getting smaller . Visualiz e t he mcnK mein chakra as becomin g sma ller to ab ou t t hree inch es in diameter a nd also dimmer or not t oo bri ght. Rescan the m eng mein chakru , Once th e m eng m ein chak ra is successfully inh ibited . t he blood pressure will gradu ally drop . Rep eat th is procedure aft er on .. "
IIVANCED PRANIC m :ALING
229
hours since th ere is a big possibility that th e meng nwin chakra will become o ueract iuate d again.
'11I0
5. Scan the head. Some of the major head chakras are rongested while some are depleted . Clean and ene rgize the head mnjor chakra s with wh it e prana.
6. To ensure that the blood vessels in the brain area remain pllahle and strong, energ ize the back head chakra witb light whitish green prana for two breathing cycles, with light wbitish 1(.1 prana for two breathing cycle s to strengthen the blood vessels, IIlI with light whitish blue prana for about three breathing cycles I,ll give pliability to the blood vessels, Visualize the pranic energy IIl'rgizing the ent ire brain. Resean the head area and remove )U' I ~SS
prana.
7 . The heart is usually a ffec ted. It may be co ngest ed or ip lct ed , or both. Apply pranic treatment on the heart. 8. If the solar plexus cha kra and t he basic chakra are IIl'lded , clean and energize them with white prana. Repeat the treatment thrice a week . Send the patient to a doctor for co mpleme ntary treatment. h" patient should strictly watch hi s di et .
IITlmIOSCLEROSIS (HARDENING OF THE ARTERIES)
1.
Apply gen eral sweeping.
2. Energize th e ajna chakra with light whitish green prana three breathing cycles , with light whitish red prana for three ~thing cycles, and with light whitish blu e prana for three euthing cycles.
:1. Do the same with the back heart chakr a , the solar xu s chakra and the basi c chakra. Rep eat the treatment twi ce a
·.·k,
230
231
Tim AN CI ENT s cm NCt; ANlJ ART OF I'RANIC IIt;ALlNl:
ARTHRITIS OR RHEUMATISM Arthritis and rheumatism are very broad t erm s used in relation to muscle pain and disorder of the joints. Disord er of the joinh may be caused by solidification of liquid calcium, accumulation or urates or chalky salts of uric acid or the degen eration of th« protective shock-absorbing cartilage in th e joints. Arthritis or rheumatism manifests as pranic deplet ion or th e minor chakras on th e arms and legs and partial pranic deplo tion in some major chakras, Minor chakras related to th e arm s are th e finger chakrns, hand chakras, elbow chakras, armpit chakras, back neck chakrn , secondary throat chakra , and nipple chakras, Patients with joint. ailments in the arms may have deplet ed nipple chakras, back neck chakra and -secondary t hroat chakra , Som etimes, it is necessary to energize the tip of th e affect ed finger. Minor chakras related to th e legs are th e to e chakras, solo chakra s, knee chakras , hip chakras, and perin eum chakra. Some times, it is necessary to energize th e tip of th e affected too, Major chakras related to joint ailments are th e basic chakra, meng mein chakra, kidneys, sex chakra, navel chakra, solar plexus chakra, and ajna chakra, Sometimes, patients with heart ailments o r with high blood pressure may have d ifficulty moving or raising th e left or riRhL arms. So please take note, some patients with this ailment may hIt susceptible to stroke. Orange and redpranas are used in treating mild arthritis or rheumatism. Fo r simpl e muscl e pain or mild arthritis in th" joints, apply localized sweepin g and energize with light whitish orange prana th en with light whitish red prana. In most cases, the relief is immediate. The patient may sometimes feel a cold energy or current being expelled from the affected part.
1.
For more severe case, apple general sweeping .
2. Apply localized sweeping on th e entire affected arm 1"1l. Clean and energizethe painful joints with light greenish 11", prana th en with light violet prana, The use of too much nge and red prana is not advisable for it may aggravate the ndition, Thorough cleansing or sweeping is very important. 3. Apply thorough sweeping and energizing on the basic, ,v d, solar plexus, and spleen chakras, and the liver with light hlUsh ,red prana and then with light whitish violet prana. Repeat nLment three tim es a week . 4. Pranic healing is very effecti ve and fast in healing Iritis and rheumatic ailme nts. Hundreds of millions of people Iering from this painful ailment could quickly and easily be lleved or cured by this treatment.
W AND OLD SPR AIN I . Apply localized sweeping on th e affected part and on o uffccted min or chakras, 2. Energize with o range-red prana for about seven breathcycles or until th e pain complete ly disappears. Energizing the rct ed part d irectl y is quite effect ive in producing instant relief. often, the relief for new sprain is instantaneous and permant as long as the patient do not immediately overexert the tl'tl part.
232
TilE ANCIENT SCIENC I': AND ART OF PRANIC ImAI.I NC I
,
3 . For old sprain, use light greenish red prana. It may require several treatments to produce permanent rel ief. HOW TO STRENGTHEN THE LEGS
1. Activate and energize the basic and perineum min or cha kras wit h light red prana for seven breathing cycles for each cha kra, This will cause an increase in the flo w of pranic energy from the basic chakra to the legs. 2. Energize the sex chakra with wh ite prana for about. seven breat hing cycles. A substantial portion of prana from tI", sex chakra automatically goes down to the legs.
J)VANCED PRANIC ilEA LING
233
3. Energize the hand chakras, the elbow chakras and the nip ple chakras with light red prana for about five breathing cycles per chakra. This pranic treatment can be used to treat ann pnrulysis if the cause is of local origin. A person with arm ailments Ilk,> old sprain usually has depleted nipple chakra. Yo u ' may olll'rgize and strengthen the entire ann through the nipple m inor chnkra, Visualize light red prana going into the nipple minor rhu kra and to t he entire arm.
FIWE R
1.
Apply general sweeping several times with whitish green
rnna and t hen with whitish blue prana.
2. To clean, soothe, cool and disinfect the entire body; and energize the front solar plexus 'chak ra with light whitish xm prana for about four breathing cycles and then with light hiti sh blu e prana for four breathing cycles.
l~a ll
3.
Apply localized sweeping on the entire legs with whitish
orange prana.
4. Ene rgize the sole, knee and h ip minor chakras on th e lew o r legs wit h light red prana for five breathing cycles for each chakra. T his entire pranic treatment can be used to heal weak legs and paralysis of the legs. If the paralysis is localized or do e. not invo lve t he brain or the spine, then the recovery will be fast. .
HOW TO STRENGTHEN THE ARMS
1.
3. To eliminate and expel diseased bioplasmic matter, xills and germs from the body; energize the front solar plexus hnk ra with light whitish orange prana for three breathing cycles. 4 . Energize the navel chakra, the hand chakras and the sole IIckras with white prana for five breath ing cycles for each chakra. 5. If the throat and/or the lungs are affected, then they ould also be treated. The entire treatment may be repeated If one or two hours.
Apply lo calized sweeping on the entireanns.
• 2. Clean the armpit minor chakra by raising the arm of tl1l' patient and by applying localized sweeping on the armpit. Thi. is very important. Difficulty in raising the arm could be cau sed hy pranic congestion or depletion on the armpit minor chakrn. Cleans ing a nd energizing this minor chakra usually bring instant re lief.
H. Wit h infants or children just use white prana for the l'1(1r" trea tment . General sweeping should be emphasized and ,trwi?;n g should be done gently and gradually.
UT I'; PAN CR EATIT IS
Acute pan creat it is is a severe inflammation of the pancreas. patient feels intense pain on the so lar plexus area and t he
234
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF ,PRANI C IIEAI.l NO
back of it. Fever, chill, cold sweat, vomiting and headache un expe rienced . The patien t is in a state of severe shock . This manifests as serio us imbalance of the solar plex us chakra and the entire etheric body or bioplasmic body is affected.
ovANCt;U PRANIC IIEALING
" lI h light green prana for about t en br eathing cy cles and then II h light blue prana for about ten breathing cycle s. If the inWlIlmat io n is ca used by toxins, more green prana sho uld be used 1.0 facilitate the breaking down of the t oxins. 3.
1. Apply general sweeping several times. There will bl noticeable relief after applying general sweeping.
2 . Apply localized sweeping on the solar plexus chakru and energize it with whitish blue prana for twelve breathing cy cle•. Blue prana soothes the pain and inhibits the pancreas from exc reting more digestive juice. Avoid using yellow prana o r orange prana or both. This may stimulate or trigger the pancreas to produce more juice, thereby, making the patient worse. Apply the treatment three times once every three ho urs on the first day. Apply the treatment twice a day on the seco nd day . The patient may be greatly or fully relieved on the first day. Th« rate of healing is usually very fast,
HEPATITIS Inflammation of the liver or hepatitis could be caused by viru s, toxins or prolonged period of excessive alcohol intake. Inflammation manifests as malfunctioning of the solar plexu s cha kra a nd pr anic congestion or depletion of the liver . Prolo nged ailm ent of th e liver may result in the accumulation o f flu ids ill the abd ominal area and the legs. This manifests a s pranic deplet io n around the meng mein chakra, the kidney s, the navel chakra , the abdominal area , the basic chakra , and the legs.
1.
23 5
To strengthen the liver, energize the front solar plexus
urkru and the liver with white prana fo r about four breathing :h' s, In acute hepatitis o r if the inflammation is severe , the I e of pranic co nsumpt io n is very fast. To produce rapid h eal-
11K, the liver and the so lar plexus chakra sho u ld he treated o nce very two hours for the next eight hours. Rep eat the treatment Ilwlcl! a day for the next few days.
4. To st rengt he n the body and to further increas e the rat e healing; energize the nav el chakra, the hand chakras and the II! chakras . This master healing t echniqu e shou ld not be used patients with cirrhosis of the liver . If the kidn ey s are also fectl!d, visualize the prana going t o the kidney s wh en ene rgizing 10 m eng mein chakra. The kidney s sho uld be cleansed befor e ergizing.
5. If the patient has bloated abdo me n and legs, clean and erRize the navel chakra, and the abdom en . Clea n and ene rgize e Hole chakras. Liver ailment sho u ld be treated as ea rly as possibl e. If t he t.ient is young and the liver ailm ent is t reated at it s early sta ge,
;\t all the rate of healing would be very fast ; but if the patie nt is III lind ha s the liver a ilme nt for quite a lime already, th en the I." of healing would likely be slo w and difficult. Th e patient y feel a cert a in degree o f improvem ent but full recovery tak es lot of time . In some cases , it may not be po ssibl e to cu re the lIent at all.
Apply gen eral sweeping several times.
2. Clean and energize the solar plexus chakra and t il liver. The liver is divided into left and right parts. Sometimes, II portion of the liver may be pranical1y co ngest ed while the other part may be pranically depleted. To soothe, disinfect and clenn the liver , ene rgize the front solar plexus chak ra and the liver
LLSTONE I . Apply loca lized swee p ing o n the front solar plexu s kra and the gallbladder .
236
TIlE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC IIEAJ.l NII
2. To soothe, energize the gallbladder through th e fW"1 solar plexus chakra with whitish blue prana for about fou r breath lng cycles. 3. Energize with light whitish green prana for seven brunth Ing cycles, and with light whitish orange prana for abo ut . uv." breathing cycles to facilitate the dissolving of the deposits. '1'" facilitate the gradual removal of the disintegrated stones, ene rgl with whitish yellow prana for one breathing cycle. 4. Apply the treatment once a day. The patient may h relieved completely on the first or second treatment but it should be continued until the stones are completely dissolved , We.t"" , medicine or Chinese herbal medicine should preferably be tllk. " . to supplement the treatment.
PEPTIC ULCER Peptic ulcer is ulceration of the stomach or of th e duo denum lining. Ulceration of the stomach lining is called ga. trl. Ulcer, while Ulceration of the duodenum lining is called duode nat ulcer. . Peptic Ulcer manifests as malfunctioning of the solar phll U chakra and the stomach minor chakra, Mild gastric or duodenal ulcer:
area.
1.
Scan the front solar plexus chakra and the abdoml nnl
2. Apply localized sweeping on the solar plexu s chnkr nnd on the affected area and energize with white prana or wlU, light whitish blue prana. The relief is usually instantaneous rll mild cases. Apply treatment twice a week.
237
2. Energize the solar plexus chakra and the affected area with light whitish blue prana for about seven breathing cycles, with light whitish greenish violet prana or light whitish violet prana for about ten breathing cycles, then with light whitish red prana for about two breathing cycles. Visualizing the wound as healing would also be helpful. Apply treatment three times a .week.
3. To accelerate th e healing process, use the master healing technique. HERNIA Hernia is a bulging out or a protrusion in the lower abdomen due to the weakened or ruptured abdominal wall. There are many types of hernias. In umbili cal hernia which is common in babies, the protrusion occurs in the navel area; in incisional hernia, the bulge occurs in th e abdominal scar area; in inguinal hernia, th e protrusion occurs in the area where th e thigh joins the abdomen and may tend to go into the scrotum. 1. Scan the affected area , the navel chakra, the sex chakra, and the basic chakra.
2.
Energize the basic chakra with light red prana.
"
3. Apply localized sweeping on the affected part, on the navel chakra, and on th e sex chakra, These two chakras are partial- . Iy depleted. Energize th e navel chakra and th e sex chakra with ~reenish red prana and visualize the pranic energy going to the nCCected part. Energize the affected part directly with greenish red prana.
4. ~rcenish
If th e perin eum is affected , clean and energize it with red prana.
5. Repeat th e treatment thrice a week. It may tak e several months for th e pati ent to be complete ly healed.
Severe cases:
1.
ADVANCED PRANIC IIEALING
Apply localized sweeping.
Hernia should be treated as early as possible. It may develop Into strangulated hernia if th e hole is quite small; th ereby, block . \
238
TilE ANCIENT SClf:NCt: ANIl AliT OF 1'lIANIC m ;ALINC:
ing t he flow of blood and gangren e may oc cur.
?39
AnVANCEIl PRANIC HEALING
prnni c healing is still required t o pre vent or reduce the possib ility of st o ne formation in the u rin ary system in the future.
STONES IN THE UR INARY SYSTEM Stones may occur in t he kidneys, ureter and bladd er. T hey may cause cuts, inflammation and may block the flow o f urine, I. Scan the meng mein chakra, the kidneys, the sex chakrn, t he b ladder, the ureter, and the low er abd o m ina l area.
Apply localized sweeping on the meng mein chakrn, 2. kid ne ys and the sex chakra. To soo t he and disinfect the affected kidney o r kidneys, energize with light whitish blue prana fo r ab out seven breathing cycles. 3 . To gradually disintegrate the obstruction, ene rgize till' kid neys through the rneng mein chakra with light green prana fo r ten breat hing cycles and then with light orange prana fo r abo ut ten breathing cycles . 4 . If the obstruction is in the ureter, ene rgize throu gh the meng mein chakra and the sex chakra, Energize also till' a ffect ed part directly. 5 . Apply the sam e treatment for stones in the bladder Yo u may also use double ene rgizing on the a ffect ed parts d irectl y. Repeat the treatment once or twi ce a day. The patien t may bn relieved on the first treatment but it sho uld be co nt inued until t he obstruction ha s been co mpletely removed. Chinese h erbal medicine or western medicine may be taken to supplem ent pran ktreatment. For infants, ch ildre n , and very old people, ju st en ergize U", kidney s directly without passing through the meng mein chakru. Ovcrene rgizing the men g mein chakr a or ene rgizing the basic lind me ng mein chakras of infants, children and very old people muy cause severe high blood pressure. Modern medi cal treatment a nd eq u ipment that can quick ly an d safely di sintegrate the st ones in t he kidney s are available bul
INFLAMMATION OF T HE URINAR Y
SY~TEM
Inflammation of the bladder o r kidney co u ld be ca used by Infect ion, toxins, and sto nes. I.
Apply gen eral sweeping on the ent ire body .
Apply localiz ed sweeping o n the rnen g mein cha kra 2. 'Illd on the kidney s. 3. To soot he a nd disinfect the kidney s, energize the kidneys through the meng mein chakra with light whi t ish green prnna for abo ut five breathing cy cles, then with light whi ti sh blu e prana for abo ut ten breathing cycles. App ly prani c t reatlIIent three t imes a week . 4. T o soot he, d isinfect, an d st rengt he n t he bladder; app ly he same pranic t reat me nt on the bladder th rough the sex cha kra. 5. To facilitate th e eliminat io n o f fluid s in the body, unurgize the kid neys th rou gh t he men g mein cha kra with yellow runge prana , As mentioned ear lier, fo r infants, children, and very old people just energize the kidney s directly without passing through the meng mein cha kra, Overen ergizing th e meng mein chakra o r energizing the basic and m en g mein chakras of infants, children, lid very old people may cause severe high blood pressure.
l lo:AF NESS There arc several ca uses for deafness, and prank treatme nt ur each type o f deafness is more o r Jess the same . Dea fness mifest s as ma lfu nction ing o f the ear minor cha kra a nd t her e I usuall y slight pranic depl etion o n t he ba ck head minor cha kra.
240
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANI C HEALINlI
This is seen as muddy orange on the ear minor chakra. It may manifest as pranic depletion or congestion or both simulta neously. A normal ear chakm appears as light red. In acupuncture, th e ear is used as a source chakra for red prana to treat ailment s in the other parts of the body. The author has encount ered a strange case in which a woman patient suffered a bad fall on her basic chakra area when she waR still a young child . When seen clairvoyantly, on e half of the basic chakra was relatively alright while the other half was quite depleted and such case occurs very rarely. The root of the basic chakra was slightly off centered. She was partially deaf on t h right ear, the right eye was worse than the left eye, the right bust was smaller than th e left on e, and the right leg was short er than the left one. The sex chakm was also malfunctioning. Obviously, if her ailments are to be gradually cured, the basic chakra has to be normalized. The basic chakra was cleansed and energized. By the use of the will, th e root of the basic chakra was gradually centered. Spinal adjustment was also applied . , I
1. For slight deafness, apply localized sweepin g on th e ear minor chakra and on the back head chak ra. Orange' prann is used in treating mild deafness du e to fluid in th e middle ear cavit y. 2.
Energize the affected ear with light whitish green prana
Cor three breathing cycles, and with light whitish oran ge prana
for about twelve breathing cycles.
•
3. Apply localized sweeping on the back head chakra and energize with white prana for about five breathing cycles. Visualize the prann going to the affected ear. The back head chakra plays an important role in energizing th e entire head area including th e eyes and ears. Do not overenergize th e back head chakra since the projected prana is localized in the head area. 4. For severe deafness, apply the same tr eatment as the preceding case. However instead of using orange prana, use light violet or greenish violet and greenish yellow pranas. Energize the afCected ear with greenish violet prana for ab out twelve breathing cycles, with greenish yellow prana for about th ree breath -
ANCED PRANIC HEALING
241
~'Ycles. This treatment can be used for ruptured eardrum or Q deafness. Most patients may experience immediate and substantial rovement with their hearing. Sometimes, the treated ear hears Lor than the other "normal ear" but this improvement is I lly temporary in most cases. Treatments have to be repeated IV "very two or three days until the healing is complete.With ,til prana, the improvement does not last unless orange prana lCnish violet prana is used. J\DACHE, TOOTHACHE, STOMACHACHE, NSTIPATION AND DIARRHEA For headache and toothache, apply localized sweeping and llizing on the affected area and affected chakras with light n prana, then light blue prana, Many patients can be instantly Itved ju st by sweeping only. For abdominnl problem, the solar us and navel chakras should be treated. For gas pain, use Ib lLe prana, For diarrhea, use whitish green prann , and whitish " prana or greenish blue prana. Do not use orange prana on h ea pat ient s. Cleansing or localized sweeping should be I"hasized . For constipation, energize the front solar plexus 1< ra and the navel chakra with orange prann or yellow prana, t he large intestine has been weakened, energize it with light lIm ns.
..
Apply general sweeping with whiti!!h blue prana. Blue I\a is soothing and sleep inducing. Do not apply general sweepwith g,eenishblue prima oecause with some patients it may' disruptive effects. 1.
2. If the patient is depleted, energize the solar plexus I kra, the navel chakra, the sole chakras and the hand chakras ,h white prana. 3. If the crown chakra or the other head chakras are eted, clean and energize them with whitish blue prana.
212
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND AItT OF PRANIC m ;AI.I NIi
CONCUSSION For fresh co ncussion, cleanse and energize the affected pUll with light blu e, light green, and light orange pranas. Repeat II,,, treatment several times for th e next few hours. For old or hhu-k e ned concussion, energize th e affected part with green , O rtlllWU a nd red pranas. Do not use orange prana on the head area. FAINTING Energize the navel chakra with white prana to revive th u person. A portion of the prana will go to the solar plexus th,." to th e head area. Simultaneously th e spleen cha kra is automnl.l cally energized which in turn energizes th e other chakra. Th l. is one of the safest techniques. You may also ene rgize th e back head chak ra which will energize the ent ire head area. This method is faster bu t there I th e possibility of overenergizing the ent ire head' area. This tech niqu e should be done with caut ion. If a person is unconscious due to concussion, energize till' navel chakra with white prana. Energize the palms and the sol". with light red prana, DROWNING First aid measur e should be simu ltaneo usly applied with th, pranic tream ent. Energize inten sely the back solar plexu s chn k ru and the back heart chakra with red prana. If the subject is stili not revived, then use th e "mast er healing technique" . FOOD POISONING Clean th e abdomen and energize th e solar plexu s cha kra , u," l th e navel chakra with greeni sh blu e pran a for as lon g as necessary The relief is usually fast . If the condition worsen s, bring th patient to the hospital immediately.
AIlVANCED PRANI C HEALING
243
flKIN BLEMISHES Clea n and energize the affected skin with light green pra na, with light orange prana, th en with light red prana for about five breathing cycles each . The surrounding skin area should also be -lea nsed and energized to facilitate the healing process. ''''ILEPSY
1. To a lleviate ep ilept ic condition or to su bstant ially n-duce the frequency of ep ilept ic attack s, ap ply gen eral sweepInR. 2.
Clean the ent ire head are a.
3 . En ergize th e ajn a, th e foreh ead and the crown chakras, and the back head chakras which is located at the center of th e huck of th e head with whitish green prana for two breathing 'ycles and with whitish violet prana for five breath ing cy cles for nch chakra. You should visualiz e th e right brain and the left hrnin bein g equalized . With epileptic patient, one side of th e hrain is partially depl eted while th e othe r side is partially conw" sted . 4. Clean and energize th e solar plexus cha kra and th e heart .hnkra with whitish pink prana for five breathing cycles for eac h .hukra , The front heart chakra should be energized through the huck heart chakra .
II
5. Che ck th e ent ire sp ine . Apply pranic treatment twi ce week for th e next several months.
UMMARY
1.
Basic Prin ciples in Pranic Healing
Cleansing and energiz ing are th e basic prin ciples in 'llnic healing. Diseased bioplasmic matter or di seased et he ric mutte r are removed from the affected chakras and parts. T he
244
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
affected chakras and parts are energized with prann. By healing or by repeated treatments on the bioplasmic body, the visible physical body is healed or gradually healed. 2.
Basic techniques in Prnnic Healing
healing energy or prana and requests to be used as a healtrument, Combination of lhlng and invocative technique.
a. Sensitizing the hands b. Scanning c.
major chakras and relevant minor chakra vital organs spine
Cleansing or Sweeping - General sweeping - Localized sweeping Energizing with Prnna
d.
-
Drawing in and projecting prana Redistributing patient's prana by redistributive sweeping.
Stabilizing the Projected Prnna
e.
-
Will Technique Blue Prana Technique
En~rgizing with prana involves two simultaneous actions: lhat of drawing in prana and that of projecting prana. 1. Drawing in Prann: - Chakral Technique. Prnna is drown in through a ehakra and projected out through another chakra, This is done jn erely by concentrating on the chakra with the intention of drawing in prana, The hand chakra or the basic chakra is usually t sed . : - Pranic Breathing. Prana is drawn in through all parts of the body by using breathing techniques. -
Invocative Technique. The healer prays for
245
NCBI) PRANIC HEALING
chakral
technique,
pranic
2. Projecting Prana Hand Chakra Finger Chakras Energizing can also be done by redistributing the patient's prana to the affected part using redistributive sweeping. In invocative pranic healing, the healer invokes the help of ., mighty spiritual beings in cleansing and energizing the 10!11..
NEED TO REGULATE PRANIC HEALING A certificate of proficiency in pranic healing should be issued healers who have proven themselves to be competent. This \lId preferably be undertaken by a Pranic Healer's Association ,' Y a recognized institute on pranic healing. The public will II ided either by the certificate of proficiency or by the repuLlII of the healer. But a healer should not be prevented from :t.icing pranie healing because he does not have a certificate. I~ •• it is proven that he is incompetent and ineffective; thereby, lriving his patients of proper treatment. There are many healers do not know anything about pranic healing but have pered ma ny "miraculous" healing. Since pranic healing is also a form of spiritual ministry, hould not be legislated. To do so would tantamount to inlKing on the religious right of the healers and of the patients. !'ULARlZING PRANIC HEALING T he world is filled with a lot of sick and suffering people. ,loh benefits can be obtained by popularizing and adopting
246
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC m;AI.INC I
pranic healing! This can b e accomplished by t ra nslating th l. work on ' pranic healing to the different major languages: Chine",', Spanish, Japanese, Russian, German, Fr ench, Arabic, etc. . . Ttl further disseminate and enco urage the practice of pranic heal ing, a Pranic Healers' Association ca n be esta b lished in each country and in each major city. Work shops on pranic healing should also be conducted regularly to train people in pran ic h ea ling,
HAPTER EIGHT
Testimonials
It is furth er recommended that the Ministry of Healt h or
similar government agen cy of each co u nt ry shou ld invest igate th .. effectivity of pranic healing and, if it is found effective, to ad opt it as a complementary and economical form of treat ment I" government hospitals and clinic s. It is also advantageo us for doctors and nurses to learn and practice pranic healin g sin 1''' it would make them more effec t ive in th eir work. It is extremely beneficial if at least one person in each family knows pranic hrn! ing since it can rapidly heal or relieve many simp le and sev,', ailments. For those who have gained pro ficie ncy in pranic healin g, its great benefits can be spread to others hy putting up prankhealing centers at your own home.
DATE: NAME : AGE: OCCUPATION: ADDRESS :
CASE:
In ancient tim es, esoteric teachings and practices were taught only to close disciples:
December 23, 1986 Mrs. Pia A. Victoria 59 Housew ife 26 Branches Street GSIS Village, Proj , 8 Quezon City, Metro Manila
Glauco ma & Chest Pains
Q : What was your health condition before ? Pin: I had glauco ma and frequent che st pains which were
o ubling me .
Jesus replied. " The knowledge of th e secrets of the kingdom of heaven has been given to you, but not to th em." (Matthew 13:11)
"Do not give dogs what is sacred; do not thro w your pearls to pigs. If you do. th ey may trample them under th eir feet, and th en tum and tear you to pieces. " (Matth ew 7:6)
Q: Did you consult a medical do cto; or a specialist before r ing a pranic healer ? Pia: Yes, and the doctor di agnosed my eye ailm ent as glau0 ') " " 1. With regards to my che st pains, I had a general medical nmination last 1985 and there was no indi cation that I had a hunrt ailment o r one d eveloping. How ever , during the said check. p, I did not go through a n electroca rd iogram exam inat io n. In the beginning, I was skeptical abo ut pranic healing so r n try, I had my eyes treated first . Q: What did you feel wh en pranic healing was applied on ur eyes ? Pia: I felt some relief or a soot hing effe ct, then later on
248
THE ANCU;NT SCIE~CE AND ART OF PRA NI C m :AI.I NU
I could see a "little brighter." Sometimes, the effects were "01 immediate since I felt the relief thirty minutes or an hour lot", Q: How often do you get this pranlc treatment? Pia: It depends whether I was busy or not. It was vur irregular. Before, I used to have it once a week, then later once in three weeks.
0"
DATE: NAME: AGE: OCCUPAT ION : ADDRESS:' CASE :
Q: Is your eye ailment getting better or is there an 1/11 provement after pranic treatment? Pia: My right eye is okay now but there "seems" to 10.. no improvement with my left eye. Everytime I get tense u,,,1 excited, the condition of my .left eye worsens.
My frequent chest pain s were also cu red after pra nic tflll\l ments because I do not experience th em anymore or if ever they recur, it's very, very seldom. Previously, I used to have till"" very often and since there was no cha nge in my lifestyle, th, ',.. was no medication token or applied except for the several pm"l, treatments, then I am certain that this could have been the efr..... of such treatments.
I hereby certify that the facts herein mentioned in th e ceding interview ar e true and co rrect.
,
(Signed) PIA A. VICTOR IA
p'"
249
n ;sfIM ONIA L
Dec ember 26, 1986 Allan C. Caiiete 24 Student 3-1 Stanford Street Cubao, Quezon City, Metro Manila
One Day Old Wound
Q: Describe th e condition of your wound before the "pranic treatment". A llan: The width of the wound on the sole of my left foot was ab out 1/4 of an inch. There was a little bleeding but it was very painful which was caused by a small seashell particle left Inside t he wound and I had tried all th e mean s within my reach to remove it but to no avail. No medicine was administered hefore, during, and after the applicat ion of pranic healing. (I stepped on a sharp seashe ll in o ne of the beach es at Agoo , La Union.) Q: How old was th e wound when it was treated with pranic 'waling and was it infected before the treatment ? A I/an: The wound was one day old and I could no longer usc my left foot . It was not infected but symptoms showed that It may lead to infection. Q : Who administered pranic healing o n your wound ? What happened during and after the treatm ents ? A I/an: I received tw o successive prani c tr eatments. T he first one was given by Sondra Torrijos (author 's st ude nt in pran ic hea ling). Actually, the process was just an experime nt on rapid lu-nling which was suggested by t he author to Sandra. Approxi mute ly, it took Sandra tw o hou rs to relieve me of t he pain , to lose and to partially heal the wound. But since th e seashell part. lei.' was still inside it , I st ill have slight difficulty in walking.
T he second treatment was ad ministered by th e author a nd It o nly too k him one and a half hours to rapidly and completely hual my wo und right before my eyes! During th e process (bot h Illl' first and th e seco nd treatments), I could feel a ti ckling, tin-
\
250
TilE ANCIENT SCIE NCE AND AitT O F 1'ltANIC m :AI.I NlI
gling sensat ion even if there wa s no skin co ntact because 1./,,, distance between the healer 's hand and my wou nd was ah oll' o ne cent imeter apart. After the second treatment , [ could r,·,·1 very little pain and my left foot could be used fo r walk ing altllill even if t he seashe ll particle was st ill inside t he healed w o und After tw o day s [ removed th e seas he ll with my fin gerna ils. Q: What can you say about th e pranic treatments adm l/l istered on your wound ? A llan: The tech nique is very st range but th e result is amll', ing and very effec ti ve. In the ordinary method o f treating II wound. it would take several day s to have it healed, but with pranic healing, it took o nly about three and a half hours to 111'111 th e wound right before my eyes.
[ hereby certify th at t he facts ment ioned in t he preced inu inte rview are t rue and co rrect .
251
" :ST IMONIALS
DATE: NAME: AG E: OCCUPATION: ADDRESS:
CASE:
Decem ber 26, 1986 RomuaJdo Canete 49 Musician 3-1 Stanford St reet Cubao, Qu ezon Cit y, Metro Manila
Cardiac Injury
Q: What was your health condit io n before and wh en that ? Romualdo: There was severe pain in the area around my Ight chest a nd [ felt a s if my half body was being paralyzed . My lood pr essure wa s higher t han no rma l, th e beating of my heart 11 M faster than normal, and I per spired abno rma lly. The area und my hips wa s ach ing, too . [ wa s totally very sick t hen. his happened last Sep tember 198 5. ('8
Q: Did you consult a m edical do ctor, o r a spec ialist about illness befo re seeing a pranic healer? If so, why did you see pranic heater th en ? Romuald o : Yes, I first co nsu lted a card io logist, th en a unic healer for t reat me nt b ecau se my so n, Allan, recomm end ed I ~ healer. Besides I wan t ed to reco ver imm ediat ely fro m my 1I"'"s. Since I also wanted to compare both method s, I was ing my card io logist and my pran ic healer a lternately. But I :1 not inform my card iolog ist th at [ was having prani c treatnt s, t oo. IIr
(Signed ) AL LAN C. CANETE
Q : What was th e diagno sis o f yo ur cardiologist and the rente healer ? Can you give so me co mme nts aho ul th e two meth -
o f treatment adm inistered 10 you ? lt om ualdo : The card iologist an d the pran ic healer had lruost th e same findi ngs. Th e fo rmer told me th at I have a card iac ury and th e latter told me th at t he re is so met h ing w ron g with >' heart becau se o f so me cho lestero l depo sits in it. How ever , 1/ ca rdio log ist did 1I0t discove r t he pa in a ro u nd my hips t hat had n tr oubling me for q uite so me li me , but th e healer did .
252
TilE ANCIENT
SCIENC ~;
.
AND AIt'r OF PItANI C IIEALI NCI
After an electrocardiogram examination, the cardiologln prescribed various kinds of medicines and cautioned me to ta ku them religiously to pr event future fatal heart attack, He "I... told me to go on a strict diet. During my last visit to the cardiologist, he mad e a remark on my rapid recovery as compared with other patients. Usu nlly those who have illness same as mine were hospitalized and hnd not yet recovered by that time. I was also surprised with t he X.my result conducted by my compa ny since I was certain of a " hea rt damage" indication but it only tells of a "shadow " and that l alii [it to work. The said X·my was taken around the first week "r December, 1986 and this was my first one since th e time I hlle! recovered from my illness . I remembered what the pranic helll,'r said on my last visit, "You are already cured !"
How many healing sessions were administered to you by the pranic healer? Romualdo: I cannot rem ember the number of pr an ic trent ments administered to me but I am sure that I had been seeing th" healer for treatment in less than a month, maybe fou r to fiv times. Q:
Q: Who treat ed yo u? What did you feel during and alter the pranic treatments? Romualdo: It was Mike Nator (healer friend of th e author) who treated me first while th e succeeding treatments were dOT'" by the author. After th e fir st two treatments, I felt th e relief frolll all the physical dis com forts I had before because the feeling of numbness was gone and th e pain was. lessened . I did not f",d anything during the succeeding treatments.
Presently. I have been doing things which I could not Ill" form before like climbing the ov erpass, running without pant.ing , a nd carry ing or pu shing heavy things. The pain around my hi" . vanished but it co mes back only when ever I eat salty and fatl y food .
253
~:HTIMO N IALS
After my rapid recovery , I have not gone back to my card iol, l ~ ist nor to my pranic heal er. I am still taking th e prescribed flll~licine
but very irregularly.
Q: What do you think is th e role of pranic healing on the lI/lid recovery of your ailm ent? Romualdo : I think pranic healing played a great role on my list recovery. Just like the comment of my cardiologist about my lipid recovery from cardiac injury. Ordinarily, patients with lnrdiac injury should be hospitalized, And it would take them ~o n siderab le time to recover from such illness . In my case, I was Hot hospitalized and it took me only less than a month to recover plus the fact that there was no indication of heart damage or injury that appeared in my X.my report. ,
I hereby certify that the facts herein mentioned in the preodi ng interview are true and correct . -
• (Signed) ROMUALDO CANETE
..
25 4
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF paANIC HEAI.INO
DATE : NAME: AGE : OCCUPATION : ADDRESS:
CASE:
January 3, 1987 Raphael N. Acellas 19 Student/Blectronic technician 27-E Harvard Street Cubao , Quezon City. Metro Manila
Student of Pranic Healing
Q : Woo taught you how to heal using pranic healillll' Raphael: I have been healing before I met the author h,' cause I discovered that I have a natural tal ent in hea ling. Never theless, when I had witnessed the author perform in o ne of hi. healing sessions, I became very interested in his techniques sinr« I found it very syst ematic. He does it very professio nally an d with grea t ease . I thought, if he can do it, then I ca n do it a lso. It only took me three healing lesson s to learn the basics, bu t I have to pra ctice more to be proficient.
Q: Woo. introduced you to him ? Raphael : Mike, my uncle. Q: What are th e cases you have handled ? Raphael : Very minor cases like headach e , mu scle pa in, and toot hac he . I had co mpletely hea led two female ad ults wit h head . ach es. I had experienced healing a teenager who su ffered from toothach e due to inf ected gum s and imm ediately after t he t reat ment he felt a substantial relief. Th e pain co mp lete ly d isap peared a fte r abo ut three hours. I had handled three cases o f mu scle pains; with t he fir st one, it was with a t een age boy a nd he was co mplet ely relieved of the pain a fter five hours. With the next t wo cases, I wa s informed that they had been relieved of t he pain temporarily but I had no kn owled ge o f how fast was t he reco very.
Q: What can yo u say about this technique o f healillll? Raphael: You get faster results a nd it is very co nven ien t co mpared to the ordinary method of healing.
255 HT IMONIALS
Q:
What are yo ur futu re plans for yo ur ad vancem ent in
field ? Raphael : To stud y and b e trained furth er in the more :Ivnnccd techniques in o rder to become a proficient pranic
(/11.
I".tler. I hereby cert ify that the facts herein men ti oned in t he pre... Iing interview are t rue a nd co rrect.
(Signed ) RAPHAEL N . ACENAS
256
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRAN IC HEAI.IN'
DATE: NAME: AGE: OCCUPATION: ADDRESS : CASE:
January 3, 1987 Francisco M. Bansuelo, Jr. 33 Driver-mechanic 1654 Instruccion Street Sampaloc, Metro Manila
DATE: NAME: AGE: ADDRESS : OCCUPATION: CASE :
Student of Pranic Healing
Q: Who taUlfht you pranic healing? Francisco: The author. Q: Who introduced you to him? Francisco: A lady friend, Juanita.
What are the cases you have handled ? Francisco: Only minor cases like headache, toothache, II•• pain, and muscle pain. I completely healed two adul t s wllh headaches. My four-year-cld daughter was temporarily reliev« : of her toothache after I gave her pranic healing. I had hand l.. 1 three cases with adults who had muscle pain and they were rt Heved. Q:
Q: What can you say about this method of healing? Francisco: This healing method is much more convenient and cheaper compared to the conventional methods of treatln minor ailments. Everybody can afford it.
Q: What are your future plans for your advancement III this field? Francisco: I want to study and be trained more in order In be proficient in this field of healing. If given the Opportunity lu become a proficient healer, I will share it with the needy or the very poor.
I hereby certify that the facts herein mentioned in th e pro> ceding interview are true and correct.
(Signed) FRANCISCO M. BANSUELO, JR .
257
IMONIAL
January 28,1987 Mrs. Luz Jubay 24
200 Kaliraya Street Quezon City, Metro Manila Housewife
Prevented Possible MiscarriDge
Q: What was ailing you before you consulted a "pranic healer? Luz : I was two months pregnant (my first one), and th e area round my ,abdo men was aching acutely. I was also bleeding. Q: Did you consult a medical doctor first before pranic treatment? Luz: Yes, and th e doctor informed me of a possible mis·arriage. He prescribed a medication to prevent it but wasn't srtain of its potency. I was also advised to take a complete cst and to avoid too much physical exertion. I took several Ioses of the prescribed medication but the pain around my abdomen persisted although the bleeding had stopped.
Q: Did you see a pranic healer immediately after th e medical treatment? What happened during and after the pranic ""tment? Luz: I went to see a pranic healer the day after J had my medical treatment. J had not felt anything during the pranic treatment but the pain around my abdomen disappeared . It has not recurred and now I am already seven months pregnant. A very III lid pain recurs only occasionally if I take long walks and also when J carry or push heavy things. This is probably normal for pregnant women. Q: How many times were you given pranic treatments, and what was the duration for each treatment? Luz : Only once. And it took the healer about five minutes 10 administer it.
Who treated you? Luz: The author. Q:
., 258
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE ANI) ART OF PRANIC IIEALIN(I
Q: What do you think is the role of pranie healing in tI , prevention of your miscarriage? Luz : I think it helped and contributed in a way for th, prevention of my possible miscarriage. I just cannot fully d ot... mine its degree of effectiveness since I had taken three possihl« alternative treatments like th e prescribed medication, co rnp lot.. rest, a~d pranic healing .
259
MT IMONIALS
DATE: NAME: AGE : lJl'ATION: ADDRESS:
CASE:
I hereby certify that the facts herein mentioned in th e Ill" ceding interview are true and correct.
Q:
January 10, 1987 Teofilo P. Velasco 68 Lawyer (Ret.) Chief Legal Offi cer, Phil. Patent Office 118 Paco Street Proj , 2, Quezon City, Metro Manila Heart Ailment and Hardened Muscles
What was your health condition before?
Teofilo : Before both my hands were shaking very obviously;
Iy back, knees, and all down below were aching; my legs were ...eak and the muscles were hardened; and I had frequent and iontinuous chest pains. It started ten years ago even if I was on
(Signed) LUZ R. JUBAY
wdication prescribed by a doctor. Since I had shaky hands, somebody had to assist me when I t my meals because I could not bring the food and drink to my mouth without spilling them. I could not walk faster the way I to do and could not even walk immediately after getting up rom bed.
",I'd
Q: What is your present health condition? Teofi/o : I have improved a lot after the author treated me nd prayed over me several t imes, I can eat alone now without y assistance because my han'ds no longer shake. The muscles of my legs are all right because I can now walk faster. Maybe this is Lhe effect of the energized oil given to me by the author because Ince I started using it last January 1,1987, I felt that the muscles r my legs and feet were loosened and softened. The pain on my back had disappeared but sometimes it recurs when I exert too ni ch effort. I am also getting well from my frequent and contin,l(>I\ S chest pain s because I only experienced it when I am very tired, excited or emotionally upset. Q: Are you still on medication? Teofilo: Yes, but very irregularly. However, there ' is one
I
edieation that had been prescribed by my doctor in which I advised to take everyday till I die. But I feel and believe that t Is not necessary to do so that's why I am not taking the said medication anymore.
Was
260
THE ANCIENT SClt:NCE AND ART OF PRANIC m ; ALl NI
Q:
What did you feel when you were being healed? Teofilo: I felt my body becoming lighter, and my muse being activated. Also, something was being cleansed from my body by some mysterious force. This makes me feel better. Q:
I".
261
TESTIMONIALS
DATE: NAME: OCCUPATION : ADDRESS :
January 15, 1987 Mrs. Merlita delos Santos , Beautician 207 Interior, Reparo Street Baesa, Quezon City, Metro Manila
\
How many pranic healing sessions were administered
to you?
CASE:
Teofilo: I cannot really remember anymore. There
irregular healing sessions because I would just have the treatmenll whenever I visit the author. Usually, it's twice a week.
I hereby certify that the facts herein mentioned in till' preceding interview are true and correct.
(Signed) TEOFlLO P. VELASCO
Urinary Ai/ment
WI''''
Cl: What was the illness of your son before? Merly : He had kidney ailment and the symptoms during the first attack were severe. He had high blood pressure, high fever, generalized edema, difficulty in breathing and discharging urine from the body, and pain in the area around his urinary , b ladder and ureters. His urine was reddish in color. He gets tired very easily. (Alvin was five years old then and on his prep school. llis studies were interrupted because of his ailment.) There was a recurrence when he was six years old . Approximately, there was an interval of six months from the first attack. lIis studies then were also interrupted. The symptoms during the second attack were not so severe compared to the first one. He had pain in the area around the urinary bladder and ureters, and had difficulty urinating and the color of his urine was deep yellow. Did you bring him to a doctor or to a medical speciali.t for treatment? What was the development? Merly: I brought him to a medical (kidney) specialist for treatment, The medication given for the first and second attacks were the same and it greatly relieved him of most discomforts xcept for the pain around the urinary bladder and ureters. He was advised to avoid too much physical exertion - that means fin playing, which is a torment for a child like my son. Q:
Q: Was there a recurrence after the seconc: attack? Merly : Yes. In the third attack, he experienced a piercing puln in the area around the urinary bladder and ureters. He still had difficulty discharging urine from the body and its color was illow-ora nge, I did not let him take any pills or medications. And instead of bringing him to -a medical specialist, we went to
262
TilE ANCmNT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRAN IC IIEA Ll N(:
ee a pranic healer for treatment. The pranic healer advised me not to include salty foods in Alvin's diet. (Alvin was seven years old then and on his first grade.)
DATE: NAME : AGE : OCCUPATION : ADDRESS :
Q: How many times was he treated with pranic healing' Merly : 'T hree times only within two weeks. Q: After all those pranic treatments, what was the healtb co ndition of your son? Merly : There was a dramatic change and improvement in his health condition because his ailment up to now has no t recurred. Before, he gets tired very easily. But now , he p lays like other children. The difficulty in passing urine from the body and the piercing pain he felt had completely disappeared . His stud ies have not been interrupted so far .
I hereby certify that the facts herein mentioned in the pre. ced ing interview are true and correct.
.'
(Signed) MERLITA DELOS SANTOS
263
....;STIMONIALS
CASE:
January 15, 1987 Vicky Suarez 24 English LecturerfLaw Student 12 Malakas Street Quezon City, Metro Manila
Pneumonitis/Student of Pranic Healing
What was your ailment before? Vichy : Pneumonitis and that was last year.
Q:
Q : What do you think was th e role of pranic healing on your rapid recovery from pn eumonitis? Vichy : Even if I had been taking medications prescribed by a doctor I still felt very weak. My energy level was very low. ne with pn eumonitis would usually take a week or two to fully recover and that is if th at person would take the proper medicine and have a complete rest. But with the kind of lifestyle I had and till have, a complet e rest is torture. I was smoking, drinking lid taking a lot of coffee. I was working and studying at the ",me time. All of these activities dissipated my energy and would have made my health cond it ion worse had I not undergone pra nic treatments. After three healing session s of pranic treatments within a week, my cough was gon e, the pain in my throat tessened , and my voice wasn't hoarse anymore. Pranic healing 'rl!lod me from staying inside the house and on the bed which is a torture for me .
Who treated you ? Vicky : The author and Mike. They treated me alternately nd sometimes simultaneously. Q:
What did you feel during and after pranic treatments? Vichy : I felt t he energy going and flowing down into my OtIy during the treatment and I feit relaxed IUId sleepy after that. t was very good because I was suffering from insomnia then. Q:
Q: Have you healed someone using pranic healing techIque8? Vichy : So metimes, if I knew of a friend who had low
264
265
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRAN IC m ;AJ.lNO
vitality level, I would transfer energy to him. However, I cou ld not do it often, healing friends that is, because I do not want tll be the talk of my college. Almost all the people there talk " something looks weird.
DATE: NAME: AGE: ADDRESS:
I
In the future, do you have the interest to furth er you knowledge in pranic healing? Vicky: I am not so certain because what is importa nt tn me now is to finish law. In terms of helping others, my healing I. more on the psychological side rather than on the physical. Q:
I hereby certify ' that the facts herein mentioned in till; preceding interview are true and correct.
CASE:
February 23,1987 Michael C. Chua
26 44 Cooper Street, San Francisco Del Monte Quezon City, Metro Manila Pancreatitis
•
Q: What was the nature of your ailment? What were the mptoms? Michael: I was vomiting several times. My body was cold and was chilling and shivering. J felt an intense pain on my solar plexus area. The condition of my body was terrible. The doctor dlallnosed it as acute pancreatitis.
•
Were you' hospitallied? Were you treated by a medical 'l,ecinlist?Did you have blood tests? Michael: I was hospitalized and was treated by a medical ecialist. J went through several blood tests and ultrasound examation , Q:
(Signed) VICKY SUAR EZ
Q: What happened during and after pranlc healing? Michael: I was treated once in the morning, in the afternoon, .nd in the evening. I did not feel anything during the pranic treatments given to me but after the last treatment, I vomited and after ,bout thirty minutes the pain completely disappeared. My' body became normal. Q: Was there a recurrence? Michael: There was no recurrence.
Q: What do you think is the role of pranic healing in your recovery ? Michael: I think prnnic healing contributed a lot to my apid recovery. I hereby certify that the facts mentioned in the interview . re true and correct.
(Signed) MICHAEL C. CHUA
I
f\HTlMO NIALS
266
267
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC IIEALl Nn
DATE: NAME : ADDRESS: AGE : OCCUPATION:
May 25,1987 Roy B. Boquiron 26 Narig Street, Proj , 7 Quezon City, Metro Manila 24 Bookkeeper/Pranic Healer
Q : How long did it take you to learn the basics in prank : healing? Roy: In less than a week I have learned the basics of pranic healing from the author and Mike. I have been healing lor more than six months now. Q : Do you invoke before and after healing ? Roy : Before the start of the healing session , I usually request the patient to say som e prayers. I also humbly ask for divine help and guidance. After th e healing session, I usually request the patient to give thanks to God . Q : What are som e of th e interesting cases you haue hall, died ? , • Roy : The first case is Dante Malacad, a seventeen -year-olu guy. Dante had been hospitalized lor quite sometime due to II heart problem. After his discharge from the hospital he devel oped a stiff neck for two weeks and cou ld not move his neck either sideways or upwards due to excruciating pain . After som e general and localized cleansing and energizing on the neck area , t he pain disappeared and he was able to move his neck to his desired direction. I am still continuing the treatment on his heart problem.
The second case is Paulo Busante, a three-year-old son of my former boss, Mr. Serge Busante, Jr. When we arrived at thuir house, Paulo was having a very high fever. He was so weak that he doesn't want to leave his mother's embrace. After cleansin and energizing his crown and sole chakras, he wa s alread y playinM and his fever was gone. The healing was instantaneous because prior to the treatment Paulo's Dad, Mom, and I touch ed his Ion head and neck to determine how high his fever was. After tI",
trt",tment we touched him again and we found out that there was a substantial change in his body temperature and he was perspiring well. The third case is Mr...Cesario Esplana, Sr., my uncle. He from sl~ht food poisoning. His stomach was so painful nd his body temperature was feverish ly high. What I did was to cleanse him t horough ly and energize his solar plexus , navel, throat, hnck heart and sole chakras. After the treatment , the stomach puin was gone and his temperature became normal. II rrered
The fo urth interesting case is Pepito Ferrer. Mang Peping I. a sixty-year-old asthmatic . He had a very b ad co ugh and was sufluring from asthma for quite sometime. Whe n Mang Pep ing arrived bnd asked me to heal him, he was breat hing heavily. His breath was very irregular and he has cough. After some general cleansing lind localized cleansing on his throat, front heart, back heart, olar plexus; I made some energizing on the major throat chakra, th e secondary minor throat chakra, the so lar plexus, and the back heart chakra. The relief was obvious since Mang Pepi ng was Iread y breathing normally and the effect was almost instanlOCO us. I further energized his ha nd chakras and t he sole chakras to strengt he n the treat ment . Although I am still treating h im from time to t ime du e to his cough, the asth matic attack has not re.urred Ior the mo ment. Mrs. Este la Fajardo is a thirty-six-year old woman suffering o m h igh blood pressure. That evening, I was healin g another patient when Mrs. Fajardo arrived and requested me to treat her irst due to the severe headache, nausea, and neck pain. After cunning her, I round out that her rneng mein chakra is co ngested nd overaetivated . I applied general sweeping ma ny times and Illplied loca lized cleansing on her meng Olein chakra. I inhibited /1M meng me in chakra by projecting whitish bl ue prana, After l.Ihout Iou r breathing cycles, the nausea was gone and her headach e WIIS relieved a bit . I rescanned her meng Olein chakra and rou nd ut that it became smaller, thereby, red ucing her blood pressure, After treating her h igh b lood pressure t hr ough t he me ng mein
26 8
TIlE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC IIEAI.IN' .
chakra , I treated her headache by applying localized sweepin and energizing with whitish blue prana. I also treated her neck pain by applying localized sweeping and energizing with whiti.h blue prana. After about seven breathing cycles, the pain was gon« and she was complet ely relieved of her headache, neck pain, and nau sea. As a precautionary measure, the treatment was repeated an hour after. There was this three-year-old child suffering from asthmn for the past two years. When he ca me for healing he was co ughinK and had a hard time breathing. I applied 'general cleansing man y times and localized sweeping on his throat, heart, and back 0( the heart chakra. To strengthen the physical body, I en ergized his sole chakras, hand chakras, and navel chakra. After energizinK his throat chakra, secondary minor throat chakra, back of U... heart chakra, and solar plexus chakra; the child's breathing rhythm normalized , and the coughing stopped. Q: What cases have you partially healed or relieved ? Roy : There was partial healing on a child who was su( fering from leukemia and according to the mother, th e doctor said there was a substantial d ecrease of the blast cells. This Wil l found out after two pranic healing sessions. Unfortunately, th child was transferred to another hospital and I wasn't able to give more pranic treatments. Q: What interesting cases have you healed? Roy: I treated an officemate who had som e sort o( emot ional problem caused by her family and was really emot ion oily upset about it and was crying and stammering. A few minut es later after the treatment on the solar plexus chakra, I cou ld see that she was relieved and had gained her normal ernotionn1 composure. Her voice became srtable and harmonious again, ami her face became brighter. I had also done same energizing with people, especially my officemates who were physically exha ust" , after working the whole day. A minute or two after treating th" III. their energy level:had substantially improved.
269
T1':STIMONIALS
Have you been treated with pranic healing? Roy : Yes, I've been treated with pranic healing for my kidney problem by th e author. You see, I've been' suffering for quite sometime this pain on my left lower back. The pain is so metimes so intense that I ca n't even sit and I don't know what to clo. So I requested my teacher t o heal me and then the healing process was instantaneous in a sense that during that healing session, the pain was complet ely gone and it has not recurred. Q:
in the I hereby certify that the facts herein mentioned , preceding interview are true and correct .
(Signed) ROY B. BOQUIRON
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC il EALINe:
270
DATE: NAME: AGE: OCCUPATION: ADDRESS :
May 25, 1987 Steve B. Boquiron 21 Pran ic Healer 26 Narig Street, Proj. 7 Quezon City, Metro Manila
Q: How long did it take you to learn pranic healing ? St eve: I've learned pranic healing technique for only threu to four sessions from the author, then after th at I practice it. W,' have healing session s at Luneta Park every Wednesd ay night before. We ar e having our healing sessions now at 261-A Rodriguez St . corner H. Lopez Blvd., Balut, Tondo , Manila, also at 89 12 th Avenue Cuba o, Quezon City and at No . 30 Kamuning Road , Quezon City that is from 2 :00 p.m . - 7 :00 p.m. everyday exc ept Sunday.
What is th e reaction of the people in Tondo t Steve : At first they were skeptical because we have no medical tools or apparatus and we are not touching the patients. After so many patients were healed , they became very hap py and started to welcom e us. Q:
Q: Have you learned any healing technique besides prantc healing? J Steve: Yes, I've learned mantric healing which is very di ffer ent from pran ic h ealing. Both are effective but in terms of speed 0' fastn ess of relief , pranic healing is very mu ch faster than healing with Mantra. With pranic healing th e noticeable improvements would take only a few minutes or even seconds while when using mantric healing it takes hours br days. Q: What interesting cases have you handled using pranic healing? St eve: The first case is Feliz a Villanueva. She is sixty four years old . Her right eye was totally blind for almost on e year. So I cleansed first her body thoroughly. The crown chakra, the solar plexus chakra, the ajna chakra, the temple chakra, and the eyes were thoroughly clean sed and energized . On the second session , according to her, she can already see her fingers from the di stance
TESTIMONIALS
271
of th ree to four inches away from her right eye which was totally hlind before. The second is Bienvenido Pesa. He is forty four years old. This guy is a jeepney driver and has int en se eye pain. The pain extended to almost half of the head ar ea. So I cleansed first his body thoroughly, th en the crown chakra, the temple chak ra, the njna chakra, and the solar plexu s chak ra were cleansed and ene rgized. But after t wo to three minutes, according to t his guy , he /lBW a very bri ght light an d the intense pain on his right eye was gone. So he was very happy. The third case is Carlos Villota. He is seventy five years old . This man is suffering from pain in the ann and cannot raise his right ann. So I cleansed first 't horoughly his entire body then I d id localized sweepin g on his arm pit and two to three minutes of energizing. After the treatment, he was already abl e to raise his arm without any pain. The fourth is Sh irley Baltazar. She is thirty nine years of age suf fering from migrain e headache for alm ost three weeks. According to her , th e doctor gave her some medication but st ill the migrain e persist s. So I cleansed her body thoroughly and I cleansed and energized the crown chakra,.the solar plexus chakra, th e ajn a chak ra , the tem ple chakras, and the eyes. After three minu te s her migraine headach e was gone so she was very thankful and was very happy. Another inter esting case is about a driver. According to him, tor two years he was suffering this very painful ailm ent. There's a pain o n his arm pit and for two years he was not able to raise his right arm because of the pain. I treated him for only 2-3 minutes by just first clean sing thoroughly the armpit and by onergiztng only with light blue prana. The pain was greatly reduced and he was able to raise his arm . He was very amazed becau se he had been suffer ing for two years. I treated an eleven.year-old girl. She told me that she was hit by her playmat e at the back (right blade ann). She was complaining that it was very painful. I treated her by cleansing the
273 272
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCt-; AND ART OF PRANI C IIEALl NI :
affected part thoroughly and energizing with light blu e prana for about 2-3 minutes or for seven breathing cy cles, and according to her the pain was gone. Another interesting case is about my sixty-three-year old uncle. Before we brought him to the hospital, he was complain ing to us that he is having an attack due to high blood pre ssure, He felt that his /blood pressure was getting unusually high. WI' noticed that the blood vessels in the head area were swelling. So I checked first all the major chakras and after that I clean sed h i. ent ire body thoroughly. I inhibited the meng mein chakra by using light blue prana. This healing was done in the morn ing. In th e afternoon, his blood pressure rose up again. This ti me my e lder brother, Roy, was th e one who treated him. He also inhibited the meng mein chakra. My uncl e was then brought to th e hospital. The doctor was amazed by the normal reading of my uncle 's blood pressure since he was complaining of high blood pressure. Another interesting case is about a twenty-Jour-year old woman who has continuous menstrual bleeding and was experiencing pain in the abdominal area for tw enty two days because she had a miscarriage. Although she took SOme medication, the bleed ing and the pain still continued. And so she tried loo king for" healer. I treated her and after two healing sessions, the bleeding stopped and the pain disappeared . I have encountered a patient (h e is a reflexologist, hydrot hernpist , anti herbalist) complaining of pain on his eyes, forehead , temple, and hands. After one healing session. with him , he W"K relieved of the pain. Q: Have you treated patients with fever? Steve: I treated a five-year-old boy. He had a fever. I clea'nsed first his body thoroughly several times then I energized intensely the navel chakra, the hand chakras and the sole chakras. This is to strengthen the physical resistance of the small boy. After treating him for about ten minutes, he was alread y sweat ing profusely. Then I touched and felt his body temperature and noticed that it has lowered . Most of the fever cases that J have treated have similar results!
T ES fiMONIAL
BaseklJon your/experience, how effect ive is th is~echniq ue that you are using to heal fever? Steve: I found out that pranic healing is very effect ive in treating fever. Almost all o f my pati ents with fever were cured or relieved . Q:
I hereby certify that the facts herein me ntioned in t he preceding int erview ar e true and corre ct.
(Signed) STEVE B. BOQUIRON
CHAPTER NINE
Meditation on the Two Hearts (Illumination Technique) Without leaving the house, one may know all there is in heaven and earth. Without peeping from the window, one may see the ways of heaven..Those who go out learn less and less the more they travel. Wherefore does the sage know all without going anywhere, see all without looking, do nothing and yet achieve (the Goal)! - Tao Te Ching, Lao Tzu
Meditation should be directed toward the realization of oneness with God. Your entire attention should be given to the realization of God, always bearing in mind that the kingdom of God is within you, neither 10 here nor 10 there, but within you. -
Joel Goldsmith
ILLUMINATION TECHNIQUE or Meditation on the Two Hearts is a technique to achieve Buddhic consciousness or Cosmic consciousness or illumination. It is also a form of service to the world because the world is harmonized
276
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART O.'PRANIC m :Al.I Nll
t o a certain degree by blessing the entire earth with loving. kindness .* Meditation on the Two Hearts is based on the principle that some of the major chakras are entry points or gateways to certain levels or horizons of consciousness. To achieve illuminetion or Buddhic consciousness, it is necessary to fully activate th crown chakra. The crown chakra when fully activated becomes like a cup. To be more exact the twelve inner petals open and tum upward like a cup to receive spiritual energies which are distrib uted to other parts of the body. The crowns worn by kings and qu eens are but poor physical replicas or symbols of the indescrihable resplendent crown chakra of a fully-developed person. Til,' fully activated crown chakra is symbolized as the Holy Grail. The crown chakra can only be fully activated when th e heart chakra is first fully activated. The heart chakra is a replica of tho crown chakra. When you look at. the heart chakra, it looks like th e inner chakra of the crown chakra which has twelve golden petals. The heart chakra is the lower correspondence of th e crown chakra. The crown chakra is the center of illumination and d ivino love or oneness with all. To explain what is divine love and illumination to an ordinary person is just like trying to explain what is color to a blind man. The heart chakra is the center of higher emotions. It is the center for compassion, joy, affection, considerat ion, mercy and other refined emotions. Without developing higher refined emotions, how can one possibly experience divine love? There are many ways of activating the heart chakra and th.. crown chakra. You can use physical movements or hatha yoga, yogic breathing techniques, mantras or words of power, and visualization techniques. All of these techniques are effective but are not fast enough. One of the most effective and fastest wnys to activate these chakras is to do meditation on loving-kindness or to bless the whole earth with loving-kindness, By using the heart chakra and the crown chakra in blessing the earth with loving• If you are interested to learn and practice meditation o n two hearts please visit the Mel Ling Healin g Centers.
MEDITATION ON TilE TWO HEAllTS(ILLUMINATION TECHNIQUE)
277
kindness, they become channels for spiritual energies; thereby, becoming activated in th e process. By blessing the earth with loving-kindness, you are doing a form of world service. And by blessing th e earth with loving-kindne ss, you are in tum blessed many times. It is in blessing that you are blessed . It is in giving that you receive. T hat is the Law! A person with a fully activated crown chakra does not necessarily achieve illumination for he has yet to learn how to make use of th e crown chakra to achieve illumination. It is just likeI having a sophisticated computer but not knowing how to operate it. Once the crown chakra has been fully activated, then you have to do meditation on the light, on th e mantraAum;and on the gap between the two Aums. Intense concentration should be focused not only on the mantra Aum but especially on the gap between the two Aums. It is by fully and intensely concentrating on the light and the gap betw een the two Aums that illumination or samadhi is achieved! With most people, th eir other chakras are quite activated. The basic chakra, sex chakra, and solar plexus chakra are activated in practically all persons. With these people, t heir instincts for self-survival, sex drive and their tendency to react with their lower cmotions are very active. With the pervasiveness of modern educa· · t ion and works that require also the use of the mental faculty, the ajna chakra and the throat ehakra are developed in a lot of people. Wliat is not developed in most people are the heart chakra and th e crown chakra. Modern education, unfortunately, tends to overemphasize the development of the throat chakra and the ajna chakra or the development of the concrete mind and the abstract mind. The development of the heart has been neglected. Because of this, you may encounter persons who are quite intelligent but very abrasive. This type of person has not yet matured emotionally or the heart chakra is quite underdeveloped. Though he is intelligent and may be successful, his human relationship is very poor, with hardly any friend and no f~ly or broken family. So by using med itation on the two hearts, a person becomes • Aum Is a Sanskrit term for the Supreme Bcmg; in Arabic , Allah : in Chinese , Tao:
lind in English, God.
278
TIII~
ANCU:NT SCIENCt; AND ART or I'RANI C ImALl Nf:
harmoniously balanced. It means that the major chakras are rnor. or less balancedly developed. Whether the abstract and concrete mind will be used con s tructively or destructively depends upon the development of til<' heart. When the solar plexus chakra is overdeveloped and tluheart chakra is underdeveloped or when the lower emotions ar.. active and the higher emotions are underdeveloped, then the mind would likely be used destructively. Without the developm ent of the heart in most people, world peace would be an unattainable dream. This is why the development of the heart should be empha sized in the educational system.
Persons below eighteen years old should not practice th« illumination technique since their body cannot yet withstand too much subtle energies. This may even manifest as physical paral ysls in the long run. Persons with heart ailment should also not practice Meditation on the Two Hearts since it may result in sever pranic heart congestion. It is important that persons who intend to practice regularly Meditation on the Two Hearts should pra ctieo self-purification or character building through daily innerreflertion, Meditation on the Two Hearts not only activates th e hea rt chakra and the crown chakra but also the other chakras. Because of this, both the positive and negative characteristics of th e practitioner will be magnified or activated, This can easily he verif ied by the practitioner himself anti through clairvoyant observation. PROCEDURE: 1. Cleansing the Etheric Body Through Physical Exercise, Do physical exercise for about five minutes. Doing physicoI exercise has cleansing and energizing effect on the etheric body. Light greyish matter or used-up prana is expelled from th e et heric body when a perso n is exercising. Physical exercises have to bu done to minimize p v..ssible pranic congestion since this meditation generates a lot of subtle energies in the etheric body. 2. Invocation for Divine Blessing. Invoking the blessing or one's Spiritual Guides is very important. Each spiritual aspirant.
Mt;D1TATION ON THE TWO ImARTS (ILLUMINATION n:CHNIQUE)
279
has Spiritual Guides whether he is consciously aware of them or not. The invocation is required for one's protection, help and guidance. Without making the invocation, practicing any advanced meditational technique could be dangerous. You can make your own invocation. The author usually uses this invocation:
Father, I humbly invoke Thy divine blessing! For protection, guidance, help and illumination! With thanks and in full faith! 3. Activating the Heart Chakra - Blessing the Entire Earth with Loving -Kindness. Press your front heart chakra with your finger for a rew seconds. This is to make concentration on the front heart chakra easier. Concentrate on the front heart chakra and bless the earth with loving-kindness. You may improvise your own blessing with loving·kindness. The author usually uses this blessing:
BLESSING THE EARTH WITH LOVING·KINDNESS From the Heart of God, Let the entire earth be blessed with loving·k indness. Let the entire earth be blessed with great joy, happiness and divine peace. Let the entire earth be blessed with understanding, harmony, goodwill and will-to.good. So be it! From the Heart of God , Let the hearts of all sentient beings be filled with divin e love and kindness. Let the hearts of all sentient beings be filled with great joy, happiness and divine peace. Let the hearts of all sentient beings be filled with understanding, harmony, goodwill and unli-to-good. With thanks, so be it!
\
280
Til E ANCIENT SCIENCE AND A I\'(' O F PIIANIC IIEALl N(:
For beginners, this blessing's done only on ce or tw ice. Do not overdo this blessing at the start . Some may even feel a slight pranic congestion around th e heart area. This is because you r etheric body is not suffi cientl y clean. Apply localized sweep ing to remove the congest ion. This blessing should not be done mechanically. You should feel and fully appreciate th e implications in each phrase. You may also use visualizati on . When blessing th e eart h wit h loving kindness, visualize th e aura of t he earth as becoming dazzling pink. When blessing th e earth with great joy, happiness and peace; visualize people with heavy difficult problems smiling. Th eir hearts filled with joy , faith, hope and peace. Visualize th eir problems becom ing lighter and th eir faces lightening up. When blessing the earth with harmony, goo dwill and will-to -good ; visualize people or nations on t he verge of fighting or fightin g each other reconciling. Visualize t hese people putting down their arms and embracing each other. Visualize t hem being filled with good inten tion and filled with the will to carry out this good intention. Th l. blessing can be directed to a nation or nations, a family or a per. son or a group of persons. Do not direct this blessing on a specific infant or specific children because they might be overwh elmed by the intense energy generated by t he meditation. 4. Activating th e Crown Chakra - Blessing th e Earth with Loving-Kindness. Press th e crown with your finger for severnI seconds to facilitate concentration on th e crown chakra and ble•• the entire earth with loving-kindn ess. When th e crown chakra i. fully opened, some of you will feel something blooming on top of the head and some will also feel somet hing pressing on tho crown. After the crown chakra has been activated, concentrate simultaneously on th e crown chakra and the heart chakra, and bless th e earth with loving-kindness several times. This will align the heart chakra and t he crown chakra ; t hereby, making the blessing much more potent. 5. To Achieve Illumination - Meditation on th e Light, On the Aum and the Gap between the two Aums . Visualize a grain of dazzling white light on the crown or at the center inside th head and simultaneously mentally utter the mantra Aum ·Co ncen.
MEIlI TATl ON ON TIm TWO IIEAItTS (I LLUMINATION TEC IINIQUE)
28 1
trat e intensely on the point of light, on th e Aum and o n th e gap between the two Aums . When mentally uttering the mantra Aum, you will notice that th e Alms are not continuo us and th at th ere is a slight gap between t.wo mantras or between tw o Aums..Do this med ita t io n fo r five to ten minut es. When the spiritual aspirant can fully concentrat e sim ultaneo usly o n th e point of light and on th e gap between th e two Aum s, he will experience an "inner explosion o f light ". His entire being will be filled with light! He will have his first glimpse of illuinination and his first experience o f div ine ecstasy! To ex perien ce Buddhic consciousness or illuminat ion is to ex perience and understand wha t Je sus meant when he said: "If thine eye be single, thy whole bod y shall be full of light." (Luke 11 :34). "For behold, the kingdom of heaven is with in you." (Luke 17:21). For some people, it may tak e years before th ey experience an initial glimpse of illumination or Buddhic consc iousness. Others may take only months whil e ot hers may tak e on ly weeks. To a very few, they achieve init ial ex pansion of consciousness on th e first try . This is usually done with th e help fro m an Elder or a Facilitator. When doing this meditation, the aspirant should be neutral. He shou ld not be obsessed with results or filled with too much expectations. Otherwise, he will be actually meditating on the expectations or th e expected results rather th an on th e point of light, the Aum and th e gap between th e two Aums . 6. Releasing Excess Energy. After the end of the meditation, the excess energy should be released by blessing the earth with Light, Love and Peace. Oth erwise, the etheric body will becom e congested and the visible body will deteriorate in the long run because of too much energy. Other esot eric schools release the excess energy by visualizing the chakras projecting out the excess energy and th e chakras becoming smaller and dimmer but this approach do es not utiliz e the excess energy into const ructive use . 7. Giving Thanks. After the end of the meditation, always give thanks to your Spiritual Guides for the divine blessing.
282
Tin; ANcn:NT SCIEN CE AND ART OF "IIANIC m :A I.I N' ;
•
8. Strengthening the Visible Physical Body Throu gh Massage and More Physical Exercises. After the end of the med [, tation, massage your body and do physical exercise for about five minutes. The purpose is to further cleanse and t o st re ngthen the visible body sin ce more used-up prana is expelled out of th e body. This facilitates the assimilation of the pranic and spiritual energies; thereby, enhancing the beauty and health of th e pract itioner. Massaging and ex ercising after this meditation also red uce the possibility of pranic congestion or en ergy getting in certain parts of the body which may lead to illn ess. You can also gradual. ly cure yourself o f so me ailments by doing exe rcises after d oing the "Meditation o n the Two Hearts". It is very important t o exercise after the med itation ; otherwise, the visibl e' ph ysica l body will ineVitably be weakened. Although the etheri c body will become very bright and strong, the visibl e physical body will become weak because it will not be able to withstan d the leftover energy gene ra ted by the meditation in th e lo ng run , You have to ex perien ce it yourself to fully appreciate what the author has just stated. Some of you have the t endency not to do physical exercise. after this meditation but to continue savouring the blissful state. This tendency should be overcome, otherwise, your ph ysical health will deteriorate in th e long run. Sometimes wh en a sp irit ua l aspirant meditates, he may experi en ce unusual phy sical movem ents for a limited per iod or time. T his is qu ite normal since his et he ric channels ar e bei ng clean sed . The instructions may seem quite long but the meditat io n i. short, simple and very effec t ive! It requires only t en t o fifte en minutes excl ud ing the time req uired for the physical exer cises. There are many degrees of illu minati on. The art of "intuitin g" or " d ire ct synt he t ic kno wing" requires co nsta nt practice ( med ita. ti on) for a .lo ng duration of time . To be m ore ex act , it requirr -s many incarnations to develop facility in the use of this BuddhI,. faculty .
MEIJITATION ON TilE TWO m :AIITS(lLLUMINATlON T ECII"' IQUE)
283
Blessing the earth with loving -kindness can be done in group us a form of world servi ce. When done in group for this purpose,
first hl~ss the earth with loving-kindness throu gh the heart chakra then through th e cr own cha kra then through both crown chakra lind the heart chakra. Release th e exce ss en ergy after the end of th e meditation. The other parts of the meditation are omitted . The ble ssing can be directed not o nly to the ent ire ear t h but also to a specific nation or group of nations. The potency of the blessing is incr eased many t imes when done in group than individually . For examp le , wh en th e ble ssing is done by a group of seven persons, the effec t or poten cy is equal to more than one hundred person s doing it separately. Anoth er way of blessing
the earth with louing-hindn ess in group is through daily radio broadcast at an appropriate tim e with som e o r most of th e listen crs parti cipating. Just as pranic healing ca n "miraculously" cure simple and severe ailments, the "meditation o n two hearts," wh en practiced by a large number of people can also miraculously heal the entire earth; thereby, making the entire earth more harmonious and peaceful. This message is directed to readers with sufficient maturity and the will-to -good . There are other meditations more advanced than meditation on the two hearts. One of these more advanced forms of meditation is called Arhatic Yoga which is for the chosen few .
That is why th e major problem is not the pupil, but the educator; our own hearts and minds must be cleansed if we are to be capable of ed ucat ing others. Without a change of heart, without goodwill, without the inward transformation which is born of self-awareness, there can be no peace, no happiness for men. Education and th e Significance of Life by J. Krishnamurti
284
TIm ANCIENT SCU;NCE ANO AliT OF I'IIA NIC IIEALING
lo ve always draws fo rth what is best in child and man .
•
Enlightenment is th e major goal of educa tion . Education in the New Age by A lice A . Bailey
AUTHOR'S NOTE: These two books contain many interesting ideas that will have lasting pervasive beneficial effects if adopted by most educators.
MEDITATION ON THE TWO HEARTS 1)
To clean t he eth eric body, do physical exercise fo r about five minutes.
2)
Invoke for divine blessing.
3)
To activate the heart chakra, concentrate on it and bless th e entire earth with loving-kindness.
4)
To activate th e crown chakra, concentrate o n it and bless the entire earth with loving-kindness. Then bless the eart h with loving-kindness simultaneously through t he crown chakra and th e heart chakra,
5)
To achieve illumination; concentrate on the point of light , on the Aum, and on th e gap between the two Aums.
6)
To release excess energy, bless the earth with light, love and peace.
7)
Give thanks.
8)
To strengthen the visible physical body ; massage face and body, and do phy sical exercise for about five minutes.
MEDITATI ON ON TilE TWO HEAII TS (IL1,UMINATI ON TEC HNIQUE)
28 5
BLESSING THE EARTH WITH LOVING ·KINDNESS From th e Heart of God , Le t th e entire earth be blessed wit h loving·kindness. Let th e ent ire earth be blessed with great joy, happiness and di vine peace. Let the entire earth be blessed with und erstanding, harmo ny , goodwill and will·t o-good. So be it! From th e. Heart of Go d, Let the hearts of all sentient beings be filled with divin e love and kindness. Le t th e hearts of all sentient beings be filled with great joy, happiness and divine peace. Le t th e hearts of all sentient beings be filled with understanding, harmony, goodwill and will·to-good. With thanks,
80
be it!
AUTHO RITY TO REPRINT Meditation on th e Two Heart s is a very powerful tool in bringing about world peace; therefore, this meditational technique should be d issemin at ed . The author hereby grant s permission to all int erested person s t o reprint, recopy, and reproduce Chapter 9 : MEDIT ATION ON THE TWO HEA RTS with proper acknowledgment.
(Signed ) CHOA KOK SUI
2HG
Til E ANCIENT SCII :NCE AND ART Of' PRANIC IIEALINC;
DATE: NAME: ADDRESS: AGE: OCCUPATION :
February 25, 1987 Roy B. Boquiron 26 Narig Street, Proj. 7 Quewn City, Metro Manila 24 Bookkeeper/Pranic Healer
What is your background in meditation? Roy : I practically have no background in meditation. It's almost zero . Q:
. Q : But did you have unusual experiences before trying th e 'llum inat ion technique or the meditation on the two hearts? Roy : Yes. I had this extraordinary experience in astral ;ravel. T hat was before I started meditating. It happened in 1982 ~hen I was st ill a college student. That evening, I was certain that was still awake because ,J have just laid down on my bed and .h en the light was still on. After maybe three to five minutes, my ~unt turned off the light though I was still wide awake. After ~Il\etime, I was having this whirling sensation on my head accorn !anied by a drowsy feeling and then followed by a floating sen saon. After that "floating sensation," I was frightened because saw my physical body for the first time.
h
CJ : . Ho w often do you have astral projection? , Before it was almost every night, however, latel y Roy : hap pening occasionally.
How did you come across with "Meditation on the Two earts" ? ' Roy : The author and Mike taught me "Meditation on th e 'wo Hearts". Q:
What do you think of this rneditational technique ? fla y: This " Med itat ion on the Two Hearts" is a shortcut chnique to enlightenm ent and to expansion of consciousness. Q;
Q: Have you experienced any negative or positive effects used by this meditation, physica/ly or psychologically? Roy : I have not experienced any negative effects bu t
M~:IlITATION ON THE TWO II EA IlTS (ILLUMIN ATION n:CII NI QUI~)
287.
there were positive effects brought abo ut by this meditat ional technique. For example, wh en problems in the office wer e pr esented to me, in an instant, I kn ew what to do with them. There is also improvement in my emot iona l stability.
How long have you been pract icing this technique? Roy: Almost two months. Q:
...
Can you relate some o f yo ur ex periences? Roy : At the first sta ge of this technique, th ere seems to be a vibrant flowing of energy from the surroundings or from the universe as if I'm filled with this potent en ergy . I also experienced a sort of ecstatic explosion at the top of my head. It's really difficult to describe what I felt in that state. Q:
Did you see any Being ? Roy : . On the first try of this meditational t echnique, I was aided by the au thor and I didn't know what he did to me. I just knew that he patted my back but it was more than patting my back. The first experien ce was quite memorable since I was catapulted into a state of higher co nsciousness giving me a sen se of peacefulness. It is really ind escribable! I saw Master Jesu s... and He was talking to me. I kn ew so well what He said but it's very personal and then after that vision , I was almost in tears not because I was sad but because I was filled with joy, happiness, with something beyond words - That was my first experience of having a vision of Jesus. And I kn ew that He loves us all. Q:
Q: What about consciou sness-wise, what happened ? Roy: There was an int erpenetrating awaren ess. Something like a simultaneous awareness from one conscious level to a higher ' state. Like for instance, now we are aware of these things but in that state you ar e also aware of a higher state of consciousness which means that you are everywhere. That feeling of being every where is so totally mind-buggling and yet it is quite real in a sense that you feel you are here but you are also there, you are every where. The feeling in that sta te is like omnipresence - th e fee ling of everywhere. It is more than just a feeling - but that is the nearest - I don't really know the right t erm because I've not yet read books about this.
M~:D1TATIO N ON T im TWO HEAltTS(ILLUMINATION TE CIINIQ UE)
28 9
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART O F PRANIC HEALING
288
Did you receive some sort of impressions when yo u were in the higher level of consciousness? Roy : Yes. Like Cor instance, when Jesus said, "I and my Father are one," as if I know what He meant. BeCore, my interpretation was literal. But the meaning that came into me when I experienced this higher state oC consciousness is that everyt hing and ey;~ry being is one . Just like unity in diversity. We are diverse in Conn, etc. . . but there is this Oneness, the Ceeling of onene.. with every being, with everybody...
DATE : NAME: ADDRESS :
Q:
Would you recommend that other people pract ice this technique? Roy: Yes, I recommend this meditational technique because when a lot of peopl e will experience th is, they will know that it's useless and impossible to hurt or to speak ill against anything or anybody. It 's just foolish to hurt other people because you will only be hurting yourself. Q:
I hereby certify that th e fact s herein mentioned in th e preceding interview are true and correct.
(Signed) ROY B. BOQUIRON
February 17, 1987 Erlinda Andrada 120 R. Lagrnay, San Juan, Metro Manila
Q : How long have you been meditating? Erlinda : I started experimenting with mantric meditation some ten years ago when I was first introduced to yoga. I experimented with many meditation t echniques.
These meditations have given me perception of things Divine; made me feel "at peace with th e heavens" and ' communion with t he Everlasting One , where everything seems to be within my grasp. Whenever I reach th e inmost depths, I feel the Et ernal Presence so close upon my soul - and realize that the Lord has always been there all along. Please relate your experience when you used the "Meditat ion on the Two Hearts". Erlinda: It is really difficult to relate my experience on the "Meditation on Two Hearts" . Words are inadequate in describing its beauty and therefore, th e narration becomes inaccurate. However, I will try to put into words my inner experience. Initially, I felt that the top of my head was covered with a fountain of Light , falling down all over my ent ire body. The light was so intensely visible in my inner eye and was becoming more powerful, enwrapping my body, making me feel so weightless, It feels as if my body was no longer there . Q:
I was penetrated by the brightness of this light that I felt one with it. Then I was in flight as a being of light so in tuned with and reaching out to the entire universe. This universal expansion felt so good. As I started blessing the earth, I realized that the real meaning of do ing t his meditation is to spread loving-kindness to everybody, for it is only through love that we become "reconnected" to one an other. Th e salvation of the earth from whatever destruction becomes possible .
290
THE ANCIENT SCIENe.; ANll ART OF I'RANI<; m ;ALl NI:
I can say that this med itation is truly a very powerful te ch. nique.
I hereby certify that th e facts herein mentioned in tho preceding interview are true and correct.
(Signed) ERLINDA ANDRA DA
MEDITATION ON Til E TWO IIEARTS (ILLUMINATION TgCIINIQUE)
291
MEDITATION is an individual experience, and therefore, unique and different to everyone. Every meditative experience partakes of a deeply personal and individual spiritual adventure, an odyssey into th e realms of one's inner and mysterious beingness. It is a mom ent-to -moment realization with the God. presence - which is in everyone. What I have to share is, th erefore, my own kind of experience based on few experime nts on the meditation on the "two hearts" . And as such, further practices on it may evolve into another kind of experience - as unexpected or as surprising as the previou s one. It may -be more expansive, or may even partake of art inner revelation . But always, as far as I am concerned, it leaves behind its "pathless pat h" a silent thrill, a fragrance, an incandescence, a "high feeling" . But that is going ahead of my story . . . First, r must state her e that since my first initiation into Yoga in 1962 by my first guru - I have undergone various experim ents in meditation . Also, the evolutionary process was not an easy one for me. It was an uphill struggle trying to tame the "bull" that is the mind - and the battle to conquer the ego was as great. The quest for transcend ence was never an easy path for me. Then, as if planned out by divine destiny or will, I was introduced to this unique meditation on the "two hearts". Perhaps, conditioned by my previous preparations - I eagerly and easily allowed myself to let-go and be in the total flow by following the instructions given in this book . As soon as I entered into my "innerspace" - simultaneously visualizing a brilliant white light in my heart and crown chakra, and at the same time regulating my breathing to a rhythmic, deep, and almost musical cadence - outpouring blessings and lovingkindness to the entire universe - I seemed to have been whirled out-of-space feeling almost bodiless. . . I felt the crown center opening up like a lotus-cup unfolding bigger and bigger irradiating and containing more light ... spilling out all over my entire being.
292
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALl Nll
At the same time, the lotus petals in my heart center were pulsing with an even greater light. For some inexplicable reason, beyond logic - almost beyo nd words - I felt an outreaching love for all mank ind as if I wanted very much to permeate them with this light of Love and kindness, of understanding and Wisdom. It was as if light has become bound. less. Or perhaps it was more an expansion of consc iousness - ror in that instant there seemed to have been a feeling of t emporary omniscience. This was very humbling, indeed, yet, overpowering. If this were an experience of illumination, indeed , then I
must say here that "I have seen the Light ." But even more "shock. ing" was experiencing myself as a being of light :- as if every coli of my entire being was filled with light or have become light itself. I emerged from this brief initial experience of t he "medl tation on the two hearts" feeling cleansed, purified, and energized by the stream of light, nay, I would even daresay by a flood or light! That single meditative experience was memorable. Succeed. ing experiments on this type of meditation, though not necessarily as dramatic as th e first one, afforded me several valuable insights - too vast for word s. It is like falling in love. No matt er how you may attempt to describe the feeling, one falls short or expression. No wonder th e mystics remain silent about it. It i. a wordless experience of the mysterious . . . of the miraculou•. And yet how truly simple, easy, and comforting. One needs only to let-go the ego, to have a sincere attitude of hu mility , of inwanl purity, of authentic love for God - or whatever name yo u may call Him. There is that intimate feeling of Oneness with everyone, with the entire universe (which is permeated with light) . , Meditation which is an inward journey into th e realms o r one's own being is tru ly th e language of Ecstasy, of Bliss Con. sciousness, of Divine Presence. My prayer is for everyone to have t heir own unique and indlvidual experience of this powerful and effective meditat ion tech. nique on the Two Hearts. And for each on e to bear witness to
MEDITATION 'ON TilE TWO IIEAltTS (ILLUMINATION TECIINIQUE)
293
that incandescence, that luminescence of inner light, that overwhelming realization that we are "the light of the world" - and that this light is the only hope in our despairing world. That Light which gives wisdom, love, understanding, and inner peace. I may have said something or nothing. As I mentioned earlier, meditation is beyond words. It is better experienced than explained. I hereby certify that the facts herein mentioned are true and correct.
(Signed) ROLANDO A. CARBONELL
CHAPTER TEN
.Seed Ideas I
Now, my suspicion is that the universe is not only queerer than we suppose, but queerer than we can suppose. - J.B.S. Haldane, a British biologist
To each generation is given the part of conserving the essential features of the old and beloved form, but also of wisely expanding and enriching it. Each cycle 'must add the gain of further research and scientific endeavour, and subtract that which is worn out and a f no value. - Initiation, Human and Solar by Alice Bailey
The ideas contained here are in seed form; therefore, they will require considerable nurturing to fully develop them. They are given as guides and hints to new research areas.
296
TIlE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
NUTRITION AND PRANA Science has studied nutrition from th e chemical viewpoi nt : proteins, carbohydrates, sugars , min eral s, fat s, and vitamins. So fa r, science at the present moment is not aware of the exist en ce of prana; therefore, ha s not studied nutrition from the pran ic viewpoint : the quantity and types of colo r prana contained in food s, and how prana affects the human body. Preserved food contains more or less the sam e amount o f proteins, carbohydrates, and other ch emicals compared to fresh food but fresh food is definitely more nutritious than preserved food because it co nta ins mor e pran a th an preserved on es. T he same principle also applies to sy nt he t ic and natural vitamins. Natural vitamin is more effective or potent than synt het ic vita. min because the natural o nes co nta in morc pran a than the syn ths, tic ones. Overcooking food n ot only d estroy s so me of its ch em ical nutrients but also releases a lot o f it s prana due to prolonged heating. In other word s, overcooked food contains considerabl y less prana than food that is not overcooked. To be healthy, it is necessary to have a balanced diet. The idea of a balanced di et should include not only the proper "chernical or nutritive mix " requirements o f the ' body but also t he pro per mix of color pranas required to keep the body healthy . To ac hieve a balanced pranic diet, it is advisable to prepare dish es having many colo rs. By noting the color of the food, it is possible to deduce the predominating colo r prana. For example, gre en vegetables obviously contain a lot of green prana while carrots co ntain a lot of orange prana. But this approach is not alway s applicable, lik e for instance, red tomatoes contain a lot of green ish yellow prana and very little re1 prana; and watermelons wh ich have smooth gre en skin and red pulp contain a lot of green prana and hardly any red prana. ' 'I
•
The approach of western medicine is very different fro m Chinese medicine or Ayurved ic (Indian) medicin e . With western medicine, the approach is material or chemical. With Ch inese or Ayurvedic medicine, the approach is more subtle. What is emphasized in Chinese and Ayurvedic medicine is pranic en ergy
St;ED IIlEAS
29 7
a nd ma inta ining pranic harmo ny wit h in t he body. The Chinese medicine has d eveloped this approach to a very sophist icated degree using he rbal medicin e and acupunc tu re . It is a co mmo n kn own fact. that hemorrhoids tend to worsen hy eat ing ho t spicy food s. Why is t h is so'! The answer is quite simple. Sin ce hem o rrhoid s man ifest as pranic co ngest io n 'o f red pran a o n the anu s area, eat ing ho t spicy food s, wh ich co ntain a lot of red prana, would defin itely aggravate t he a ilment. Per so ns wh o are susceptible to co nst ipat io n may im prov e their co ndit io n by regular ly eating papaya. Papay a contains a lot o f orange prana whi ch st im u lat es regular bowel mo veme nt . Acco rding to som e writers, viol et grapes have "miraculo us" healing effec t s. They clai m t hat t here are so me cance r patient s and oth er patien t s with severe ailment s t ha t have been cured th rough viol et grapes d iet. The skin of viol et grap es co ntains predo minantly vio let prana an d its pulp contains predo mina ntl y greenish yellow prana. Violet prana is a powerful kind of prana having t he proper t ies of a ll the ot her co lor pranas. It has disinfecting and d etoxifying effects, an d is also used t o destroy can· cero us cells. Violet prana and yellowish green pran a have regen erat ing effects, and are used t o accelerat e the repair o f damaged organs. More thorough research should be directed towards the st ud y o f violet grapes as a possible cure fo r cancer, da maged internal organs , AIDS (Ac q u ired Imm une Defi cien cy Syndrome), and other severe a ilments. The research sho uld not only foc us on the visible physical body but also its effe cts o n t he bioplasmic ho dy. Research sho uld also be d irected toward s the use o f co mbining violet grapes d iet and ginse ng as a cure for some "incurable ailments" . The expectatio ns on t he researchers and the patients sh ould be realisti c; they have to tak e into account t he karmic facto r , a nd t he severe damages alrea d y done o n the pati ent's ph ysical body d ue to the a ilment and t he serious side effects of the pot en t drugs t hat were used.
GINSENG Experiments were done by the aut hor on the effect s of Chinese and Korean red ginseng on the etheric body. Dosage used
298
rus ANUENT S(;IENn; AND A ItT OF I'KANI(; m :A I. I N( ,
ranges from one half gram to five gram s per intake. The sub. ject s' ages ranged from fourteen to fifty five years o ld . It was clairvoyantly ob served th at th e effec ts o f ginseng powder start to manifest almost immediately. Flashe s o f light were seen coming from the inner and health auras. Th e inner aura increased from five inch es to about t en inches in thickness. The health aura became brighter and ex panded from about tw o to three feet . The outer aura also expanded . Light greyish matter were being expelled. The chakras became brighter, bigger and more active. The major chakras increased from about three and a half inches to about five inches. The " synthetic ki" located at th e secondary navel chakras increased from about one inch in diameter to about three inch es in diameter . Thc "sy nthetic ki" became denser. Although th e pranic energy level o f th e subj ects were very high, they were relaxed and not restl ess. This is similar to a person meditating. Though a lot of energy is generated when meditating, the meditator is still relaxed and at peace. The subject s are not usually aware or do not physically feel th e subtle imp ro ve. ments unless they ar e either sensitive or weak .
The degree of the effect s of the ginsen g depends on t he dosage, the supplier of the ginseng (different suppliers produce ginseng of different brightness or potency), and the body o f the subject. The effects of one half gram of ginseng will last for abou t ten to sixteen hours. Within that period of time th e effec ts o f t he ginseng gradually diminish. Because of this, it is better if onc half gram of ginseng is taken twice a day to maintain on e's health . Persons who are ill should preferably takc a higher dosage. Ginseng when clairvoyantly seen is very bright co mpared to other food and medicines. The core (inmost) aura of a fifty gram red ginseng powder is very dense (looks alm ost like " liquid" gold) and is about six to tw elve inch es in radius. The next lay er of the aura is about one to two meters in radius. The o uter aura is about three to four meters in radius. Ginseng co nt ains a lot of prana (vital energy) and also a lot of "synthet ic ki", T he great increase of "synthetic ki" in the secondary navel chakras is due to the activated major chakras which produce more "synt het ic ki" and also due to the "synthetic ki " contained in the ginseng itself.
St;ED lIlEAS
299
Ginseng has a cleansing eff ect since greyish matter are being expelled . It is better to ex ercise imm ediately after taking ginseng to facilitate 'the expe lling of used-up . prana and to facilitat e the assimilation of fresh pranic energy. Ginseng is also " activating" and " en ergizing" since the ethe ric body and its major chakras beco me br ighter, bigger and d en ser. There fo re, th e organs controll ed and energized by th e major chahras are correspondingly cleansed, activated and energized. With th ese findings, it becomes clear why ginseng is highly regarded by the Chin ese and the Koreans. Many Chinese and Kor ean s take ginseng regula rly to improve and maintain the ir good health. In Chinese medicine, ginseng in combination with herbs, having "healing" eff ect s on a specific organ or which "carry o r direct " t he "chi" e nergy to a specific organ, are prescribed for man y types of ailments. Ginseng combined with other herbs is con sidered as a practically "cu re all" medicin e. To increase the pranic energy level of the healer and to improve h is healing skill, it is adv isable (but not necessary) to take on e gram of ginseng before and after healing a large number of patients. It is also advantageous for patients who are very weak to take o ne to ·two grams of ginseng before being treated by the healer . CLASSIFYING DRUGS BY USING THE PROPERTIES OF CO LORPRANA A person who has just embarked o n th e st udy and research of th e d ifferent properties and eff ects o f herbs and drugs is som eti mes overwhelmed by th e hu ge body o f information available. II different approach to classification o f herbs and drugs is suggested by us ing t he prop erties of color prana . A chart can be mad e to give an over ';l1 view . Th e vertical side of the chart will co ntain a list of color pran as and mix color pra nas, and their correspo nd ing properties. Th e horizontal side of the chart will contain first the whole body followed by its different specific parts. Herbs or drugs are then catalogued in the chart . A diuretic drug (promotes secretion of urine) is catalogued un der orange prana or yellowish' orange prana - expelling property, and the kid ney s. Anal gesic or pain k iller is catalogued under blue prana -
300
TilE ANCmNT SCIENCE ANI) ART OF I'IIANIC HEALI NG
soot h ing effect, and the body. Herb or gro up of herbs with di ssolving effects on blo od clo ts or clogs is catalogued un der green prana - breaking down or dissolving effe cts, an d t he whol c body. Herb or group of herbs with decongesting or cleansing effect on the heart is catalogu ed under gre en pran a _ d issol ving and decongesting effects, and the heart. Herb or group of herbs which accelerate the repair process of the heart is catalo gued under violet prana, and green·yellow prana - reg enerating effect, and the heart. To fill the chart would require co nsid erable a mo un t of time and energy, and the concerted efforts of many expe. rienced herbalists and pharmacists.
ETHERIC BEINGS, CURRENTS, I'LANETS Most scientists assume that life can only exist in physical life form . They send spaceships to other plan ets looking for signs of physical life, not considering that life may ex ist in energy fo rm or in etheric form . Based on clairvoyant investigation, life also exist in etheric (energy) form or there are et heric beings of differ. ent degrees of awareness and development. Investigation should be done on the "possible" existence of ethcric beings insid e or interpenetrating the earth, water, air and fire. In other word s, energy beings of earth, water, air and fire. This is exactly t he basis behind stories about fairies and gnomes. Investigations should be done on how these et heric bei ngs affect the growth and development of plants, animals, and men . Investigation should also be directed on the "possible" exi&tence of men in etheric form -with no corresponding physical body On eart h and on other planets, and also on et he ric plants and minerals. Just as there are water and air currents, there is also such thing' as etheric current. Research should be .d irected o n ho w to utilize these etheric currents to produce power. Scienti st s sho uld also investigate on the "possibility" of etheric planet s with no corresponding phYsical form. Science should also seriously consider the "possibility" t ha t when the earth was very young and not hospitable to physical
ssnn
IDEAS
301 '
life, "men" may have a lread y exist ed in etheric form. And that through a strange and not presently understood process, the etheric body gradually through aeons of time concretized into a physical body. According to esoteric teachings, God working through beings of supe rio r intelligen ce made the et heric body of "man," and that super intelligent. beings have been guiding the spiritual, psychological and physical evolution of man. On the other hand, the orthodox "cellular theory" spe culates that the physical body of man is a result of some sort of chemical accident which later accidentally developed into a cell and through aeons of time accidentally and finally developed into man. Any read er with sufficient penetrating mind would realize the absurdity of this th eory . To accept such a theory would be to accept the impossibility that computer, camera, so und system, etc. .. can be produced by accident. The readers should realize that the most sophisticated computer is not co mparable at all to the human brain nor an ultra modern camera to the human eyes. Since it is impossible to produce a computer, a camera or any other sophisticated equipment by pure accident; therefore, it is "even more" impossible to produce the body with its vety sophisticated brain, eye s, ears, heart, and other internal organs by pure accident! As a matter of fact, science is studying or imitating the human body and its components to produce better equipment. The "cellular theory" does not take into account prana or the " breat he of life," and the etheric body which is the vehicle for pranic energy. Prana is life. Without prana, there is no life. No amount of chemical manipulation will produce physical life form unless prana or life force is involved. The author does not want to sound too religious but if you are to reason or penetrate further, our body and everything surrounding us are the very proof that God exists. For those who can see, the existence of God is self-evident!
MORE RESEARCH NEEDED IN THE FIELD OF PRANIC HEALING Research should be directed towards developing sophisticated equipment that can detect and quantify prana or vital energy,
.111 ~
TilE ANCIENT SCmNCE AND ART OF PRANIC IIEALING
A unit has to be established for prana. Sophisticated equipment will also be needed for measuring the rate of pranie projection and the rate of pranic consumpt ion. One of th e major shortcomings in Kirlian photography is that it can only t ake pictures of small objects and that the object has to be in contact witb the plate or equipment. There is a need for the developme nt of a more practical and advanced type of camera that can take pictures of the energy bodies of objects at a distance or pictures of et heric beings. Several scientists in different countries are already working along this line. How do es pran ic energy affect the cells? When the skin comes in contact with hot oil, th e cells are damaged . However, if prnnic healing is app lied immedia tely, th e skin will not be damaged or the damage is substantia lly reduced . How does pranic energy affect th e cell and its parts? How was the damage prevented or redu ced on the cellular level? , When orange-red pranic energy is directed to a fresh wound, it causes the wound to heal rapidly . Does orange-red prana stimulat e th e production of certain chemical .or chemicals that accelerat es the repair of the wound? If this is so,it might be possible to synthetically produce it . Similar research can be directed on ot her color pranas.
SEED IDEAS
.103
You can experiment by regularly throwing th e d iseased energy of your patients to a plant. The plant would defin itely weaken and gradually die if th e experiment is cont inued for a prolonged period of tim e. A hospital room that is relatively free of germs but has been occupied by many severely sick pat ient s may in th e long ru n become etherically very dirty. In such a case, th e room is considered "unlucky" by th e medical personnels working in the hospital. They are aware that such a room tends to have higher mortality rate but th ey do not understand why. It is advisable to etherically clean hospital rooms at regular intervals, especially those rooms occupied by severely sick pat ient s and those who were suffering from lingering, depressive, and very painful ailments.
There are several ways of et herically cleaning a room. The first method is to open the curtains and windows to let sunlight and fresh air in for several days or even weeks. Th is is exactly what some shamans or American Indian healers are doing. Th ey would extract diseased energy from the pati ent and deposit the diseased energy in a container filled with to bacco and wat er (bioplasmic waste disposal unit) . The container is then exposed to sunlight and wind in order to gradually disintegrate th e diseased energy.
HYGIENE AND DISEASED BIOPLASMIC MATTER The study of hygiene should include not on ly germs and 'dirt but also diseased bioplasmic matter or diseased energy . This Iseased bioplasmic matter or diseased energy can be transmitled to another person. In the earlier chapters, you learned about sweeping in ord er to remove diseased etheric matter or diseased nergy, Some of you may have experienced pain or discomfort o n th e hand s when applying sweeping, and energizing. A healer, who do es not throw the diseased energy and does not wash his hand s after treatment, may experience the symptoms or ailments " of his patients. This will severely affect the health of the healer n th e long run.
The second method is to expose the room to orange and green lights for several hours. Green light, and orange light have disintegrating and expelling effects on th e diseased bioplasmic matter. The third method is to use religious rituals. Incen se, salt water and prayer are used. Different types of incense and per-. fumes have different effects on the bioplasmic matter. Some incense (like sandalwood) have cleansing effects while others have cementing or solidifying effects. Hence, you cannot just use any type of incense for cleansing.
304
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC il EALING
Diseased energy can also transmit psychological ailm ents. When a patient talks about his psychological problem, pent-up negativ e emotional energy in the form of diseased bioplasmic matt ers are released by the patient and are usually absorbed by t he psychotherapist especially if the psychotherapist is qu ite o pen, understanding and compassionate. The release of negative emoti onal energy is clairvoyantly seen as brightening up of th e patient's auras due to the release of greyish energy of different co lors. The unconscious absorption of this negative energy by the psychotherapist pr oduces immed iate and long run problems. T he Immed iate problem may manifest as family problem since th e psychotherapist may try to unconsciously release the negat ive e nergy or "take it out" on the immed iate members of the famil y. Under norma l circumsta nces, the body 's defense system can expel the negative energy and recover just through a good night leep, But since this is done regularly, th e negative emotion al energy in the form of diseased bioplasmic matter accumulates nd inevitably manifests as chakral imb alances. These chakral imbalances may manifest as psy chological problems or symptoms imilar to his patients. It may manifest phy sically as low energy level or "burnt-out effect," heart problem or chest pain, ra pid ging, and other physical ailments. And how can the healer protect him self fro m negativ e emo ion al energy? There are already several books written about his. See suggested readings on esoteric practices. The author ma y seriously consider writing a book o n pranic psychotherapy '" th e near future. RANIC PSYCHOTHERAPY Pranic healing can also be applied in treating psychological ilments. Psychological ailments manifest as malfunctioning o veract ivat ed , underactivated, congestion or depletion) of some aja r chakras and as traumatic or inhibiting energies lodged in ertain major chak ras. This traumatic or inhibiting energies are lairvoyantly seen as greyish or darkish energies.
305
SEEomEAS
Te nsio n or Stress T en sion manifest s as temporary malfunctioning (congestion or deP,!etion) of the solar plexus chakra . The health rays are partiall y affected and are seen as wavy inst ead o f being straight. The ou te r aura is slightly grey ish. Apply loca lized sweepi ng on the solar plexus chakr a. 1. Energize it with light pink prana. If done properly, the subject will fee l substant ial relief. Pin k prana is harmonizing and co mfort ing. It is seen on wo men who ar e pregnant and on persons who are in love. Pink prana is also seen when par ent s shower th eir children wit h affection . 2. Clean the front heart chakra and ene rgize it through t he back heart chakra with light pink prana. 3. If the ajna cbakra is also affected , clean thoroughly and energize wit h light viol et prana. <1 • ,Apply general sweeping and visualize the patient is enveloped with p ink prana. Th e subject will feel relaxed and at ease .
Slight Depression Depression could be caused by physical a ilme nt , climatic condition ("winter blues" or d epression is pr evalent in cold countries with long cold winter) and traumatic experience which has inhibiting effec t s on t he cha kras. With slight d epr ession , the pranic energy level of th e patient is low . T he basic chakra, t he meng mein chakra, the navel chakra, t he spleen chak ra , t he solar plexus chakra, and the ajna chakra are usually depleted. The inner aura is about four to five inches in t hickness but is less d en se compared to the inn er aura of a healthy person. 1.
Apply general sweeping with light red prana.
2.
To increase the pranic energy level, clean and energize
a06
TH E ANCI ENT SCIENCE AND ART OF I'IIANIC HEALIN G
the basic chakra and the meng mein chakra wit h light red prana for abo ut five breathing cycles. Then clean and energize th e solar plexus chakra with light red prana. If done properly, t he patient will feel substantial improvement. 3. Another way of increasing th e pra nic energy level is by cleansing and energizing th e basic chakra, th e navel chakra, t he hand chakras and t he sole chakras with light red prana . Th en clean and energize the solar plexus chakra with light red prana , 4. If t he ajna chakra is affected, clean and energize wit h light violet prana, If the front heart chakra is affected, clean and energize it with light pink through t he back heart chakra. Repeat treatment twice a week. Daily exercise, lying on the ground or resting . under a big healthy tree, and lots of sunlight would be most help[ul. Severe Depression In severe depression, the patient is practically "lifeless" . He hard ly ta lks, moves or does anything. A severely depressed patient has a very low pranic or vital energy level. His inner au ra is greyish and is about two inches in t hickness. The major chakras are depleted (grey ish) and small about two inches in thickn ess only. The healt h aura and th e outer a ura are greyish. Inhib iting energies (darkish grey energy) d ue to traumatic experience are likely located at the solar plexus chakra and at th e crow n chakra. Energiz ing a severely depressed patient is just like energizing a vacuum. A more sensitive healer can lit erally feel his .pranic tmergy being sucked by the chakra being treated. A strong and healthy healer could be depleted just by tre ating ,a severely depressed patient unless precautionary measures are taken: 1.
Invoke the help of the Divine Provide nce.
2. If you have red ginseng, request t he pati ent to take two grams of it . Do not energize t he pat ient immediate ly. Wait for about ten minutes for the medicine to take its full effect. While waiting, apply genera l sweeping with whit ish violet prana several
SEED IDEAS
307
times with th e intention of et herically and psychically cleansing the auras and th e subtle bodies of the patient. 3. Apply general sweeping several times with red prana for st rengthening and vitalizing effects . It would be better if sweeping is done with th e patient resting on the ground and /or under a big tree in ord er to absorb ground and/or tree prana. Steps I, 2 and 3 are precautionary measures wh ich the healer can take to avoid being depleted . 4. Apply localized sweeping with light violet prana on the basic chakra and on the meng mein chakra. Apply the master healing t echnique using light red prana (activating and energizing the basic and meng mein chakras} , 5. Apply localized sweeping on the solar plexus chakra and on the crown chakra with light violet prana with a strong intention to disintegrate and remove the inhibiting energies . Energize the solar plexus chakra with light red prana and the crown chakra with light violet prana. 6. Clean and energize fully all the other major cbakras except for the navel chakra and th e spleen chakra which should only be slightly energized . 7.' After energizing each major chakra, the projected prana should be stabilized by projecting light blue prana for several seconds only on the chakra being treated. This is to prevent a substantial portion of the projected prana from escaping. 8. Repeat the treatment two to three times a week. If the treatment is done properly, it is likely that there will be noticeable improvement after the first treatment. Advise the patient to see a psychotherapist for complementary treatment. The patient should be encouraged to do a lot of physical exercise, to take two to four grams of red ginseng daily and to eat a lot of spicy foods. The color of the room of the patient should preferably be light red or orange.
30M
TH~;
ANCIENT SCIEN C": AND ART
O~'
PRANIC HEALING
ROTATION OF THE CHAKRAS In what direction does a chakra rotate? Som e students th ink it rotates counterclockwise while some think it rotates clockw ise. Both are partially co rrect and both are partially wrong . A chakra Is rapidly rotating alternately clockwise and counterclockwise. Clock wise motion 'd raws in pranic energy to th e chahra while counterclockwise motion projects or draws out pranic energy from the chahra. Clockwise mol ion o f th e chahra is absorbing iuhile counterclockwise motion of the chah ra is projecting or xpelling , When a healer draws in pranic energy through a chakra, he chakra is predominantly rotat ing cloc kwise and to a much lesser degree, rotating counterclo ckwise. When a 'healer projects prnnic energy through a chakra, it is pred ominantly rotat ing co unte rcloc kwise and to a much lesser degree, rotati ng clock. lvise. Under normal condition, a chakra is rotat ing clockwise nd counterclockwise in equ al proportion. So t he amount of ranie energy coming in and going out is about the same .
When energizing, the hand chakra is predominantly rotat ing counte rclockwise and to a lesser degree clockwi se (drawing in) . f his is why the energizing hand also absorbs di seased energy nd has to be flicked regularly to throwaway t he diseased energy. It is better to clean before energizing not only to redu ce th e possii1ity of radical reaction but also to minim ize t he quantity of iscased energy that be absorbed by the healer when enerizing. This is why th e auth or does not recommend healers to nergize with the use of th eir eyes or with a major chakra be cause th e eyes are very delicat e and d ifficult to clean while a b ajor chakra controls a vital organ or several organs. There is th e Possibility that th e corresponding or gan or organs would fully bsorb the diseased energy wh ich would be harmful to th e healer.
will
Und er normal condition, a chakra is drawing in and projectng pranic energy alternat ely at a rapid rat e. Th e amount of pranic nergy drawn in and 'p rojected are more or less equal. Th e chakra otates cloc kwise at one hund red eight y degre es and counterlockwise at on e hundred eighty degrees in th e opposite d irectio n Iternately at a rapid rat e. When the hand chakra predominantl y rojects, the counterclockwise motion is three hundred sixty
SEED IDEAS
309
degrees and the clockwise motion is only one hundred eighty degrees. When the hand chakra rotates counterclockwise, it projects pranic energy and , stops for a split second, then rotates in clockwise motion and draws in pranic energy and stops for a split second. The entire pro cess is repeated . The pranic energy pro. jected is not continuous nor is the pranic energy drawn in continuous. It only appears as continuous because the chakra is moving rapidly and alternately clockwise and counterclockwise; thereby, giving an appearance of cont inuous projection of pranic energy or continuous drawing in of pranic energy. The difference in th e intensity of prani c energy projected depends upon th e rate of rotation of the chakras. The faster it rotates, th e more intense is the projected pranic energy and the slower it rotates, the less intense is the pranic energy projected. When a hand chakra is predominantly absorbing it makes a three hundred sixty degree clockwise rotation and a one hundred E\ighty degree counterclockwise rotation and vice versa when it is predominantly projecting pranic energy. The intensity of pranic energy projected or absorbed does not involve changes in the pattern of rotation of the chakra but is dependent upon the rate of rotation of the chakra. The faster it rotates, the more intense is the projected or absorbed prana, In India, there are yogis who heal by placing one hand near the affected part, then moving it in circular motion. If the yogi wants to clean or decongest an affected part, he applies localized sweepin g by moving his hand several times in a counterclockwise motion with the intention of increasing the chakra's eounterclockwise motion; thereby, facilitating the removal of diseased energy. He then flicks his hand to throwaway the diseased energy. This process is continued until th e affected chakra becomes substantially clean. If the yogi wants to energize an affected chakra, he projects pranic energy and simultaneously moves his hand clockwise with the intention of making the affected chakra draw in more pranic energy by increasing the chakra's clockwise motion. Clockwise motion is drawing in while counterclockwise motion is drawing out or decongesting. The technique is simple and easy to apply. The appearance of the chakra is dependent upon its speed of rotation. Under normal condition, the rapid clockwise and coun-
310
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART or PRANIC ilEA LING
terclockwise rotations produce an optical effe ct mak ing the chak ra look like a lotus flow er with man y pointed petals. T he pointed petals are "optically produced" by the co mbined motio ns of pranic energy moving clockwise and cou ntercloc kwise. This is why in ancient Tibetan, Chinese and Sanskrit books on yoga, t he chakras are usually presented as lotus flow ers with many pointed petals. When a chakra is deliberately slowed down, the actual sha pe and number of petals can be clearly seen. The shape o f the petals of a chak ra is round . This is why t he petals o f the ch akr as described by Leadbeater are round, not pointed . When the chakra is moving very rapidly, the chakra bulges o ut o r becomes qu it e thick. When it is rotating at a n ext reme ly rapid rat e, the ch ak ra appears as a dazzling point o f light . When a sp iritu al aspirant is meditating, spiritual and pranic energies are attract ed to the head area. This is why advanced yogis or saints are clairvoyantly seen with dazzling o r blinding light on the head area (sp iritual "halo.").
311
SF.F.D IDF.AS
, "-
.. ..... . . . .
three-sided pyram id
(our-sided pyramid
GEOMETRIC PRANIC GENERATOR
A four -sided pyram id, a three-sided pyramid, and a cone generate o r focus pranic energy or vitality glo bules within itself. More air vitality globules are co ntained within these geo met ric figures than in the air, hen ce, th ey are called pranic gene rators , T he pranic energy or air vitality globules in these geo me t ric figu res is as dense, if not denser, than the gro und prana or vitality globules . R ecuperating inside a geo me tric pranic generator i.' similar to resting and recuperating o n the ground in ord er to absorb ground ' pranic energy. Better results can be obtained by cleansing th e body with th e application ofgeneral and localized sweeping. Experiments can be done by wearing a co ne headge ar o n top of the crown to increase one's learning capacity, t o think faster and more ciearly, and to make better decision. This is probably why ancient " magicians" or wise men are so metime s depict ed with cone-shaped headgear.
Healing or treating patients inside a geome tric pranic generator is a lot easier. Since the healing space o r area is filled wit h dense pranic energy , drawing in pranic energy and project ing
cone Pig. 10-1 Three-Dimensional Pranic Generator pranic energy can be done faster and w ith greater ease. Very often using a three-dimensional geometric pranic gen erator is not possible . A two-d ime nsio na l geometric pranic generator can then be used. Conce ntric squares, triangles, and circles are two-dimensional geometric pranic generators. Th ere are many variations of these two-d imen sio nal pran ic gene rators. These two-dim ensional geometric pran ic generato rs are less po te nt than the three-dimensional ones bu t are still considerably potent and useful. The wall or (Ioor where pranlc treatment will be given can be designed with a tWf-dimensional geometric pranic gen erator. It is better to use only one design, not several combined designs because it will cause co nfu sio n in the et heric bodies of persons within the geometric pranic generat or. It is better to use the square or the triangle
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC ilEA LING
312
313
SEED IDEAS
ordinary pranic generator powerful pranic gen erator Fig. 10·2 Concentric Sq uare Pranic Generator
ordinary pranic generator
powerful pranic generator
Fig. 10-3 Conce ntric Triangle Pranic Gene rator
designs than the circle design since some patients may not be able to withstand the type of pranic energy generated by the cone or the concentric circle design. \
PRANIC LASER THERAPY In healing with the use of color lights or chromotherapy, some healers have the wrong concept that it is color alone that heals. Unless this concept is corrected, progress in this field will remain slow. It is not color light that heals but the vitality globules or pranic energy that has been transformed by the color light to a specific color prana that heals. Obviously, the density or the quantity of pranic energy (vitality globules) in the healing room is a very critical factor. If the healing room contains more pranic energy, then the pranic treatment will be more effective and vice versa. This is why it is advisable to use geometric pranic generator to increase th e quantity of air prana in the healing room.
Another Important factor is the degree of permanency or stability of the transformed color pranic energy. This is dependent upon the distance between the treated part and th e source of color light. If the distance is too short, the transformed color prana
ordinary pranic generato r
powerful pranic gene rator
Fig. 10·4 Concen tric Circle Pranic Generato r
will revert back to white prana. Although the treatment will still be effective, it will not be as effective as when the transformed color pranic energy re mains as is. As discussed in t he earlier chapt er, color prana is faster and more effect ive than white prana whe n used correctly'. Th e potency of pranic energy is affected by its velocity and its rat e of vibration. The velocity of th e pranic energy is affected
314
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE ANll ART OF PRANIC m ;ALl NG
by th e distance. Th e further th e distance between the treated part and the source of co lo r light, the faster is th e velocity of t he vitality globules. If th e distance is too short, th e velocity is not fast enough ; therefore, th e potency of prani c energy is not strong enough . If th e distance is too far, the velocity of the vitality glob . ules will also be very fast. This may result in some dam aging effects. The use of soft laser light in pranic th erapy (laser pran ic therapy) is a more advan ced form of pranic chromotherapy. The effect of pranic laser th erapy is very fast and co mparable to pranic treatment done by an "advanced pranic healer ". It is prophesied by Respected Teacher Mei Ling, that a few decades from now pranic laser therapy will be widely used. Th e followi ng are suggested guidelines given by Teacher Mei Ling: a) Substance used in generating laser light should have carbon content ranging from fifty to eighty percent. Within this range, the pranic laser treatment is quite effect ive. Below th is range, it is not so effective. And beyond this range the treatment will have destructive effect s. It may be necessary to syntheti cally produce this substance. b) Th e distance between the part to be treated and t he source of -laser 'light should range from one to five feet . The distance affects the degree of permanency of transformed prana and th e potency of th e projected prani c energy (velocity of th e projected prana). If it is too far, th e velocity of th e proj ect ed vitality globules would be too fast and would have damaging effect. c) Th e power or wattage should preferably range from fift een to twenty five watts. If the wattage is too low, it will not be very effective. If it is too high, it will be de structive. d) In general, exposure time should range from one to seven seconds. It the exposure time is too short, the projected pranic energy will not be sufficient. If th e exposure tim e is too long, there will be an overdose.
SEED IDEAS
315
The healing room should preferably have a geometric pranic generator. This is to increase the density or the amount of air vitality globules in the healing room. The patient should be scanned before and after treatment. General and localized sweeping should be applied before energizing . Further localized sweeping may be required after energizing. While energizing, the pro jected pranic energy should be directed to the affected organ and should be stabilized. An experiment can be done on rapid healing of fresh wounds with the simultaneous use of soft red laser light and soft orange laser light . The given guidelines should not be accepted blindly but should be studied thoroughly and its validity tested through thorough experiments. Knowledge is neither good nor bad . It is how men make use of it that makes it good or bad. Hence, the development of the heart should be emphasized, especially, among scientists, businessmen, and politicians.
. . . that we must not belieue in a thing said merely because it is said; nor traditions because they haue been handed down from antiquity; nor rumors, as such; nor writings by sages. because sages wrote them: nor fancies that we may suspect to haue been inspired in us by a Deoa (that is, in presumed spiritual inspiration); nor from inferences drawn from some haphazard assumption we may haue made; nor because of what seems an analogical necessity ; nor on the mere authority of our teachers or masters. But we are to belieue when the writing, doctrin e. or saying is corroborated by our own reason and consciousness. "For this," says he in concluding, "I taught you not to belieue merely because you haue heard. but when you belieued of your consciousness. then to act accordingly and abundantly ." - Lord Buddha (Secret Doctrine, Vol . III, page 401.)
Commentaries... I
.
do not really know the author Choa Kok Sui; I met him only once. But he so impressed me by his gentleness, his quiet humility, and the zealous expression of his eyes. And when I read his book on the ancient art of pranic healing, I realized that he, too, was p~ofound, sympathetic to human predicaments; and most important of all, he possesses that admirable Christian trait of sacrificing to help a neighbor. His book exudes all this in every chapter. There is no attempt of sounding intellectual, or esoteric or pretentious. In fact, the author has simplified his language to such a praiseworthy point that even those with a minimal understanding of the psychic sciences and non-medical healing can grasp the full meaning and import of his principles, directions and even exercises. I, for one, found his expositions so clear that I can almost see myself doing the processes as I went along. r His definitions are devoid of presumptuous terminologies that are abstract and vague. They are, in fact, lucidly basic, making one feel secure that the author knows what he is talking about. Although one may encounter such words as prana or hi, bioplasmic body, chahras, etheric body, etc. for the first time - meaning that one has had no previous psychic experience and knowledge he never gets lost in the book, because all these term;are explained so clearly and simply. The reader will, no doubt, learn the science of pranic healing through the book, by putting its directions to work, and following the exercises strictly. It is, in fact, the author's intention to
318
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF rRANIC HEALING
make you a healer yourself, to give your life some definite relevance in the realm of psychic relationships, and to make you know that, above all, you are your brother's keeper. The contour of human society is hard to discern and, therefore, difficult to understand. Thus, the physical body becomes intertwined in various mortal mazes that bring about disease and insecurity. Through pranic healing, as carefully outlined by the author, we discover the way out of these entanglements and become aware of the close interrelationships between this body and the etheric body through which healing can come. The author proves his mettle successfully by placing his wisdom along with those of other wisdoms from other ages, places and situations. Thus, we see the tenets of the author placed side by side for effective comparison and proof of truth and virtue in application with those of the Russian scientists and other psychic authorities through centuries of human history. The book of Choa Kok Sui is a landmark in the history of psychic healing in our country. No one has attempted a book of this kind and consequence before. Perhaps, because no one has a grasp of this subject - in theory, experience; and application as thoroughly as he. The testimonials may seem like an unnecessary appendage to the book, like our tonsils or the vermiform appendix, both of which may be excised without any harm or risk. But like these two organs, the testimonials also have some relevance. They serve as "proof of the pudding," which is in the eating. They further reinforce the basic structure of the science and art of pranic healing built up so meticulously and well in the book. This is a book for everyone. Interesting enough to just read; but valuable beyond measure to follow, practice and use for the good ' of all children of God, from whom all blessings emanate with love and joy. (Signed) CELSO AL. CARUNUNGAN, Ph.D. Chairman of the Board of Regents Parnantasan ng Lungsod ng Maynila (University of the City of Manila) July 20, 1987
COMMENTARIES
319
I first met Choa Kok Sui in a bookshop. He was introduced to me by Benny Arguelles. After sometime, we started talking about healing. He taught me basic cleansing and how to energize with prana, Being a physician, I was of course quite skeptical but being a student of esoteric science I tried to keep my mind open. I encountered my first case accidentally when I went home to the province. My sister introduced me to a restaurant owner who was at that moment suffering from emphysema. He has this problem for many years. Emphysema is a form of lung ailment in which the patient can inhale easily but has difficulty in exhaling. This produces pressure in the lung tissue and the air infiltrates the intertecial cells and this is very difficult to remove medically. I decided to experiment on this patient. After giving him a pranic treatment, I did not expect anything to happen. But to my surprise after about thirty minutes, the patient got up and was greatly relieved. The patient thought that it was some sort of a miracle. But I explained to him that pranic healing is very scientific and that the Russians have been studying the energy body for many years with the use of Kirlian Photography. My second 'case is an asthmatic patient. She has been suffering from asthma since childhood. She is about thirty seven years old. The result was more or less the same with emphysema but easier to treat. The response was very dramatic. The patient was completely relieved in about thirty minutes. She was smiling after the treatment. After having experimented on several patients with Pranic Healing, I attended a three-day workshop on basic Pranic Healing. The next case is a sixty-five-year -old male patient suffering from joint pain. The pain was on the left knee. At the same time the patient was suffering from acute indigestion. He was lying on the bed and has to force himself to sit up because it was very painful for him to move. After applying pranic healing in less than an hour, the pain on the left knee and on the abdominal area were gone completely. Rheumatism is one of the easiest ailment to relieve . My wife was suffering pain on the fingers, on the elbows, on the knees,
, 20
321
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
md on the hips. She is about sixty years old. Because of the pain ihe could not sleep that night so I experimented with pranic rea ling again. She was relieved immediately. Another interesting case was a patient who suffered minor njuries when he was hit by a truck while biking home. He suf~ered bruises on the left leg and on the left part of his body. He lias very much in pain for more than a week but after pranie reallng was applied, he was relieved and was able to bike again. he pain disappeared in less than an hour. I have treated a one year old child with cough and in less han thirty minutes the child was relieved and was already play~ g.
The next case is a fifty year old patient suffering from genTal body weakness due to anemia. He was very weak. After the eatrnent, the general body weakness was gone. Before the treatent , th e patient was lethargic; but after the treatment, he was 'ery active. I have treated so many patients with pranic healing and most f th em have responded very well. • Pranic healing is indeed simple and easy to learn. At least il l' member in each family should know pranie healing. It is ry useful in relieving simple ailment and as well as a form of anic first aid.
, I hereby certify that the facts herein mentioned in the pre. ing commentary are true and correct.
(Signed) DR . MANUEL M. FERNANDO, Jr. M.D. Retired Medical Officer 122 T. delos Santos Street, Munoz Nueva Ecija, Philippines
MEl LING HEALING CENTERS:
1. 30 Kamuning Road, Quezon City, M.~.
. 2. 89 12th Avenue, Cubao, Quezon City, M.M. 3. 261 -A Rodriguez 51. cor. H. Lopez Boulevard, Balut, Tondo, M.M.
/
324
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
Appendix A 3.03. 3.04. 3.05.
Five Basic Techniques in Elementary Pranic Healing, 32 . Sensitizing the Hands, 32 Scanning, 34 3.05.01. Procedure for Scanning the Outer Aura, 34 3.05.02. Procedure for Scanning the Health Aum, 35 3.05.03. Procedure for Scanning the Inner Aum, 35
3.06. 3.07. 3.08. 3.09. 3.10. 3.11. 3.12. 3.13. 3.14. 3.16. 3.16. 3.17. 3.18. 3.19. 3.20.
Interpreting Results (rom Scanning the Inner Aum, 36 Sweeping, 39 General Sweeping, 40 Localized Sweeping, 43 Energizing with Prana: Hand Chakm Technique, 45 Stabilizing the Projected Prana , 51 Bioplasmic Waste Disposal Unit, 52 Suggested Practice Schedule, 53 Three Things to Avoid in Pranic Healing, 54 Steps in Healing, 55 Can You Heal Without Scanning, 56 Washing of the Hands, 57 Critical Factors in Healing, 57 Insulating Garments, 58 Seven Major Chakras, 58
MASTER GUIDE TO CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 - THE NATURE OF PRANIC HEALING, 1
1.01. 1.02. 1.03. 1.04. 1.05. 1.06. 1.07.
What is Pranic Healing, 2 Prana or Ki, 2 . Bioplasmic Body, 4 Meridians or Bioplasmic Channels, 5 Prana or Ki Used in Acupuncture, Acupressure, and Reflexology, 5 What Can Pranie Healing Do?, 6 Pranic Healing is Easy to Learn, 7
CHAPTER 2 - INNER , HEALTH, AND OUTER AURAS OF THE BIOPLASMIC BODY, 9
2.01. 2.02. 2.03. 2.04. 2.05. 2.06. 2.07" 2.08. 2.09. 2.10.
2.11.
The Intimate Relationship Between the Bioplasmic Body and the Physical Body, 12 Diseases First Appear"on 'the Bioplasmic Body and Can be Prevented from Manifesting-, 13 Chakras or Energy Centers, 14 The Mechanism Behind Psychosomatic Diseases, 15 The Mind Can Influence to a Certain Degree the Pattern of the Bioplasmic Body, 16 The External and Internal Factors of Diseases, 17 What are the Functions of the Bioplasmic Body?, 19 Basic Problems and Treatments in Pranic Healing, 20 COurse Outline, 20 References and Recommended Readings, 21 Modem Findings, 23
CHAPTER 3 - ELEMENTARY PRANIC HEALING, 27
3.01. 3.02.
Two Basic Principles in Pranic Healing, 28 Hand and Finger Chakms, 30
325
APPENDIX A
3.20.01. 3.20.02. 3.20.03. 3.20.04. 3.20.06. 3.20.06. 3.20.07. 3.21.
Basic Chakra, 68 Sex Chakra, 58 Solar Plexus Chakm, 68 Heart Chakra, 69 Throat Chakra, 60 Ajna Chakra, 60 Crown Chakra, 61
Treatments for Simple Cases, 62 3.21.01. 3.21.02. 3.21.03. 3.21.04. 3.21.05. 3.21.06. 3.21.07. 3.21.08.
Headache, 62 Eyestmin or Tired Eyes, 63 Toothache, 63 Cold with Cough and Stuffy Nose, 64 Fever, 64 Stomach Pain and Gas Pain, 66 Diarrhea, 66 Constipation, 67
TIlE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
326
' Dysmenorrhea , 68 Irregular Menstruation or No Menstruation , 69 3.21.11. Muscle Pain and Sprain, 69 3.21.12. Backache, 70 3.21.13. Difficulty in Raising the Arm, 70 3.21.14. Cuts, Burns, And Concussions, 70 3.21.15. Insomnia, 71 3.21 .16. General Weakness, 71 In sect And Bug Bites, 73 3.21.17. 3.21.18. Boils, 73 3.21.19. Pimples, 7 3 3.21.20. Hiccup, 74 3.21.21. Nosebleed, 74 3 .21.22. Stiff Neck, 74 3.21.23. Muscle Crathps, 74
327
APPENDIX A
3.21.09. 3.21.10.
4.12.02. 4.12.03.
4.13. 4.14.
Energizing Objects, 97 Eleven Major Chakms, 98 4.14.01. 4.14.02. 4.14.03. 4.14.04. 4:14.05. 4.14.06. 4.14.07 . 4.14.08. 4.14.09. 4.14.10. 4.14.11 .
3.22. How Frequent Should Healing Be Done?, 75 3.23. Wholistic or Integrated Approach in Healing, 76 3.24. ' How Do You Will or Intent?, 77 4.15.
Short Circuiting - Cleansing and Energizing, 96 Short Circuiting - Redistribution of Prana,96 ,
Crown Chakra, 98 Forehead Chakra, 98 Ajna Chakra, 98 Throat Chakra, 98 Heart Chakra, 99 Solar Plexus Chakra, 101 Spleen Chakra, 102 Navel Chakra , 102 Meng Mein Chakra, 103 Sex Chakra, 103 Basic Chakra, 103
Treatment for Simple and Serious Cases, 106
CHAPTER 4 - INTERMEDIATE PRANIC HEALING, 79
4.15.01. 4.01. 4.02. 4.03. 4.04. 4.05. 4.06. 4.07. 4.08. 4.09. 4.10. 4.11. 4.12 .
Drawing In Prana Through Pranic Breathing, 80 How To Draw In Ground Prana, Air Prana, and Tree Pmna,82 Sensitizing the Hands Through Pranic Breathing, 86 Scanning with the Fingers, 86 Sweeping with Pranic Breathing, 88 Energizing with Pranic Breathing, 89 Energizing: Distributive Sweeping Technique, 91 Disposing Diseased Bioplasmic Matter, 91 Utilizing Ground Prana in Healing, 93 Receptive Pose, 93 Suggested Practice Schedule, 94 Other Healing Te chniques, 94 4.12.01. Extraction Technique, 94 4.12 .01.01. Primitive, 95 4.12.01.02. Elementary, 95 4.12.01.03. Advanced,95
4.15.02. 4 .15.03. 4 .15.04. 4.15 .05. 4.15 .06. 4.15.07 . 4.15.08. 4.15.09. 4.15.10. 4 .15 .11. 4.15.12. 4.15.13. 4.15.14. 4.15.15.
Increasing the Body's Defense System by Increasing the Vital Energy Level, 106 Measles, German Measles, and Chicken Pox, 106 Mumps, and Tonsilitis, 107 Fainting, 108 Nearsightedness, Farsightedness and Astigmatism, 109 Cross-eyes and Walleyes, 110 Glaucoma, 110 Heart Ailments, 111 Lung Ailments, 114 Asthma,116 Liver Ailments, 118 Gastric and Duodenal U1cers,120 Kidney and Bladder Infections, 120 Sexual Ailments, 121 Ailments of the Endocrine Glands, 122
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
328
4.16. 4.17. 4.18. 4.19. 4.20. 4.21. 4.22.
4.15.16. Broken Bones and Broken Fingers, 122 4.15.17. Small Busts, 123 4.15.18. Thinning Hair, 123 4.15.19. Hemorrhoid, 123 4.15.20 . Chronic Appendicitis, 124 4.15.21. Sinusitis, 124 4.15.22. Loss of Smell, 124 Principle of Lag Time, 125 How Long Does It Take To Completely Cure a Patient?, 125 Pregnant Women, 126 Immediate Recurrence of Pain or Symptoms, 126 Reasons Why Some Patients are Not Healed, 127 Personal Health Problems That a Healer May Encounter, 128 Rate of Vibration of the Bioplasmic Body, 130
CHAPTER 5 - SELF PRANIC HEALING,133 5.01. 5.02. 5.03. 5.04. 5.05. 5.06. 5.07. 5.08.
Method #1 - Manual Approach, 133 Method #2 - Pore Breathing Technique, 134 Method ..3 - Taoist Technique ot Taoist Six Healing Sounds, 134 Method #4 - Chakral Breathing Technique, 135 General Cleansing and Energizing, 136 Method # 1 - Pranic Breathing, 137 Method #2 - Visualization Approach, 137 Method #3 - Meditation on the White Light,137
5.09.01. 5.09.02. 5.10. 5.11. 5.12. 5.13. 5.14. 5.15. 5.16. 5.17.
5.18. 5 .19. 5.20.
Assigning Healing Angels , 151 Principle of Diversion or Releasing, 152 Teaching Pati ent s How to Heal Themselves, 154
CHAPT ER 6 - D ISTANT PRANIC HEALING (ABSENT HEALING), 157 6.01. 6.02 .
Distant Scanning , 158 Distant Cleansing and Energizing, 159 6 .02.01. 6.02.02.
6 .03.
Method #1,159 Method #2 ,"160
References and Suggested Readings, 161
CHAPTER 7 - ADVANCED PRANIC HEALING , 163 7.01.
Color Pranas, 164 7.01.01. 7.01.02. 7.01.03. 7.01.04. 7 .01.05.
7.02 .
7.03. 7.04.
Red Prana , 165 Orange Prana, 165 Green Prana, 166 Yellow Prana, 167 Blue Prana, 168
Eleven Mllior Chams, 170 7.02.01. 7.02.02 . 7 .02.03. 7.02.04 . 7.02.05 . 7.02.06. 7.02.07 . 7.02.08. 7.02.09. 7.02 .10. 7.02.11 .
Part 1: General Cleansing and Energizing, 137 Part 2 : Circulating Prana , 138
Physical Exercises, 139 Wholistic Approach in Healing Oneself, 141 Problems Encountered in Self-Healing, 141 Karma, 142 Karma and the Golden Rule, 143 Suggested Ethical Guidelines, 146 Terminology, 146 Invocative Pranic Healing, 147 '
329
APPENDIX A
Basic Chakra, 170 SexChakra, 170 Meng Mein Chakra, 187 Navel Chakra , 187 Spleen Chakra , 187 Solar Plexus Chakra, 188 Heart Chakra , 188 Throat Chakra , 189 Ajna Chakm, 189 Forehead Chakm, 189 Crown Chakra , 189
Energizing with Color Pranas, 190 More About Energizing, 192
330
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
7 .05. Advanced General Sweeping, 193 7.06. , Advanced Localized Sweeping, 194 7.07. Decongesting or Loosening, 194 7.08. Cleansing Delicate Organs, 194 7 .09. How Long Should Energizing Be Done?, 195 7.10. How Frequent Should the Treatment Be Given?, 196 7.11. Invocation Before Healing, 196 7 .12. Treating Infants and Old People, 196 7.13 . Infection and Inflammation, 196 7.14. Strengthening, 197 7.15. Inhibiting, 198 7.16. Disintegrating Deposits, 198 7.17. Acute Allergy, 198 7.18. How to Activate a Chakra, 199 7 .19. Master Healing Technique - Activating and Energizing the Basic Chakra and the Meng Mein Chakra, 199 7.20. How to Activate the Adrenal Glands , 204 7 .21. Activating and Energizing the Basic Chakra and the Perineum Chakra, 204 7 .22. Instantaneous Healing of a Fresh Wound: Orang e-red Prana , 205 7 .23 . Broken Bones, 208 7 .24. Rapid Healing of Old Wounds and Bums: Green-Red Prana,208 7.25. Regeneration: Green-yellow Prana and Green -violet Prana, 209 7.26. More About Karma, 209 7 .27 . Orange-Yellow Prana, 210 7.28. Pranic Healing Applied In Surgery , 211 7.29. Rapid Growth: Red Prana and Yellow Prana, 212 7 .30. Increasing Resistance Against Infection, 213 7 .31. To Stop the Bleeding , 213 7.32. Steps in Healing , 213 7.33 . Leukemia ,215 7.34. Sickle Cell Anemia, 21 5 7 .35. Cancer or Malignant Tumour, 216 7 .36. Cyst, 217 7 .37 . Venereal Diseases, 217 7 .38. Sexual Impotence, 218
, I,
I
,
APPENDIX A
7 .39. 7 .40 . 7 .41. 7 .42. 7. 43. 7.4 4. 7 .45. 7 .46. 7 .47 . 7 .48 . 7 .49 : 7.50 . 7. 51. 7 .52. 7 .53. 7 .54. 7 .55 . 7 .56 . 7 .57 . 7 .58. 7 .59 . 7.60. 7.61. 7 .62. 7.63.
7 .64. 7 .65 . 7.66. 7.67. 7.68. 7.69. 7 .70. 7.71 . 7.72. 7 .73.
Irregular Menstruat ion and Dysmenorr hea , 218 Backac he or Injured Back, 21 8 Diabetes , 219 Ast hma, 219 Lun g Infect ion, Tuberculosis, 220 Sin usitis and Stuffy Nose, 221 Cough,222 Nearsightedness, Farsight edn ess, Astigmatism, Cross-eyes , Walleyes, Cataract , 222 Glauco ma, 223 Float er , 224 Eye Infecti on , 224 Chronic Red Eyes , 22 4 Acute App endicitis , 225 Heart Ailments, 226 High Blood Pressure, 228 Arteriosclerosis (Hard ening of t he Arteries), 229 Arthrit is or Rheumatism, 230 New and Old Sprai n, 231 How To Strengthen t he Legs, 232 How To Strengt hen t he Arms, 232 Fe ver, 233 Acute Pancreatitis, 233 Hep atit is, 234 Gallstone, 235 Peptic Ulcer , 236 7 .6 3.01. Mild Gastric or Duodenal Ulcer , 23 6 7. 63.02 . Severe Cases, 236 Hern ia, 237 Sto nes in the Urinary Syste m, 238 Inflammation of t he Urinary Syst em, 239 Deafness, 239 Headache, Toothache, Stomac hache, Constipati on and Diarrhea, 2 41 Insomnia , 241 Concussion , 242 Fainting, 242 Drowning, 242 Food Poison ing, 24 2
331
;132
7 .74. 7.75. 7.76. 7.77 .
THE ANCIENT SCIENCt: AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
Sk in Blemishes , 243 Epilepsy , 243 Summary, 243 Popularizing Pranic Healin g, 245
333
APPENDIX A
CHAPTER 9 - MEDITATION ON THE TWO HEARTS (ILLUMINATION TECHNIQU E), 275
9 .01.
Procedure, 278
9 .01.01. CHAPT ER 8 - T ESTIMONIA LS, 247
8.01 . 8.02 . 8.03. 8 .04 .
8 .05 .
8 .06 . 8.07. 8.08. 8.09. 8.10. 8 .11 .
8 .12 .
Pia Victoria Case : Glaucoma and Chest Pains, 2 47 Allan C. Canete Case : One Day Old Wound (Instantaneous Healing) , 2 49 Romualdo Can ete Case : Cardiac Injury, 251 Raphael Acenas (Student of Pranic Healing) Cases Handled: Headache , Muscle Pa in and Toothache , 254 Francisco M. Bansu elo, Jr. (Student of Pranic Healing) Cases handled : Headache, To othache, Gas Pain, Muscle Pain, 256 Luz Jubay Case: Prevented Possible Miscarriage, 257 Teofilo P. Velasco \ Case : Heart Ailm ent and Hard ened Muscles , 259 Merlita d elo s Santos Case : Urin ary Ailm en t of Her Son, Alvin , 261 Vicky Suarez I Case: Pneumoniti s , 263 Michael Chua Case: Pancreatitis , 265 Roy B. Boquiron (Pranic Healer) Cases handled: Hea rt Ailment, High Fever, . Food Poisoning, Asthma, High Blood Pressure, LeUkemia, Emotional Problem , 266 Steve B. Boquiron (Pranic Healer) Cases handled: Temporary Blindness; Pain on the Eye, Forehead, Temple, Arms, Armpit, and Hands; High Blood Pressure; Continuous Menstrual Bleeding; Fever , 270
9 .01. 02 . 9.01.03. 9.01.04. 9.01.05 .
9 .01.06. 9.01.07 . 9 .01.08.
9.02 .
Cleansing the Etheric Body Through Physical Exercise , 278 Invocation for Divine Blessing, 278 Activating the Heart Chakra - Blessing the Entire Earth with Loving-Kindness, 279 Activating the Crown Chakra - Blessing the Earth with Loving-Kindness, 280 To Achi eve Illumination - Meditation on the Light, on the Aum and the Gap Between the Two Aums , 280 Releasing Excess Energy, 281 Giving Thanks, 281 Strengthening the Visible Physical Body Through Massage and More Physical Ex ercise , 282
T estimonials
9.02.01. 9 .02 .02. 9 .02 .03.
Roy B. Boq uiron, 286 Erlinda Andrada, 289 Rolando A. Carbonell, 291
CHAPT ER 10 - SEED IDEAS , 295
10.01. Nutrition and Pran a , 296 10.02. Ginseng , 297 10.03. Classifying Drugs By Using the Properties of Color Prana , 299 Etheric Beings, Current s, Planets , 300 10.04. 10 .05. More Research Needed in th e Field of Pranic Healing, 3011 10 .06. Hygien e and Diseased Biop lasmic Matter, 302 10.07. Pranic Psychotherapy , 304 10.07.01. Tension or Stress, 305 10.07.02. Slight Depression , 305 10.07.03. Severe Depression, 306 10.08 . Rotation of the Chakras, 308 10.09 . Geometric Pranic Generator, 310 10.10. Pranic Laser Th erapy . :112
33 334
APPENDlXB
TilE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OFPRANIC HEALING
Appendix B
Theosophical Society in the Philippines, 1 Iba Street co ner P. Florentino Street, Quezon City, Philippines. T~ No.7 41-57-40.
ESOTERIC ORGANIZATIONS
1.
Agni Yoga Society, 319 West 107th Street, New York, NY 10025, U.S.A. (Books & Verballnstruetions)
2.
A.M.O.R.C., Rosicrucian Order, Rosicrucian Park, San Jose, California 95191, U.S.A. (Correspondence Course & Books)
3.
The Arcane School, 113 University Place, 11th Floor, New York, N.Y., 10003, U.S.A. (Correspondence Course & Books)
4.
Astara, 800 W. Arrow Hwy., P.O. Box 5003, Upland, CA 91785, U.S.A. (Correspondence Course & Books)
5.
Builders of the Adytum, 5105 N. Figueroa Street, Los ' Angeles, CA 90042, U.S.A. (Correspondence Course, Books & Training Centers)
6.
The Rosicrucian Fellowship, P. O. Box 173, Oceanside, California 92054, U.S.A. (Correspondence Course & Books)
7.
Self-Realization Fellowship, 3880 San Rafael Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90065, U.S.A . (Correspondence Course, Books & Training Centers)
8.
Sufi Order, 408 Precita Ave., San Francisco, CA 94110, U.S.A. (Books & Verbal Instructions)
9.
Theosophical Society, Adyar, Madras 600020, India (Books & Lectures).
,
AUTHOR'S NOTE: These esoteric organizations would be very happy to help and guide spiritual aspirants in their studies and practices. All they have to do is to write to them and r.wl' ..·· ' for a catalogue or an introductory reading material.
336
APPENDlXC
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OFPRANIC HEALING
Appendix C
337
10.
Education in the New Age by Alice A. Bailey. Published by Lucis Publishing Company, 113 University Place, Eleventh Floor, New York, NY 10003.
11.
From Intellect to Intuition by Alice A. Bailey. Published by Lucis Publishing Company.
12.
Initiation : Human and Solar by Alice A. Bailey. Published by Lu cis Publishing Company.
13.
Th e Rays and Initiat ions (Volume V) by Alice A. Bailey. Published by Lucis Publish ing Company.
14.
Th e Externalisation of th e Hierarchy by Alice A. Bailey. Published by Luc is Publish ing Company.
RECOMMENDED BOOKS ON ESOTERIC TEACHINGS
1.
The Rosicrucian Cosmo- Conception by Max Heindel. Pub. Iished by The Rosicrucian Fellowship, International Head. quarters, P.O. Box 713, Oceanside, California 92054.
2.
The Etheric Double by Arthur E. Powell. Quest Book. Published by The Theosophical Publishing House, Wheaton, Il1inois.
3.
The Astral Body by Arthur E . Powell. Quest Book . Published by Theosophical Publishing House, Wheaton, Il1inois 60187.
15 .
The Mental BOdy by Arthur E. Powell. Published by The Theosophical Publishing House, London Ltd., 68 Great Russell Street, London, W.C.1, England . •
Freemasonry of the A ncient Egyptians by Manly P . Hall. Published by the Phil osophical Re search Society, Inc ., 3910 Los Feliz Boulevard, Los An geles, CA 90027.
16.
Th e Lo st Keys of Freemasonry by Manly P. Hall. Published by Macoy Publishing & Masonic Supply Company, In c., Rich mond, Virginia.
17 .
Th e Hidd en Life in Freemasonry by C.W. Leadbeater, Published by The Theosophical Publishing House, Adyar, India.
18.
Ancient Mystic Rites (originally published under the title Glimpses of Masonic History). Published by the Theosophical Publishing House.
4.
5.
The Causal Body and the .Ego by Arthur E. Powell. Published by The Theosophical Publishing House, England.
6.
Deuas and Men by The Southern Centre of Theosophy, Robe, South Australia. Published by The Theosophical Publishing House, India.
7. 8.
The Seven Rays by Ernest Wood. Quest Book. Published by The Theosophical Publishing House, Wheaton, Il1inois.
.Th e Iching, The Richard Wilhelm translation from Chinese into German. Rendered into English by Cary F. Bayness. Published by Princeton University Press, Princeton, New Jersey 08540.
9.
Education and Significance in Life by Krishnamurti. Published by Victor Gollancz Ltd., London.
III
3a8
THt: ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
APPENDl X D
ppe nd ix 0
9.
Practical Techniques of Psychic Self-Defense by Murray Hope. Published by Aquarian Press, Wellingborough, Northamptonshire, London.
10 .
Spiritual Cleansing (A Handbook on Psychic Protection) by Draja Mickaharic. Published by Samuel Weiser, In c.
11 .
Complete Guide to Oracle and Prophesy Methods by Joseph J . Weed. Published by A. Thomas & Company, Welling. borough, Northamptonshire.
12 .
Voluntary Controls (Exercises for Creative Meditation and for Activating the Potential of the Chakras) by Jack Schwarz. Published by E.P. Dutton , 2 Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016.
13 .
The Crystal Book by Dael Walker. Published by Crystal. Company, P.O ..Box 348, Sunol, CA 9 4586.
14 .
Th e Complete Crystal Guideboo k by Uma Silbey. Published by U-Read PUblications P.O. Box 31131, San Fran. cisco, CA 94131. '
RECOMMENDED BOOKS ON ESOTERIC PRACTICES
1.
Autobiography of a Yogi by Paramahansa Yogananda, Published by Self-Realization Fellow ship, 3880 San Rafael Avenue, Los Angeles, Californ ia 90065.
2.
A t th e Feet of th e Master by J . Krishnamurti. Pu blished by the Theosophical PUblishing House, Wbeaton, Illinois.
3.
Raja Yoga by Wallace Slater. ' Publi shed by Theosophical Publishing Hou se, Wheaton, Illinois, 6018 7.
4.
Th e Yoga o f Light (The Classic Esoteric Hand book of Kundalini Yoga - Hatha Yoga Prad ipika] by Hans-Ulrich Rieker. Published by the Dawn Horse Press , Star Route 2, Middletown, CA 9 5461. ,
aa9
5.
Th eories of th e Chakra : Bridge to High er Consciousness by Hiroshi Motoyama. Qu est Book.
15 .
Initiation Into the Hermetics by Franz Bardon. Published by Dieter Ru ggeberg, Wuppertal, Western Germany.
6.
The Spiritual Science o f K riya Yoga by Goswami Kriyananda. Published by The T emple of Kriya Yoga, 241 4 North Kedzie, Chicago , Illinois 60647.
16.
The GOlden Dawn by Ismael Regardie. Published by Llewellyn Publications, P.O. Box 43383-PSD, St., Paul, MN 55164.
17.
Zen Mind , Beginner's Mind by Shunryu Suzuki. Published by John Weatherbill, Inc. of New York and Tokyo.
18 .
Th e Three Pillars of Zen by Philip Kapl eau . Published by Anchor Press/Doubleday, Garden City , New York.
19.
Mind in Buddhist Psychology. Translated from the Tibetan by Herbert V. Guenther & Leslie S. Kawamura. Published
17.
Th e Secret Path by Paul Bru nton. PUblished by DeVorss & Co ., PUblishers.
8.
Raja-Yoga by Swami Vivekananda. Published by Ramakrisna Vivekanan da Center o f New York , 17 East 9 4th Street, New Yo rk, NY 10028 . I
340
TIlE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OF PRANIC HEALING
APPENDlXD
341
by Dharma Publishing, 5856 Doyle Street, Emeryville, CA 94608.
29 .
Taoist Yoga (Alchemy & Immortality) by Lu K'uan Yu , Published by Samuel Weiser, Inc. .
20 .
The Essentials of Buddhist Philosophy by J unjiro Takakusu. Published by Samuel Weiser, In c.
30 .
21.
The Secrets of Chinese Meditation by Lu K'ua nYu. Published by Samuel We iser , In c., P.O. Box 612, Yo rk Bea ch Maine 03910 .
The Taoist J Ching. Translated by Thomas Cleary. Published by Shambhala Publications, Inc., 31 4 Dartmouth Street, Boston, Massachusetts 02116.
31.
The Tao of Power (Tao Te Ching) . Translated by R.L. Wing. Published by Doubleday & Co ., Inc.
32 .
The Book of Sufi Healing by Shaykh Hakim Moinuddin Ch ishti. Published by Inner Traditions International, Inc., 31 4 Dartmouth St., Boston , Massachusetts 02116.
33 .
Mastery Through Accomp lishment by Hazrat Inayat Khan . Published by Sufi Order Publications, P.O . Box 396. New Lebanon, NY 12126.
34.
Sufi Message Volum es (1 -1 3) by Hazrat Inayat Khan. Published by Sufi Order Publications.
35.
The Sufis by Idries Shah. Published by Doubleday & co., Inca., 245 Park Ave. , New York, NY 100717.
22.
Buddhist Meditation by Edward Co nze, Published by Harper & Row, Publishers, Inc., 10 East 53rt1 St., New York, NY 10022.
23.
Unto Thee I Grant by Sri. Ramatherio . Published by Supreme Grand Lod ge of A.M.O.R. C., Inc., Ro sicrucian Park , San Jose, Californ ia 9 5191.
24 .
Teach ings of Tib etan Yoga . Translated and Annotated by Garma C. C. Chang, Published by Citade l Press, 120 Enter- . prises Avenue, Secau cus Avenue , NJ 0709 4.
25.
Clear Light of Bliss (Mahamudra in Vajrayana Buddhism) by Gesh e Kelsang Gyatso . Translated by Te nzin Norbu. Published by Wisdom Publication s, 291 Brompt on Road, London SW3 2DY, England .
26.
Tai Chi Ch uan by Yan g Jwing Ming, Pub lished by Un ique PUblications, Inc., 7011 Sunset Blvd ., Ho llywo od, CA 90028 .
36.
The Perfect Joy of Saint Francis by Felix Timmermans. Published by Doubleday & Co., Inc. , 245 Park Ave., New York, NY 10017.
27.
Awaken Healing En ergy Through th e Tao by Mantak Chiao Published by Aurora Press , 205 T hird Avenue, 2A New York, ' NY 10003.
37.
The Tao of Medi tation (Way to Enlightenment) by Jou Tsung Hwa. Published by Tai Chi Fo undation , Jou Tsung Hwa, 1'0801094, Piscataway , NJ 088 54 .
The Spiritual Instructions of Saint Seraphim of Sarov by Franklin Alb ert Jones. Published by The Dawn Horse Press, 731 N. La Bread Ave., Los Angeles, CA 90038.
38 .
The Imitation of Christ by Thomas A. Kempis, Published by Doubleday & Co., Inc.
28 .
342
THE ANCIENT SCIENCE AND ART OFPRANIC HEALING
:m.
Spiritual Exercises of St . Ignatius by Louis J. Publ, S,J. Published by Tbe Newman Press, Westminster, Maryland.
~O .
More Precious than Rubies (Handbook on Spiritual Exercises) by K.C. Chan. Published by Vantage Press, 516 West 34th Street, New York, NY 10001.
41.
The Infinite Way by Joel S. Goldsmith. Published by De Vorss & Co. , Publishers, P. O. Box 550, Marina del Rey, CA 902901.
APPENDIX D
343
"Like the bee gathering honey from th e different flow ers, the wise man accepts the essence of different scriptures and sees only the good in all religions. " - 'Srimad Bhaoavatam '
Harmony through tolerance. Diversity in Forms, Unity in Essenc e!
~ 42 .
The Armour of Light (Part I & II) by Olive C. B. Pixley. Published by Helios Book Service (Publications) Ltd ., 8, The Square, Toddington, Chkeltenhan, Glos., England.
113.
New Insights Into Christian Worship by James Ingall Wedgwood. Published by The St. Alban Press, P. O. Box 598, Ojai, CA 93023.
4.
The Science of the Sacraments by C.W. Leadbeater. Published by The Theosophical Publishing House, India.
:45 .
A Practical Guide to Qabalistic Symbolism by Gareth Knight. Published by Samuel Weiser, Inc.
116.
Experience of the Inner Worlds by Gareth Knight. Published by Helios Book Service (Publications) Ltd.
47.
Kosh er Yoga by Albert L. Schutz & Hilda W. de Schaps. Published by Quantal PUblishing .
48 .
Meditation and Kabbalah by Aryeh Kaplan. Published by Samuel Weiser, Inc.
9.
Meditation and the Bible by Aryeh Kaplan. Published by Samuel Weiser, Inc.
- C.K .S.
AUTHOR'S NOTE: For serious spiritual aspirants, these books are a must for study and practice. They have been arranged in such a way that the aspirant will be guided step by step; thereby, avoiding confusion and waste of time and energy . Books on esoteric -pract ices are arranged from easy to difficult, and are grouped together according to the nature of the discipline. To accelera te th e d issemination of esoteric teachings and practices, it is advisable to hove these books translated into different major langu ages. I
l
344
THE LORD BUDDHA HAS SAID
Let us inspect our thoughts that we do no unwholesome deed; for as we sow, so shall we reap. Hatreds never cease by hatreds in this world. By love alone they cease. This is an ancient law. Goodwill towards all beings is the true religion: cherish in your hearts boundless goodwill to all that lives.
~
Go and do your duty : show kindness to thy brothers and free them from suffering.
\
~
